Home

TML87 Instruction Manual

Contents

1. C Watchdog LED Sample Chamber Heater 50 H 8 valve Permeation Tube Heater NENNEN Shutter Zero Span and IZS Options Zero Span Valve Zero Span and IZS Options Sample Cal Valve H2S gt SO converter heater Figure 10 18 Relay Board Status LED Locations Sixteen LEDs are located on the analyzer s relay board to indicate the status of the analyzer s heating zones and valves as well as a general operating watchdog indicator Table 10 2 shows the states of these LEDs and their respective functionality Table 10 2 Relay Board Status LED s LED COLOR FUNCTION STATUS WHEN LIT STATUS WHEN UNLIT D1 RED Watchdog circuit Cycles On Off every 3 seconds under control of the CPU D2 YELLOW Sample chamber heater HEATING NOT HEATING D3 YELLOW 25 2 502 converter HEATING HEATING D4 YELLOW Unused N A N A D5 YELLOW ZS heater Perm Tube HEATING NOT HEATING option D6 YELLOW Unused N A N A D7 GREEN eias Mele Valve open to zero span valve Valve open to sample inlet D8 GREEN Zero Span Valve option Valve open to zero gas inlet Valve open to span gas inlet Gas stream bypasses H2S gt Valve open to H2S gt 5 D9 GREEN SO2 H2S valve SO converter Analyzer converter Analy
2. Analog Outputs 4 Y 15 Optional l Female Male seer Control Inputs A3 1 6 Status Outputs 4 mc Analog External Outputs Digital 1 D A PC 104 CPU Card Power Up A D Circuit ES Disk On Box Chip m BOARD Flash Chip 9 Thermistor Internal Analog d Interface Digitall O Sensor Inputs 2 Bus Externally Powered SAMPLE z Pneumatic CHAMBER Sensor 12 Status mE TEMPERATURE 9 d gt Board Keybd LED Pi le Sample amp RELAY 125 PERM TUBE OS a mot Display BOARD c ensor TEMPERATURE ufe alf uf ul E Sample Flow OTF FL aye Sensor Shutter zo gt Sample Chamber OTE 9 E Heater control ul UV Reference Detector 1 125 Option i 5 i Permeation i Option Temperature Tube Heater E Sensor PMT TEC Drive IZS Valve PCA Option PREAMP PCA H2S gt 50 Converter t H2S gt SO H2S gt SOz2 CONVERTER Valve PMT TEC TEMPERATURE SENSOR U Figure 10 10 TML87 Electronic Block Diagram 05496 Rev A6 199 Theory Of Operation TML87 Instruction Manual The core of the analyzer is a microcomputer that controls various internal processes interprets dat
3. 1 2 3 4 R1 SEE TABLE C1 D PHOTOCELL TP1 15V 01 TEST PLUG J1 Q1 oo oo 2 Q3 15 4 15V 27 8 C2 MICROFIT 1 0uf U2 ed LT146083 2 5 CDD END 1 VCC GND IN OUT REF FO REF SCK 2 5 T IN SDO IN CS o GND GND GND GND LTC2413 B PCA VERSION TABLE R1 04120 0000 4 99M 04120 0200 2 0M XN TELEDYNE pe MONITOR LABS A Teledyne Technologies Company The information herein is thef APPROVALS DATE PCA UV DETECTOR PREAMP property of ML and is submitted in strictest con fidence for reference only A Unauthorized use by anyone for any other purposes is CHECKED DRAWING REVISION prohibited This document or 04420 any information contained in it may not be duplicated APPROVED LAST MOD acu without proper authorization 3 Aug 2004 1 2 1 2 3 4 5 6 TP2 P2 TEST PLUG d P1 TP6 e Q2 Drain Vn lt e 5 Lae 04693_p2 5 ee 4 0 4 LAMP OUTPUT TP4 04693 p2 sch Drive Voltage R20 Ss i VDRIVE eo y RP2D o x 4 7K SUE 5 P 0
4. 1 2 R28 it 50K DI 2 6 2V ZENER SEE TABLE 3 PMT TEMP CONFIG JUMPER 62V 4 S 6 R35 R15 12V REEF RD 10K SEE TABLE 2 el 412V REF 1 VREF NI 2 COOLER CONTROL R2 3 AGND 511K INLINE THERMISTOR R32 RTI R7 499 10K 5V SYS 73 COMP 100 200E 0200EU D2 T 6 R18 10K 10K 14K 5 R15 55K 55K 47K A U13 ES R10 8 09K 8 09K 10K 2 5 1 4 2 TEST 4 99K R10 INLINE 9 RA AM 74AHC1GU04 SEE TABLE PN2222 TPIS TP17 TP25 TPIO TP22 21 TP20 lO ol Io ol Signal Connector J6 1 ELEC TEST SURE 2 OPTICTEST 3 PREAMP RNG BIT2 4 PREAMP RNG BIT1 PMT TEMP HVPS lt 6 HVPS VOLTAGE 7 SIGNAL 8 8 15 1 2 15V 3 4 2 Power Connector 8 100uF 9 10 MINIFIT 10 15V Printed documents are uncontrolled C46 Title 4 16v 0 68 uF PMT PREAMP PCA Schematic Size Number Revision 04181 H B Date 10 May 2007 Sheet 1 of 3 File N PCBMGR 04179cc Source RevG 04 179 By 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 N U4 8 6 EMEN 7 NC4 6 9 IN3 ETEST ETEST SIGNAL TU NC3 COM3 10 74AHC1GU04 m2 16 ETEST PREAMPI 14 15
5. INSTRUMENT CHASSIS KICKER EXHAUST TO PUMP MOLYBDENUM CONVERTER SAMPLE GAS SO H S INLET SO Scrubber T EXHAUST GAS OUTLET Gas Flow when multigas version of mmm M101E analyzer is measuring 50 8 SPAN GAS INLET SAMPLE CHAMBER REACTION CELL PURGE SAMPLE PRESSURE SENSOR SCRUBBER KICKER ZERO AIR INLET FLOW PRESSURE SENSOR PCA Figure 5 2 Pneumatic Diagram of the TML87 With 7 5 Option Installed 36 05496 Rev A6 87 Instruction Manual Optional Hardware and Software The following table describes the state of each valve during the analyzer s various operational modes Table 5 1 Zero Span Valve Operating States MODE VALVE CONDITION VALVE PORT CONNECTION FIG 5 2 Sample Cal Open to SAMPLE inlet 322 SAMPLE Zero Span Open to ZERO AIR inlet 322 Sample Cal Open to zero span inlet 122 ZERO CAL Zero Span Open to ZERO AIR inlet 322 Sample Cal Open to zero span inlet 122 SPAN CAL Zero Span Open to SPAN GAS inlet 122 The state of the zero span valves can also be controlled e Manually from the analyzer s front panel by using the SIGNAL I O controls located under the DIAG Menu Section 6 9 2 e By activating the instrument s A
6. I SPAN GAS INLET I lt z UV y LAMP ZERO AIR INLET PMT 5 o a lt E d gt 2 o 5 HYDROCARBON 5 SAMPLE SCRUBBER 4 PRESSURE ip KICKER Q SENSOR FLOW FLOW PRESSURE SENSOR SENSOR PCA Figure 10 7 TML87 Gas Flow and Location of Critical Flow Orifice 10 3 2 Multigas Measurement amp H2S gt SO Switching Valve When installed and operating the multigas measurement option allows the instrument to be configured so that it can measure either or both H2S or SO A Teflon switching valve activated under CPU control via the l C buss and the relay board directs the sample gas stream through the SO scrubber and H2S gt SO converter HS measurement mode or directly to the sample chamber bypassing the H2S gt SO converter allowing the analyzer to measure SO When the multigas option Option 82 is activated this valve switches back and forth allowing the analyzer to measure both SO H S see Section 5 5 The cycle for this operation is 194 05496 Rev A6 TML87 Instruction Manual Theory Of Operation Table 10 1 TML87 Multigas Valve Cycle Phases Default Gas Mode H2S gt SO Valve Status Time Activity Settings H2S Gas stream directed through 0 3 Wait period Ensures sample chamber has been scrubber and
7. Rees 44 5 9 3 Dilution Ratio Option occi obere tid erecti reise ci e cen obvio e Ed 44 ii 05496 Rev A6 TML87 Instruction Manual Table of Contents 5 10 Extended Warranty Options 92 amp 99 rescue irt Leni tees eher tunes E gae Ra Lr creen E Re ev Rue da dena ine 45 6 0 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 41 enne enne sanaaa aaa Ea aaa Danaa 47 6 1 Overview of Operating sieh ne ten nnns nnn rens 47 6 2 Sample Mode wcc nu EE 6 2 1 Test Furictioris e iode Pee d drea 6 2 2 Warning Messages 6 9 Galibration MOGe 3 3 ne Eee bem eii E eM II 6 3 1 SETUP PASS Calibration Password 52 CA Aser mS 54 6 4 1 SETUP Mode Password Security eee Ade tad ete eo Late deu educ de 55 6 5 SETUP CFG Viewing the Analyzer s Configuration 55 6 6 SETUP CLK Setting the Internal Time of Day Clock eene nennen nennen nennen 56 6 7 SETUP RNGE Analog Output Reporting Range Configuration 58 6 7 1 Available Analog Output
8. E M 143 t A Manual Calibrations ue E 143 7 3 Manual Calibration Checks onere ciere 147 7 4 Manual Calibration with Zero Span nennen nennen 148 7 5 Manual Calibration with 175 151 7 6 Manual Calibration Checks with IZS or Zero Span 151 7 7 Manual Calibration in INDEPENDENT or AUTO Reporting Range Modes 153 7 7 1 Calibration With Remote Contact 154 7 8 Manual Calibration Multigas Measurement 154 7 9 Automatic Calibration Checks 2 2 nenne nennen nnne 155 7 9 1 AutoCal of Instruments in INDEPENDENT or AUTO Reporting Range Modes 159 7 9 2 AutoCal of instruments in Multigas Measurement 159 7 10 Calibration Quality ssis E 8 0 EPA PROTOCOL CALIBRATION Calibration Requirements i aa Ee 8 1 1 Calibration of Equipment bri mer e RE ERE Pia 8 1 2 Data Recording Device 8 1 3 Recom
9. 5 The DEL key 0 9 inserts a character deletes a character 7 The CH and CH keys move before the cursor at the cursor space O6 96 amp location location 2 the cursor left and right lt gt along the text string PES 130 05496 Rev A6 87 Instruction Manual Operating Instructions To Initialize the modem press SAMPLE RANGE 500 0 PPB TST 5 gt CAL SETUP X X 1 MODE 0 SET EDIT SAMPLE ENTER SETUP PASS 818 ENTR SETUP X X 1 BAUD RATE 19200 SETUP PRIMARY SETUP MENU SET SET EDIT CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE EXIT returns SETUP X X to the previous SECONDARY SETUP MENU menu SETUP SET SET EXIT SETUP X X INITIALIZE MODEM SETUP X X COMMUNICATIONS MENU Select which SET SET INIT EXIT COM Port is tested ID COM1 COM2 7 SETUP INITIALIZING MODEM EXIT returns to the SET SET INIT EXIT Communications Menu gt 6 12 2 7 COM Port Password Security In order to provide security for remote access of the TML87 a LOGON feature can be enabled to require a password before the instrument will accept commands This is done by turning on the SECURITY MODE Section 6 10 8 Once the SECURITY MODE is enabled the following items apply A password is required before
10. aet cU DNO pecu quiere 25 3 3 Initial Gali Fat OM 27 3 3 1 Basic Calibration Procedure 2 3 itte t e e e e Rp ie p 27 3 3 2 Interferences for 25 5 29 4 0 FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS amp GLOSSARY interire 31 nag om EP i 31 4 2 61055 ET H pe 32 5 0 OPTIONAL HARDWARE AND SOFTWARE nhan sette inde nnne inii nnns inner rnit 35 5 1 Rack Mount Kits Options 20a 20b amp 35 5 2 Current Loop Analog Outputs Option 4 35 5 3 Particulate Filter Kit Option 424 ete ettet nent en e IER alten aei a a 36 5 4 Calibration Valves Optlons ener dnte Renton Phe dna teta pere hb terna trinh nn in 36 5 4 1 Zero Spatn Valves b0 y ch ee o cr Pe ait mr PORE 36 5 4 2 Internal Zero Span Gas Generator Option 51 nennen ne
11. delle ead n Pene 90 6 10 5 DTE and DCE Communication duse ced eoe beue qe d deci brevis 92 6 10 6 Ethernet Card Configuration ieri perit rete re n pn db Exe Fdo 93 6 10 6 1 Ethernet Card COM2 Communication Modes and Baud Rate eme 93 6 10 6 2 Configuring the Ethernet Interface Option using 93 6 10 6 3 Manually Configuring the Network IP 0 nennen enn 96 6 10 6 4 Changing the Analyzers 5 en nennen 98 6 10 7 Multidrop RS 232 Set Up 5 eret Ente PR CREER Fee ede 99 6 10 8 COM Port Communication enne 101 6 10 9 COM Port Baud re dte deett EnaA doe Haee de dn ie ede dee ed dne gestae dee 104 6 10 10 COM Port Testing eene te ne semen Qd eue eoa don lue ro EU teu ene 105 6 11 Using the Data Acquisition System 5 105 6 11 1 1DAS Structure RE TERR MERE 106 EEMPIBIp Xen at M 106 6 11 1
12. 133 6 12 4 1 General Overview of Hessen Protocol 133 6 12 4 2 Hessen COMM Port Configuration 134 6 12 4 3 5 134 6 12 4 4 Selecting a Hessen Protocol in inten een 135 6 12 4 5 Setting The Hessen Protocol Response 136 6 12 4 6 Hessen Protocol Gas ID eet ettet ee AA a aa Re dod s 137 6 12 4 7 Setting Hessen Protocol Status 138 6 12 4 8 Instrument ID Gode 5 eere set t mee Rr e PEE 140 7 0 CALIBRATION PROCEDURES 11 141 7 1 Calibration Preparations 2 pedes dete nene Leod eidem e cde aera dues 141 7 1 1 Required Equipment Supplies and eene 141 Ie 142 PANES Gas Standards directa Ee rr rea EP dante sad SE ERAS REA 142 1 14 Permeation E 142 751 5 143 7 1 6
13. 1 Generator PMT Temp Analog Signal to Motherboard PMT Temp PMT Sensor Temperature Feedback Circuit TEC Control PCA PMT Output Signal Figure 10 17 PMT Preamp Block Diagram The PMT temperature control loop maintains the PMT temperature around 7 C and can be viewed as test function PMT TEMP on the front panel The electrical test ETEST circuit generates a constant electronic signal intended to simulate the output of the PMT after conversion from current to voltage By bypassing the detector s actual signal it is possible to test most of the signal handling and conditioning circuitry on the PMT preamplifier board See section 6 9 6 for instructions on performing this test The optical test OTEST feature causes an LED inside the PMT cold block to create a light signal that can be measured with the PMT If zero air is supplied to the analyzer the entire measurement capability of the sensor module can be tested including the PMT and the current to voltage conversion circuit on the PMT preamplifier board See section 6 9 5 for instructions on performing this test 05496 Rev A6 207 Theory Operation TML87 Instruction Manual 10 4 7 Pneumatic Sensor Board The flow and pressure sensors of the TML87 are located on a printed circuit assembly just behind the PMT sensor Refer to Section 11 5 15 1 on how to test this assembly The signals of this board are
14. PREV Moves to the previous data point channel SETUP X X DATA ACQUISITION PV10 Moves the view back 10 data VIEW EDIT EXIT points channels Keys only appear as needed SETUP X X CONC DATA AVAILABLE NEXT VIEW EXIT SETUP 00 00 00 525 1 0 0 10 PREV NEXT 10 PRM EXIT SETUP X X PNUMTC DATA AVAILABLE PREV NEXT VIEW EXIT SETUP X X 00 00 00 SMPFLW 000 0 cc m PRM EXIT SETUP X X CALDAT DATA AVAILABLE PREV VIEW EXIT SETUP X X 00 00 00 S2SLP1 0 000 PV10 PREV PRM PRM EXIT 110 05496 Rev A6 TML87 Instruction Manual Operating Instructions 6 11 2 2 Editing iDAS Data Channels iDAS configuration is most conveniently done through the sensor e com remote control program The following list of key strokes shows how to edit using the front panel EXIT will return to the previous SAMPLE display Moves the display up amp down the list of Data Channels Inserts a new Data Channel into the list BEFORE the Channel currently being displayed Moves the display between the PROPERTIES for this data channel SAMPLE RANGE 500 0 PPB lt TST 5 gt CAL SAMPLE ENTER SETUP PASS 818 ENTR SETUP X X PRIMARY SETUP MENU CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE Main Data Acquisition Menu SETUP DATA ACQUISITION VIEW EDIT EXIT Edit Data Channel Menu SETUP X X 0 CONC ATIMER 2 4032 R Exits to the Main Data Acqu
15. cvv qud ween believer 227 11 1 4 3 Status LEDS in rte pr tette rrt tergo toc e dua d goes 227 11 2 Gas Flow Problemis emitu tette ue ue 228 11 2 1 2 or Low Sample FIOW rte crier deed dee dee dele dde dee due edes p 229 s O MEM ME 229 11 3 Calibration Problems 2 roce nectit ed preci tee VE 229 11 3 1 Negative Concentrations irent einen poet rgo tentent uiia ee gen 229 11 3 2 0 ie D tete xe eR 230 11 3 3 Unstable Zero and Span crore ie dee ei derer needed ate date d ge dete ane 230 11 3 4 Inability to Span No SPAN 230 11 3 5 Inability to Zero No ZERO Key a aaa a a a Dp fondre xcd 231 11 3 6 Nonskinear ResSponse eter re rrr 231 11 3 7 Discrepancy Between Analog Output and 232 11 4 Other Performance Problems eerie cingere idee edere dne nacre de dee dee deiade dme ea da dee god dpa ra dene 232 BE XESGIIS WII 232 11 4 2 Slow
16. o PO gt Connect a voltmeter between the pin and the pin of the output being tested Table 11 8 Under the DIAG SIGNAL I O menu Section 6 9 2 scroll through the inputs and outputs until you get to the output in question Alternately turn on and off the output noting the voltage on the voltmeter it should vary between 0 volts for ON and 5 volts for OFF 11 5 8 4 Control Inputs The control input bits can be tested by the following procedure 1 Connect a jumper from the 5 V pin on the STATUS connector to the 5 V on the CONTROL IN connector 2 Connect a second jumper from the pin on the STATUS connector to the A pin on the CONTROL IN connector The instrument should switch from SAMPLE mode to ZERO CAL R mode 3 Connect a second jumper from the on the STATUS connector to the B the CONTROL IN connector The instrument should switch from SAMPLE mode to SPAN CAL R mode In each case the TML87 should return to SAMPLE mode when the jumper is removed 11 5 9 CPU There are two major types of CPU board failures a complete failure and a failure associated with the Disk On Chip DOC If either of these failures occur contact the factory For complete failures assuming that the power supplies are operating properly and the wiring is intact the CPU is faulty if on power on e The watchdog LED on the motherboard is not flashing 238 05496 Rev A6 TML87 Instructi
17. 58 6 7 2 Physical Range versus Analog Output Reporting 59 6 7 3 Reporting Range MOdeS 3 erect RR ERR HERREN EE RERBA Rr Ma Rte ERES E rr Enna to er Fo tr er ere paco 59 6 7 4 Single Range mode SNGL 2 prier enger er aet c eee ode E e HE eee ee o abe inue eee Ene ip ce 60 6 7 5 Independent Range Mode IND rien e Tenes ener td user a ose eed dde HU 61 6 7 6 Auto Range Mode AUTO ee Re nauim dein ele ten 63 6 7 7 Range Units ite Rene I de Dire ti e Pei ie aere pee i a tide eiae qi e ette 64 6 78 Dilution or e e REPRE Ee ERE 65 6 8 SETUP VARS Using the Internal 65 6 8 1 Setting the Gas Measurement Mode tree vineta een iod een 68 6 9 SETUP DIAG Using the Diagnostics 69 6 9 1 Accessing the Diagnostic Features 2 tueretur rri ent n ret ge e 70 6 9 2 5 EE 70 6 9 3 Analog Output Step eec peo pee eee iet eie aie eevee viedo 71 6 9 4 Analog I O Corffiguration 2 rire cti oet eere eei etd coe need cedo sx d eoe
18. SETUP SAMPLE MODE AVG INST AVG MIN MAX EXIT Press the key for the desired mode SETUP PRECISION 1 ENTR accepts the new setting and returns to the previous menu EXIT ignores the new setting SET SET EDIT and returns to the previous EXIT SETUP PRECISION 1 Set for 0 4 1 SETUP X X STORE NUM SAMPLES OFF SET Returns to previous SET EDIT EXIT Functions SETUP X X STORE NUM SAMPLES OFF OFF ENTR EXIT Turn ON or OFF P 6 11 2 5 Sample Period and Report Period The iDAS defines two principal time periods by which sample readings are taken and permanently recorded SAMPLE PERIOD Determines how often iDAS temporarily records a sample reading of the parameter in volatile memory The SAMPLE PERIOD is set to one minute by default and generally cannot be accessed from the standard iDAS front panel menu but is available via the instruments communication ports by using sensor e com or the analyzer s standard serial data protocol SAMPLE PERIOD is only used when the iDAS parameter s sample mode is set for AVG MIN or MAX 05496 Rev A6 115 Operating Instructions TML87 Instruction Manual REPORT PERIOD Sets how often the sample readings stored in volatile memory are processed e g average minimum or maximum are calculated and the results stored permanently in the instruments Dis
19. CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE SETUP X X Enter Current TIME OF DAY CLOCK Time of Day Enter Current Date of Year TIME DATE SETUP X X TIME 12 00 SETUP X X DATE 01 JAN 02 ENTR EXIT 01 JAN 02 SETUP DATE 01 JAN 02 TIME 12 00 ENTR EXIT 01 JAN 0 2 ENTR EXIT SETUP X X TIME OF DAY CLOCK TIME DATE SETUP X X EXIT returns to the main SAMPLE display CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE EXIT 56 05496 Rev A6 TML87 Instruction Manual Operating Instructions In order to compensate for CPU clocks which run fast or slow there is a variable to speed up or slow down the clock by a fixed amount every day To change this variable press SAMPLE RANGE 500 0 PPB lt TST TST gt CAL XXX X SETUP SAMPLE ENTER SETUP PASS 818 SETUP X X PRI MARY SETUP MENU CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE EXIT SETUP X X SECONDARY SETUP MENU COMM VARS DIAG EXIT SETUP X 0 MEASURE MODE H2S NEXT JUMP EDIT PRNT EXIT SETUPX X 1 DAS HOLD 15 0 Minutes PREV NEXT JUMP EDIT PRNT EXIT Continue to press NEXT until SETUP X X 8 CLOCK ADJ 0 Sec Day EDIT PRNT EXIT JUMP REV SETUP XIX CLOCK ADJ 0 Sec Day ENTR EXIT Enter sign and number of seconds per day the clock gains or loses SETUP X X 8 CLOCK ADJ 0 Sec Day EDIT PRNT EXIT
20. 80 Table 6 14 Test Parameters Available for Analog Output 4 87 Table 6 15 Ethernet Status 93 Table 6 16 LAN Internet Configuration 94 Table 6 17 Internet Configuration Keypad 99 Table 6 18 COMM Port Communication modes 102 Table 6 19 Front Panel LED Status Indicators for 5 106 Table 6 20 iDAS Data Channel 107 Table 6 21 iDAS Data Parameter 108 Table 6 22 Status Output Pin 125 Table 6 23 Control Input Pin 126 Table 6 24 Terminal Mode Software rennen nennen nnn 127 Table 6 25 Command Types otii i HE DR HE OU E EP ia 128 Table 6 26 Serial Interface 133 Table 6 27 RS 232 Communication Parameters for Hessen 134 Table 6 28 TML87 Hessen Protocol Response enne nnn 136 Table 6 29 Default Hessen Status Bit 138 Table 7 1 NIST SR
21. 192 10 2 7 2 UV Absorption by OZONE sio eiei aided ieda ade den ede dace Fede idee rad ene dere dtes 192 aer EMPIRE 192 10 2 7 4 Third Body Quenching 2 ete edenda e E 193 10 2 7 5 m 193 10 3 Pnreuriatic Operatiorn 21 shee rr rtr VE Ue OR ette ent elis ee e Re 193 10 3 1 5 194 10 3 2 Multigas Measurement amp H2S gt 502 Switching 194 10 3 3 Flow Rate piae e ites net tee e te fen eens 195 10 3 3 1 Critical ElOWOFIfICe rer ee rtt nr er PR E EE Ern rb ERE E RR PA 195 10 3 4 Sample Particulate Filters cine ein eot eret ieee eee 196 10 3 5 Hydrocarbon Scrubber Kicker 196 10 3 6 SOs SCruDDe hig 197 10 3 7 197 10 3 7 1 Sample Pressure SernsOr nire Rr Er Re nt PAPE e EE 197 10 3 7 2 Sample Flow ood eet Eee n tee ee ite
22. 87 Instruction Manual Operating Instructions 6 11 2 7 RS 232 Report Function The TML87 iDAS can automatically report data to the communications ports where they can be captured with a terminal emulation program or simply viewed by the user To enable automatic COM port reporting follow the instruction shown in section 6 11 2 2 then press From the DATA ACQUISITION menu Edit Data Channel Menu SETUP X X 0 CONC ATIMER 2 4032 R Exits to the main PRNT EXIT Data Acquisition menu EDIT INS DEL PREV NEXT SETUP X X lt SET SET gt EDIT PRINT Press SET gt key until SETUP X X RS 232 REPORT OFF lt SET SET gt EDIT PRINT ENTR accepts the new setting and returns to the previous menu RS 232 REPORT OFF EXIT ignores the new setting and returns to the previous ENTR EXIT menu SETUP X X Toggle key to turn reporting ON or OFF gt OFF 6 11 2 8 Compact Report When enabled this option avoids unnecessary line breaks on all RS 232 reports Instead of reporting each parameter in one channel on a separate line up to five parameters are reported in one line 6 11 2 9 Starting Date This option allows the specification of a starting date for any given channel in case the user wants to start data acquisition only after a certain time and date If the Starting Date is in the past the iDAS ignores this setting
23. ENTR E Rd EXAMPLE Reporting range 800 ppb Span gas 720 ppb previous display 05496 Rev A6 149 Calibration Procedures TML87 Instruction Manual Step Three Perform the calibration or calibration check according to the following flow chart SAMPLE RANGE 500 0 PPB TST TST gt CAL Scroll the display to the H2S STB test function This function calculates the stability of the H2S measurements SAMPLE 25 STB XXX X PPB lt TST TST gt CAL CALZ ACTION Allow zero gas to enter the sample port at the rear of the instrument Wait until H2S STB falls below 0 5 ppb This may take several minutes Analyzer enters ZERO CAL mode ZERO CAL lt TST TST gt ZERO CONC XXX X EXIT returns the unit to SAMPLE mode without changing the calibration values Pressing ENTR changes the calibration of the instrument H2S X XXX lt TST TST gt ZERO CONC EXIT The value of H2S STB may jump significantly Wait until it falls below 0 5 ppb This may take several minutes lt TST TST gt CAL CALZ CALS Analyzer enters SPAN CAL Mode SPAN CAL M lt TST TST gt SPAN CONC EXIT returns to the SAMPLE mode without changing the calibration values lt TST TST gt ENTR CONC Pressing ENTR changes the calibration of the instrument If either the ZERO or SPAN button fails to appear see Chapter 11 EXIT retur
24. Continue to press NEXT until DIAG TEST CHAN OUTPUT EXIT returns to the main PREV NEXT ENTR EXIT SAMPLE display DIAG TCHN TEST CHANNEL NONE NEXT ENTR EXIT PREV NEXT Press PREV or NEXT to move through the list of available parameters Table 6 14 DIAG TCHN TEST CHANNEL PMT READING Press ENTR to select the displayed parameter activating the test channel ENTR Press EXIT to return to the DIAG menu Table 6 14 Test Parameters Available for Analog Output A4 TEST CHANNEL SAMPLE PRESSURE HVPS VOLTAGE NONE PMT READING UV READING SAMPLE FLOW RCELL TEMP CHASSIS TEMP IZS TEMP PMT TEMP CHASSIS TEMP This refers to the voltage range of the parameter and not the output signal of the test channel Once a TEST function is selected the instrument begins to report a signal on the A4 output and adds TEST to the list of test functions viewable on the display just before the TIME display 05496 Rev A6 87 Operating Instructions TML87 Instruction Manual 6 10 SETUP COMM Setting Up the Analyzer s Communication Ports The TML87 is equipped with two serial communication ports located on the rear panel Figure 3 2 Both ports operate similarly and give the user the ability to communicate with issue commands to and receive data from the analyzer through an external computer system or terminal B
25. lt TST 5 gt CAL SETUP SAMPLE ENTER SETUP PASS 818 8 1 8 ENTR SETUP X X CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE EXIT SETUP XX RANGE CONTROL MENU MODE SET UNIT EXIT To change the value of the reporting range span enter the number by pressing the key under each digit until the expected value appears Press this button to select the concentration units of measure PPB PPM UGM amp MGM EXIT ignores the new setting and returns to the RANGE CONTROL MENU ENTR accepts the new setting and returns to the RANGE CONTROL MENU STEP TWO Set the expected H2S span gas concentration The H2S span concentration values automatically default to 450 0 Conc To change this value to the actual concentration of the span gas enter the number by pressing the key under each digit until the expected value appears SETUP X X RANGE 500 0 CONC 0 0 5 0 0 ENTR EXIT SETUP RANGE 500 0 Conc 0 0 0 5 0 0 ENTR EXIT SAMPLE RANGE 500 0 PPB 25 XXX X lt 5 5 gt SETUP M P CAL RANGE 500 00p PPB 25 TST TST gt ZERO EXIT CONC CAL 25 SPAN CONC 450 0 Conc 0 0 0 4 5 0 ENTR EXIT This sequence causes the analyzer to prompt for the expected H2S span concentration EXIT ignores the new setting and returns to the previous display ENTR accepts the new setting and retums to the
26. 04 de SCL 22 SCL P05 9 MAINT SW h SDA 23 2 10 LANG SELCT DS6 SDA P06 7 x AE M M3 a EB GRN LED 4 14 YEL LED 9 9 PCF8575 mi 5 REDIED RI 1000 ONLY 16 4 Layout Instructions 17 LED 5 0 Ef LED 6 Al P15 1 Minimum trace width 8 mil would like to have U3A 19 HORN ERE P16 20 SPR IIO 0 SONALERT 10 mil traces if possible O PRE 5 17 2 Please run traces on both and backside but MF4 CLK 9 5 gt where possible fill one side with GND D lt 3 Minimum width for 5 DISP DISP PWR m CLR 8 DISP RET is 40 mil except to test points 4 2 300pF vec st points RI 1000 ONLY U4 7 VCC d J3 TO FRM DISPLAY OPT MAINT SWITCH DISP DA A0 1 AO gt 2 1 m S12 U3B DISP DA AI 2 Al PI i 4 3 10 DISP DA 2 3 PRE 9 KYBRD INT A2 2 6 5 OL CLK 090 P3 8 7 TIER J4 TNR NEM SCL 1 d DISP WR MAINT SW EL MAINTSW 177 BJ ox ly SDA bs i it DISP BUSY MAINT SW RET 2 P6 J 14 Bt MAINT LED 3 MAINT LED MM74HC74A PCF8574 P7 5 16 15 ES MAINT LED 4 4 MAINT LED LANGSW 2 LANG SELCT DISPLAY DATA LB LANG SW RET jas g INT lt SPRI 0 7 a SPR 00 DISP_DA_A0 JP2 2 TERMINATION d SPR I O RET 8 DISP CN AO DISP DA 1 1 2 SCL V DISP PWR SPRIO 1 9 i SPR I O 1 DISP CN AI DISP DA A2 13 4 S DA 5 DISP DISP RET SPR TORET 10 K DIPCNA2 DISP_PWR_EN must vcc SPR I O 2 SPR_I O_2 c E SPR VO RET 1
27. 87 Instruction Manual Operating Instructions To select SNGLE range mode and to set the upper limit of the range press SAMPLE RANGE 500 0 PPB 25 lt 5 5 gt CAL SETUP SETUP C 3 RANGE MODE SNGL SAMPLE ENTER SETUP PASS 818 SNGL IND AUTO ENTR EXIT SETUP C 3 PRI MARY SETUP MENU RANGE CONTROL MENU CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE MODE SET UNIT SETUP C 3 RANGE CONTROL MENU SETUP C 3 RANGE 500 0 Conc MODE SET UNIT 0 0 0 EXIT SETUP RANGE MODE SNGL SETUP C 3 RANGE CONTROL MENU EXIT x 2 returns to the main SAMPLE display SNGL IND AUTO ENTR EXIT MODE SET UNIT EXIT 6 7 5 Independent Range Mode IND Selecting independent range mode allows the A1 and A2 outputs to be configured with different measurement ranges The analyzer software calls these two ranges LOW and HIGH The LOW range setting corresponds with the analog output labeled A1 on the rear panel of the instrument The HIGH range setting corresponds with the A2 output While the software names these two ranges LOW and HIGH they do not have to be configured that way Also in this mode the RANGE Test function displayed on the front panel during SAMPLE mode will be replaced by two separate functions RANGE1 amp RANGE2 LOW range RANGE1 Range value for output A1 1500 ppb H2S HIGH range RANGE2 Range value for output 2 0 500 ppb 5 For TML87 s configured t
28. 100 2 R14 10 0K LMC6464BIM 0 LMC6464BIM R33 4 R28 C18 R30 1 00K Q6 B NINTB30NO6L INTB30NO6L 6 04K 0 LMC6464BIM LMC6464BIM LMC6464BIM R10 1 00 R20 1 00K R9 R6 R19 0 2 0 2 0 2 R21 SZ 7 2 Cll C5 RII 0 1uF 49 9 0 1uF 49 9 Title TEC Amplifier PCB i VW Mounting Holes Size Number Revision B 04932 e Date 13 Jan 2005 Sheet1 of File NAPCBMGRWUNREL4930PWNWProtel49BOd9BIB y RI 1 2 3 4 5 6 be A 3 SCH E Series Analog Output Isolator 04467 Size Number Revision 04468 B A Date 6 28 2004 Sheet of File N PCBMGR 04468B sch Drawn By Az
29. 541 5 fi tt M Title Schema ic for E Series Mo herboard PCA 05702 Number Revision Orcad B 06708 B Date 10 Jun 2006 Sheet Of 8 File N Pcbmgr UNREL 05701 E motherboard 2105701 DDB 74HC32 74HC32 ele Ole AU U24 74 574 74 574 RNIO 510x8 hf 44 C4 X i X X 7 44 44 44 47 47 47 44 DIGITAL OUTPUTS PS2702 4 A STATUS OUTPUTS tn RESEITABLE FUSE 03A 60V D6 H LB lt 07 FEBEAD DIODE SCHOTTKY EXT 45V OUT PS2702 4 B STATUS OUTPUTS Title Schema ic for E Series herboard PCA 05702 Number rd Orcad B pue 10 Jun 2006 Shet Of 8 N Pcbmegr UNREL 05701 E motherboard gei 74HC32 74HC32 ele LO oJ D MJ DIGITAL OUTPUTS PS2702 4 117 7 574 hf 44 44 dd CONTROL OUTPUTS 47 47 447 PS2702 4 021 7 574 12VO DIODE SCHOTTKY R58 EXTERNAL REAR PANEL ALARM OUTPUTS a ee Ne Title Schema ic for E Series Mo herboard PCA 05702 Size Number Revision Orcad B A Date 10 Jun 2006 Sheet 8f 8 Fie N Pcbmgr UNREL 05701 E motherboard 2105701 DDB ON JP2 15V PMT TEMPERATURE FEEDBACK FOR 100E 200E SHORT PINS 2 amp 5 ONLY FOR 200EU SHORT PINS 3 amp 6 and PINS 2 amp 5
30. C45 100pF TPA NREN 15V 2 2 R33 4 99K U22 LTI1790AIS6 S 7 t OUT 2 BIN ee C51 4155 OY 0 IuF 50V 10uF 16V CA0000192 5 LOCAL CA0000199 R42 4 99K B 7 HVPS 41 34 U6 R47 Iout 8 RNI gt 9 392K LF353 D5 D7 R49 D4 10K 10uF 25V C33 16V 0 68 uF COMP m 0 5 LOCAL Z 15 o DACO0802 51 12V REF TPS 5V LOCAL 08 1714 15V 3 nS our IN __OUT ON OFFGNC LM78L12ACZ 3 D6 C34 a CIS 29811 5 110005 10uF 25V 10uF 25V 10uF 25V l 2 5V VRI Printed documents are uncontrolled LM336Z 2 5 Title L3 PMT PREAMP PCA Schematic Size Number Revision B 04181 H 15V Date 10 May 2007 Sheet3 of File N PCBMGR 04179cc Source RevG 041 79 By 2 3 4 3 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 MI M2 bs M3 M4 051 GRN RN rr b a eed cu MAINT LED V Do pa he wow h AA DS3 7 RED eG KEYBOARD LED amp HORN 220 02 E 3 4 Ds4 KBD 0 21 7 KBD AI 2 jr m 5 RF 4 KBD A2 3 6 A P02 L NT 7
31. ER 9 3 1 Uripacking and Initial Setup erii mne tete nione kx ED Koo uen exe 9 3 1 1 Electrical Connections ae 11 3 1 1 1 Connecting the Analog Outp ts trente EE tene prix ie ERE ento bx ERR ien rire ignes 12 3 1 1 2 Connecting the Status Outputs 2 ierit tere ra ER ce Re Rea Kee Pese ERA ER raid iR i 13 3 1 1 3 Connecting the Control Inputs 52 once trece eter eden eerte ede dr de dnb da evene ode dated ier del 14 3 1 1 4 Connecting the Serial Ports 1 erred reine iet ene Enel ie donee Siena in 15 3 1 1 5 Connecting toa LAN or the Internet ie itte tene tite hated Le pose uode 15 3 1 1 6 Connecting to a LAN or the 16 3 1 2 pct pc EU edge ed E 16 3 1 2 1 Connections with Internal Valve Options 18 2 1 21 CD Ergo EDEN 21 SPADA IBS eL 23 3 2 3 Warning MB amp 58agges een e ete e rig eser der eerie Sat Ae Poetis 23 3 2 4 Functional Check 5 2 2 eni tuto
32. Sample pressure warning 05492 Rev C A 27 APPENDI X A 5 TML87 iDAS Functions Revision A 3A TML87 Instruction Manual Table A 6 TML87 iDAS Functions Revision A 3A NAM DESCRIPTION UNITS LAMPR UV lamp ratio of calibrated intensity 9 6 S2SLP2 SO slpeforrange 2 Bm H2SLP2 or TRSLP2 H S TRS slope for range 2 PPB mV S20FS1 SO offset for range 1 mV SO offset for range 2 m H2OFS1 or TROFS1 H S TRS offset for range 1 m H2OFS2 or TROFS2 H S TRS offset for range 2 m V V V before computing new slope and offset i PB PB S2ZSC2 SO concentration for range 2 during zero span calibration just P before computing new slope and offset H2ZSC1 or TRZSC1 H S TRS concentration for range 1 during zero span calibration just before computing new slope and offset H2ZSC2 or TRZSC2 H S TRS concentration for range 2 during zero span calibration PPB just before computing new slope and offset 52 1 SO concentration for range 1 S2CNC2 SO concentration for range 2 H2CNC1 or H S TRS concentration for range 1 H2CNC2 or TRCNC2 H S TRS concentration for range 2 STABIL SO or H2S TRS concentration stability select with STABIL GAS variable CNVEFl Converter efficiency factor for range amp 1 CNVEF2 Convertereffidencyfactorforrange 42 SMPFLW cdm SMPPRS Sample pressure Hg 6 Diagnostic
33. 05496 Rev A6 215 Theory Of Operation TML87 Instruction Manual 10 6 1 4 Keyboard Display Interface Electronics I C to Relay Board I C to from CPU Key Press Detect I C Interface Keyboard Interrupt Status Bit Display Data Display Decoder Controller Display Power Watchdog Parallel Data Display Write From 5 VDC Power Supply Optional Sample LED Maintenance Green poms LED 1 L Nm 2 40 CHAR VACUUM e e Figure 10 22 Keyboard and Display Interface Block Diagram FLUORESCENT DISPLAY Fault LED KEYBOARD Red Beeper FRONT PANEL The keyboard display interface electronics of the TML87 Analyzer watches the status of the eight front panel keys alerts the CPU when keys are depressed translates data from parallel to serial and back and manages communications between the keyboard the CPU and the front panel display Except for the Keyboard interrupt status bit all communication between the CPU and the keyboard display is handled by way of the instrument s buss The CPU controls the clock signal and determines when the various devices on the bus are allowed to talk or required to listen Data packets are labeled with addresses that identify for which device the information is intended Keypad Decoder Each key on the front panel communicates with a decoder IC via a separate analog line When a key is depressed the decode
34. 183 10 0 THEORY OF OPERATION m 185 10 1 Measurement Principle 3 heed cng an Ree Kee 185 10 1 1 25 dp lets dene tiec 185 10 1 2 505 Ultraviolet Fluorescence i retener SHE an Seren aee a Dem e Le Re end onte ea 186 10 2 The UV Eight e Miet eb DR HO UE e p deti eek sla a 188 10 2 1 UV Source Lamp sy eee EH EFE RENT 188 10 2 2 The Referernice Detector 5 etre rie e E debe itu it 189 10 23 The PM UE 189 10 2 4 UV Lamp Shutter amp PMT 2 2 0 a EEE A AEn AE AEA EEEN ana 189 10 2 5 0 E 190 10 2 5 1 UV Source Optical Filter 1 E EHE Ee 190 10 2 5 2 PMT Optical Filter e Ege de pae ote ee he n reper pe etc ve corn ete 190 10 2 6 Optical LENSES E 191 10 2 7 dva Ee crane eere pa IRE Eg 192 10 2 7 1 Direct Interference z ert
35. 87 Instruction Manual Operating Instructions To enter the signal I O test mode press SAMPLE RANGE 500 0 PPB XXX X DIAG SIGNAL I O Use the NEXT amp PREV keys to move between signal types TST TST gt CAL SETUP PREV NEXT JUMP ENTR EXIT S SH SAMPLE ENTER SETUP PASS 818 DIAG 1 0 EXT_ZERO_CAL OFF Use the JUMP key to go directly toa specific signal 8 1 8 ENTR PREV NEXT JUMP PRNT EXIT See Appendix 4 for pud returns a complete list of available SIGNALS SAMPLE display EXAMPLE SETUP X X PRIMARY SETUP MENU DIAG 1 0 JUMP TO 12 EXAMPLE CFG DAS PASS CLK 1 2 ENTR EXIT Enter 12 to Jump to 12 ST CONC VALID SETUP SECONDARY SETUP MENU DIAG 1 0 ST_CONC_VALID ON Exit to return to the DIAG COMM VARS DIAG EXIT PREV NEXT JUMP ON PRNT EXIT gt Pressing the PRNT key will send a formatted printout to the serial port and be captured with a computer or other output device 6 9 3 Analog Output Step Test This test can be used to check the accuracy and proper operation of the analog outputs The test forces all four analog output channels to produce signals ranging from 096 to 100 of the full scale range in 2096 increments This test is useful to verify the operation of the data logging recording devices attached to the analyzer To begin the Analog Output Step Test press SAMPLE RANGE
36. The 175 option is heated with a proportional heater circuit and the temperature is maintained at 50 C 1 Check the IZS TEMP function via front panel display Section 6 2 1 and the IZS TEMP signal voltage using the SIGNAL function under the DIAG Menu Section 6 9 2 At 50 C the temperature signal from the IZS thermistor should be around 2500 mV 11 5 17 Box Temperature The box temperature sensor thermistor is mounted on the motherboard at the bottom right corner of the CPU board when looking at it from the front It cannot be disconnected to check its resistance Box temperature will vary with but will always read about 5 C higher than ambient room temperature because of the internal heating zones from the H2S converter sample chamber and other devices To check the box temperature functionality we recommend checking the BOX TEMP signal voltage using the SIGNAL I O function under the DIAG Menu Section 6 9 2 At about 30 C 5 above typical room temperature the signal should be around 1500 mV We recommend using a certified or calibrated external thermometer temperature sensor to verify the accuracy of the box temperature 11 5 18 PMT Temperature PMT temperature should be low and constant It is more important that this temperature is maintained constant than it is to maintain it low The PMT cooler uses a Peltier thermo electric element powered by 12 VDC from the switching power supply PS2 The temperature is contro
37. 05496 Rev A6 119 Operating Instructions TML87 Instruction Manual 6 11 2 10 Disabling Enabling Data Channels Data channels can be temporarily disabled which can reduce the read write wear on the disk on chip To disable a data channel follow the instruction shown in section 6 11 2 2 then press From the DATA ACQUISITION menu Edit Data Channel Menu SETUP X X 0 ATIMER 2 4032 R Exits to the main PREV NEXT INS DEL EDIT PRNT EXIT Data Acquisition menu SETUP X X NAME CONC SET SET EDIT PRINT Press SET key until SETUP X X CHANNEL ENABLE ON SET SET EDIT PRINT ENTR accepts the new setting and returns to the previous menu EXIT ignores the new setting and returns to the previous Toggle key to turn menu SETUP X X CHANNEL ENABLE ON channel ON or OFF OFF ENTR EXIT 120 05496 Rev A6 87 Instruction Manual Operating Instructions 6 11 2 11 HOLDOFF Feature The iDAS HOLDOFF feature allows to prevent data collection during calibrations and during the DAS HOLDOFF period enabled and specified in the VARS Section 6 8 To enable or disable the HOLDOFF follow the instruction shown in section 6 11 2 2 then press From the DATA ACQUISITION menu Edit Data Channel Menu SETUP X X 0 CONC ATIMER 2 4032 Exits to the main Data Acquisition PREV NEXT INS DEL EDIT PRNT EXIT menu SETUP X X NAME CONC SET SET EDIT PRINT
38. 10 2 7 Measurement Interferences It should be noted that the fluorescence method for detecting SO is subject to interference from a number of sources The TML87 has been successfully tested for its ability to reject interference from most of these sources 10 2 7 1 Direct Interference Obviously since the TML87 measures H2S by converting it to SO the most significant interfering gas for this measurement would be ambient SO that is present in the sample gas The TML87 circumvents this by passing the sample gas through a chemical scrubber that removes all SO from the sample gas before the H2S gt SO conversion takes place This ensures that the only SO present in the sample chamber is the result of the H S gt SO conversion Obviously to make sure that the analyzer operates correctly it is important to make sure that this scrubber is functioning properly The second most common source of interference is from other gases that fluoresce in a similar fashion to SO when exposed to UV Light The most significant of these is a class of hydrocarbons called poly nuclear aromatics PNA of which xylene and naphthalene are two prominent examples Nitrogen oxide fluoresces in a spectral range near to SO For critical applications where high levels of NO are expected an optional optical filter is available that improves the rejection of NO contact customer service for more information The TML87 Analyzer has several methods for rejecting interfe
39. CFG RNGE PASS CLK PREV NEXT Go To iDAS ON MENU TREE Fig A 8 OFF TIME DATE MODEL NAME SERIAL NUMBER SOFTWARE REVISION LIBRARY REVISION SOFTWARE REVI SI ON HESSEN PROTOCOL REVI SI ON ACTI VE SPECI AL SOFTWARE OPTIONS CPU TYPE DATE FACTORY CONFI GURATION SAVED MODE SET UNIT SNGL IND AUTO 1 Only appears if a applicable TI MER ENABLE Go To option feature is installed STARTING DATE lt 5 5 gt EDIT SECONDARY SETUP MENU and activated STARTI NG TI ME Fig A 5 Appears whenever the DELTA DAYS currently displayed DELTA TI ME 3 sequence is not set for Low HI GH DI SABLED DURATION 3 Only appears when CALI BRATE reporting range is set to AUTO range mode RANGE TO CAL Figure A 3 Primary Setup Menu Except iDAS 05492 Rev C A 5 APPENDI X 1 TML87 Software Menu Trees Revision A 3A TML87 Instruction Manual SETUP VIEW m PREV NEXT CONC PNUMTC CALDAT VIEW lt PRM PRM gt Cycles through lists of parameters chosen for this iDAS channel 10 PREV NEXT 10 SS Selects data point to view PREV NEXT E Cycles through available trigger events see Section 6 11 2 3 PREV NEXT RNGE PASS EDIT PREV NEXT EDIT CONC PNUMTC CALDAT p SET EDIT PRN
40. PNUMTC Collects sample flow and sample pressure data at five minute intervals and stores an average once day with a time and date stamp This data is useful for monitoring the condition of the pump and critical flow orifice sample flow and the sample filter clogging indicated by a drop in sample pressure over time to predict when maintenance will be required The last 360 daily averages about 1 year are stored CALDAT Logs new slope and offset every time a zero or span calibration is performed This Data Channel also records the instrument reading just prior to performing a calibration Note this Data Channel collects data based on an event a calibration rather than a timer This Data Channel will store data from the last 200 calibrations 108 05496 Rev A6 87 Instruction Manual Operating Instructions This does not represent any specific length of time since it is dependent on how often calibrations are performed As with all Data Channels a time and date stamp is recorded for every data point logged The Channel Properties Triggering Events and Data Parameters Functions for these default channels are PARAMETER PMTDET MODE AVG PRECISION 4 STORE NUM SAMPLES OFF PARAMETER UVDET MODE AVG PRECISION 4 STORE NUM SAMPLES OFF PARAMETER LAMPR MODE AVG PRECISION 4 STORE NUM SAMPLES OFF PARAMETER DRKPMT MODE AVG PRECISION 4 STORE NUM SAMPLES OFF PARAMETER DARKUV MODE AVG PRECI
41. 11 5 8 2 Analog Output Voltages To verify that the analog outputs are working properly connect a voltmeter to the output in question and perform an analog output step test as described in Section 6 9 3 For each of the steps taking into account any offset that may have been programmed into the channel Section 6 9 4 4 the output should be within 196 of the nominal value listed in the table below except for the 096 step which should be within 2 3 mV If one or more of the steps is outside of this range a failure of one or both D A converters and their associated circuitry on the motherboard is likely Table 11 7 Analog Output Test Function Nominal Values FULL SCALE OUTPUT VOLTAGE 100MV 1V 5V 10V STEP NOMINAL OUTPUT VOLTAGE 1 0 0 mV 0 0 0 2 20 20 mV 0 2 1 2 3 40 40 mV 0 4 2 4 4 60 60 mV 0 6 3 6 5 80 80 mV 0 8 4 8 6 100 100 mV 1 0 5 10 05496 Rev 6 237 TROUBLESHOOTING amp REPAIR TML87 Instruction Manual 11 5 8 3 Status Outputs The procedure below can be used to test the Status outputs 1 Connect a cable jumper between the and the V pin on the status output connector 2 Connect a 1000 resistor between the 5 V and the pin for the status output that is being tested Table 11 8 Status Outputs Check Pin Out PIN left to right SUAUU System Ok Conc Valid High Range Zero Cal Span Cal Diag Mode Spare Spare
42. APPENDI X 7 Setting up Communications TML87 Instruction Manual needed for each analyzer When more than one analyzer is in a system the second analyzer will be 2XX e g 502 250 Reported Refer to system prints for system specific ID s HESSEN STATUS FLAGS COMI Set any the flag number to 0001 for any warning that should sent out on the serial string as a common analyzer fault All other flags should be set to 0000 except for the PPM UNITS which should be set to 4000 Please see table below for TML recommended list of analyzer specific flags which should be set to 0001 1 MODE This number is a hexadecimal based on the following settings It may change with software revisions and therefore is not listed here QUITE MODE ON COMPUTER MODE ON SECURITY MODE OFF HESSEN PROTOCOL ON 7 1 MODE OFF RS 485 MODE OFF MULTI DROP MODE ON ENABLE MODEM OFF ERROR CHECKING OFF XON XOFF HANDSHAKE OFF HARDWARE HANDSHAKE OFF HARDWARE FIFO ON COMMAND PROMPT OFF 1 BAUD RATE 2400 A 32 05492 Rev C TML87 Instruction Manual APPENDI X A 7 Setting up Communications Warning ID SO TRS NO co CO PMT DET UV LAMP BOX TEMP PMT TEMP RCELL TEMP SAMPLE FLOW SAMPLE PRESSURE X ox x X ox x 5 MANIFOLD TEMP CONV TEMP RCELL PRESSURE X High
43. DOS Shell API FIRMWARE Memory Handlin Analyzer Operations IDAS R d Calibration Procedures Configuration Procedures Calibration Data K Autonomic Systems System Status Data Diagnostic Routines PC 104 BUS ANALYZER HARDWARE Interface Handling M t Sensor input Data easuremen Display Messages Algorithm Keypad H2S amp SO Analog Output Data PC 104 BUS RS232 amp RS485 External Digital 1 0 Figure 10 23 Basic Software Operation 10 7 1 Adaptive Filter The TML87 H5S analyzer software processes sample gas measurement and reference data through a built in adaptive filter built into the software Unlike other analyzers that average the sensor output signal over a fixed time period the TML87 calculates averages over a set number of samples During operation the software automatically switches between two filters of different lengths based on the conditions at hand During conditions of constant or nearly constant concentration the software computes an average of the last 240 samples This provides the calculation portion of the software with smooth stable readings If a rapid change in concentration is detected the adaptive filter switches modes and only averages the last 20 samples This allows the analyzer to respond to the rapidly changing concentration more quickly Once triggered the shor
44. This may take several minutes Press ENTR to changes the OFFSET amp SLOPE values for the 5 measurements Press EXIT to leave the calibration unchanged and return to the previous menu ACTION Allow span gas to enter the sample port at the rear of the instrument M P CAL H2S STB X XXX PPB H2S XXX X The SPAN key now appears lt TST TST gt during the transition from zero to span EXIT You may see both keys RANGE 500 0 PPB H2S XXX X lt TST TST gt ENTR SPAN CONC EXIT CAL RANGE 500 0 H2S XXX X lt TST TST gt ENTR CONC EXIT The value of H2S STB may jump significantly Wait until it falls back below 0 5 ppb This may take several minutes Press ENTR to change the OFFSET amp SLOPE values for the H2S measurements Press EXIT to leave the calibration unchanged and return to the previous menu EXIT returns to the main SAMPLE display 146 05496 Rev A6 TML87 Instruction Manual Calibration Procedures 7 3 Manual Calibration Checks Informal calibration checks which only evaluate but do not alter the analyzer s response curve are recommended as a regular maintenance item and in order to monitor the analyzer s performance The following section describes the basic method for manually checking the calibration of the TML87 analyzer in 5 measurement mo
45. nennen 26 Table 5 1 7 Valve Operating States 37 Table 5 2 175 Valve Operating States castae tiene treinta ede edo nn E Rada T nnde 38 Table 5 3 H8 SO Switching Valve Operating 41 Table6 1 Analyzer Operating MOOS 2 nein needed ea t edil e e ace Tu LO e E accade a 48 Table 6 2 lt Test Functions Deflned 3 nei aede titre 49 Table 6 3 List of Warning 51 Table 6 4 Primary Setup Mode Features and 54 Table 6 5 Secondary Setup Mode Features and 54 Table 6 6 Variable Names VARS Revision 66 Table 6 7 TML87 Diagnostic DIAG Functions 18 69 Table 6 8 DIAG Analog I O nennen mmn nnne nnns 72 Table 6 9 Analog Output Voltage 72 Table 6 10 Analog Output Current Loop Range sssssssssesseeee enm nennen nennen nennen nennen nennen 73 Table 6 11 Analog Output Pin 73 Table 6 12 Voltage Tolerances for Analog Output 76 Table 6 13 Current Loop Output Calibration with
46. 013390000 55 KICKER TML50 87 03 2 013400000 CD SO2 50 87 0 1 0 83 J j 013420000 55 ROTARY SOLENOID TML50 7 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 013570000 55 THERMISTOR 1 1 1 1 3 O 014080104 55 HVPS SOXNOX 1 1 0 3 J j 016290000 WINDOW SAMPLE FILTER 47MM 1422 016300700 55 SAMPLE FILTER 47MM ANG 1 1 3 037860000 ORING TFE RETAINER SAMPLEFILTER 1 040010000 55 FAN REAR PANEL E SERIES O 1 1 1 2 2 040030100 PCA FLOW PRESSURE 040300100 ASSY CONFIG PLUG FOR 045230200 AC MAIN 100 115V 50 60H2 3 040300200 ASSY CONFIG PLUG FOR 045230200 MAIN 220 240V 50 60HZ 3 040300300 55 PLUG FOR 045230200 SINGLEHEATER 3 041020000 55 MOLY CONVERTER WELD TML87 1 3 041710000 ASSY CPU CONFIGURATION E SERIES mE O 042410200 ASSY INTERNAL PUMP SERIES 02 042580000 KEYBOARD E SERIES WV DETECT 140 3 042890100 ASSY CONFIG PLUG FOR 045230200 PUMP 110 115V 60HZ 1 3 042890200 ASSY CONFIG PLUG FOR 045230200 PUMP 110 115V 50 HZ 3 042890300 ASSY CONFIG PLUG FOR 045230200 PUMP 220 240V 60HZ 1 3 042890400 55 PLUG FOR 045230200 PUMP 220 240V 50 HZ 3 042900100 PROGRAMMED FLASH E SERIES 1 3 f 043940000 INTERFACE ETHERNET E SERIES CEC 3 04467000
47. 3x EXIT returns to the main SAMPLE display PREV NEXT JUMP 05496 Rev A6 57 Operating Instructions TML87 Instruction Manual 6 7 SETUP RNGE Analog Output Reporting Range Configuration 6 7 1 Available Analog Output Signals The analyzer has three active analog output signals accessible through a connector on the rear panel ANALOG OUT SO concentration Not Used outputs Test Channel Al 2 1 4 duae pua e ca LOW range when HI GH range when DUAL mode is selected DUAL mode is selected Figure 6 4 Analog Output Connector Key All three outputs can be configured either at the factory or by the user for full scale outputs of 0 1 VDC 1VDC 5VDC or 10VDC Additionally A1 and A2 may be equipped with optional 0 20 mADC current loop drivers and configured for any current output within that range e g 0 20 2 20 4 20 etc The user may also adjust the signal level and scaling of the actual output voltage or current to match the input requirements of the recorder or data logger See Section 6 9 4 3 amp 6 9 4 5 In its basic configuration the A1 and A2 channels of the 87 present a signal that is proportional to the H2S concentration of the sample gas Several operating modes are available which allow them to be slaved together SNGL Mode see Section 6 7 4 or AUTO mode see section 6 7 6 or operate independently IND mode see Section 6 7 5 The user may also select a variety of reporting ra
48. 500 0 PPB SIGNAL I O lt TST TST gt CAL ENTR EXIT SAMPLE ENTER SETUP PASS 818 DIAG ANALOG OUTPUT PREV NEXT ENTR EXIT Performs analog output step test 0 100 SETUP PRIMARY SETUP MENU DIAG AOUT ANALOG OUTPUT CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE Exit Exit SETUP SECONDARY SETUP MENU ANALOG OUTPUT returns to the DIAG menu COMM VARS DIAG Pressing the key under 0 while performing the test will pause the test at that level Brackets will appear around the value example 20 Pressing the same key again will resume the test 05496 Rev 6 71 Operating Instructions TML87 Instruction Manual 6 9 4 Analog I O Configuration Table 6 8 lists the analog I O functions that are available in the TML87 Table 6 8 DIAG Analog I O Functions SUB MENU FUNCTION AOUTS CALIBRATED Shows the status of the analog output calibration YES NO and initiates a calibration of all analog output channels CONC_OUT_1 Sets the basic electronic configuration of the 1 analog output H2S There are three options e RANGE Selects the signal type voltage or current loop and full scale level of the output e REC_OFS Allows setting a voltage offset not available when RANGE is set to current loop e AUTO_CAL Performs the same calibration as AOUT CALIBRATED but on this one channel only NOTE Any change to RANGE or REC_OFS requires recalibration of this output C
49. A status outputs n J 1017 pins 1 8 bits 0 7 default O address 323 hex ST SYSTEM OK 0 system OK 1 any alarm condition 1 warnings or other conditions that affect validity 05492 Rev C A 23 APPENDIX 4 TML87 Signal 1 O Definitions Revision A 3A TML87 Instruction Manual DESCRI PTI ON of concentration ST HIGH RANGE 2 0 high auto range in use ST ZERO CAL 3 0 in zero calibration ST SPAN CAL 0 in span calibration 1 not in span ST DIAG MODE 5 0 diagnostic mode 1 not in diagnostic mode Spare B status outputs U27 J 1018 pins 1 8 bits 0 7 default 1 O address 324 hex ST LAMP ALARM 0 lamp intensity low 1 lamp intensity OK ST_DARK_CAL_ALARM 0 dark cal warning 1 dark cal OK 0 any flow alarm 1 all flows OK 0 any pressure alarm ST_FLOW_ALARM ST_PRESS_ ALARM 1 all pressures OK ST_TEMP_ALARM 0 any temperature alarm 1 all temperatures OK 0 HVPS alarm 1 HVPS 0 secondary gas mode H2S TRS ST_HVPS_ALARM ST 25 MODE 1 primary gas mode 502 Spare Front panel I C keyboard default 12 address 4E hex MAINT MODE 5 input 0 maintenance mode eee 1 normal mode LANG2_ SELECT 6 input 0 select second language poss 1 select first language English 8 output 0 sample LED on CAL LED 9 output 0 cal LED on Joe quy FAULT LED 10 output fault LED on _ d 0 beeper on for diagnostic testing only
50. C 70 IZS SET temperature will increase or decrease the permeation rate of the 175 E n source Section 5 4 3 Default 50 C Dynamic span automatically adjusts and slope of the H2S response when performing a span point calibration during an DYN SPAN AutoCal Chapter 7 ON OFF Note that the DYN ZERO and DYN SPAN features are not allowed or applications requiring EPA equivalency Allows the user to set the number of significant digits to the right of AUTO 1 2 3 4 CONC PRECISION he decimal point display of concentration and stability values Default AUTO e Dynamic zero automatically adjusts offset and slope of the DYN_ZERO H2S response when performing a zero point calibration ON OFF during an AutoCal Chapter 7 CLOCK_ADJ A djusts the speed of the analyzer s clock Choose the sign if the 60 to 60 s day lock is too slow choose the sign if the clock is too fast 66 05496 Rev A6 TML87 Instruction Manual Operating Instructions To access and navigate the VARS menu use the following key sequence SAMPLE RANGE 500 0 PPB lt TST TST gt CAL SETUP SAMPLE ENTER SETUP PASS 818 8 1 8 SETUP PRIMARY SETUP MENU CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE EXIT SETUP X X SECONDARY SETUP MENU COMM VARS DIAG EXIT SETUP X X 0 MEASURE_MODE H2S NEXT JUMP EDIT PRNT EXIT EXIT ignores the new setting ENTR accepts the new setting See Section 6 8 1 for instruct
51. Open to ZERO AIR inlet 322 Sample Cal Open to zero span valve 122 ZERO CAL 5 Zero Span Open to ZERO AIR inlet 322 Sample Cal Open to zero span valve 122 SPAN CAL Zero Span Open to SPAN GAS inlet 122 38 05496 Rev A6 87 Instruction Manual Optional Hardware and Software The state of the IZS valves can also be controlled Manually from the analyzer s front panel by using the SIGNAL I O controls located under the DIAG Menu Section 6 9 2 By activating the instrument s AutoCal feature Section 7 9 e Remotely by using the external digital control inputs Section 6 12 1 2and Section 7 7 1 or e Remotely through the RS 232 485 serial I O ports see Appendix 6 for the appropriate commands Sources of zero and span gas flow must be capable of supplying at least 700 cm min Both supply lines should be vented outside of the analyzer s enclosure In order to prevent back diffusion and pressure effects these vent lines should be between 2 and 10 meters in length External Zero Air Scrubber The IZS option includes an external zero air scrubber assembly that removes all H2S in the zero air source The scrubber is filled with activated charcoal The Permeation Source Span gas is created when zero air passes over a permeation tube containing liquid H2S under high pressure which slowly permeates through a PTFE membrane into the surrounding air The speed at which the H5S permeates the membrane i
52. R1 499 S3 7 FLOW SENSOR 2 4 5 3 CN 647 X3 1 0UF 4 1 pd LM4040CIZ 84 C3 2 1 0 B 3 4 CON4 The information herein is the property of TML and is submitted in strictest con fidence for reference only Unauthorized use by anyone for any other purposes is prohibited This document or any information contained in it may not be duplicated without proper authorization 21 TELEDYNE MONITOR LABS A Teledyne Technologies Company SCH PCA 04003 PRESS FLOW E SERIES CHECKED 5 DRAWING NO REVISION 04354 APPROVED LAST MOD pe 3 Dec 2007 19 AR 18 AB 17 16 5 15 14 13 12 11 10 4 shorted sldr side 1 O 2 JP3 IDC HEADER IOR oa ow L 1 J USIA 8 R61 47k 5 JO E ADDR 0x360 DEFAULT ADDR 0x320 INSTALLED Pins 1 amp 2 shorted on PCA 74HC32 U50A 74HC32 U7 74 541 47 5 R5 0 15 uF ceramic Notes 1 This schematic is for PCA 05560 2 This schematic is for PCB 05559 ES Oo 1 Title Date File SRERB Cee er AMaAwne MICROFIT 16 1 K R24 22 5 LED smt 1206 R4 22K 5 DGND vw a 5 Schema ic for E Series PCA 057
53. TML87 Instruction Manual EPA Protocol Calibration 8 1 3 Recommended Standards for Establishing Traceability To assure data of desired quality two considerations are essential 1 the measurement process must be in statistical control at the time of the measurement and 2 the systematic errors when combined with the random variation in the measurement process must result in a suitably small uncertainty Evidence of good quality data includes documentation of the quality control checks and the independent audits of the measurement process by recording data on specific forms or on a quality control chart and by using materials instruments and measurement procedures that can be traced to appropriate standards of reference To establish traceability data must be obtained routinely by repeat measurements of standard reference samples primary secondary and or working standards More specifically working calibration standards must be traceable to standards of higher accuracy such as those listed in Table 7 1 Cylinders of working gas traceable to NIST SRM s called EPA Protocol Calibration Gas are also commercially available from sources such as Scott Specialty Gases etc 8 1 4 EPA Calibration Using Permeation Tubes Teledyne Instruments does not recommend the use of permeation tubes as a source of span gas for EPA protocol calibration operations 8 1 5 Calibration Frequency To ensure accurate measurements of the SO concentrati
54. eed dicen dee d uude 72 6 9 4 1 Analog Output Signal Type and Range Span 74 6 9 4 2 Analog Output Calibration 74 6 9 4 3 Manual Analog Output Calibration and Voltage 76 6 9 4 4 Analog Output Offset 78 6 9 4 5 Current Loop Output 79 6 9 4 6 terere Fu Re ter RENE Re Ere RU NEN Er Ra pe 81 s Rayon pe ELEME RETI 82 6 9 6 M 83 6 9 7 Lamp Calibrations 84 6 9 8 Calibratiorn oec tete cate eb cie ei eee Parere ero E EN Pe os 85 6 9 9 Flow Calibratlori dore 86 6 9 10 Test Channel Output ee eee reete netta iere e oe v eee ee nce t Tee SER Eo eee PR ede ed 87 6 10 SETUP COMM Setting Up the Analyzers Communication Ports 88 6 10 1 ID Poise E 88 6 10 2 COM Pert Default Settings 89 6 10 3 5 232 Port Cable nnns 89 6 10 4 RS 485 Configuration 2 5 2
55. o Blocked particulate filter o Blocked sample inlet gas line o Failed pressure sensor circuitry If sample pressure is gt 35 in hg o Blocked vent line on pressurized sample zero span gas supply Bad pressure sensor circuitry SYSTEM RESET The computer has rebooted This message occurs at power on If it is confirmed that power has not been interrupted Failed 5 VDC power Fatal error caused software to restart Loose connector wiring UV LAMP WARNING The UV lamp intensity is 600 gt 4995 mV UV lamp is bad Reference detector is bad Mother board analog sensor input circuitry has failed Fogged or damaged lenses filters in UV light path A D converter circuitry failure 1 Normally 29 92 in Hg at sea level decreasing at 1 in Hg per 1000 ft of altitude with no flow pump disconnected 11 1 2 Fault Diagnosis with Test Functions Besides being useful as predictive diagnostic tools the TEST functions viewable from the front panel can be used to isolate and identify many operational problems when combined with a thorough understanding of the analyzer s theory of operation Chapter 10 We recommend use of the sensor e com remote control program to download graph and archive TEST data for analysis and long term monitoring of diagnostic data The acceptable ranges for these test functions are listed in Table A 3 in Appendix A 3 The actual values for these test functions on checkou
56. serial number firmware revision software library revision CPU type and other information Use this information to identify the software and hardware when contacting customer service Special instrument or software features or installed options may also be listed here SAMPLE RANGE 500 0 PPB H2S X XXX lt TST TST gt CAL SETUP SAMPLE ENTER SETUP PASS 818 Press NEXT of PREV to move back 8 1 8 ENTR EXIT and forth through the following list of Configuration information MODEL NAME SERIAL NUMBER SAMPLE PRI MARY SETUP MENU Press EXIT at SOFTWARE REVI SI ON rFT any time to LIBRARY REVISION CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE EXIT return to the iCHI P SOFTWARE REVISI ON SAMPLE display HESSEN PROTOCOL REVI SI SOPTWARE SAMPLE M101E SO2 H2S ANALYZER Press EXIT at CPU TYPE any time to DATE FACTORY GURATI ON NEXT PREV EXIT return to SAVED SETUP menu 4 Only appears if relevant option of Feature is active 05496 Rev A6 55 Operating Instructions TML87 Instruction Manual 6 6 SETUP CLK Setting the Internal Time of Day Clock The TML87 has a built in clock for the AutoCal timer Time TEST function and time stamps on COM port messages and iDAS data entries To set the time of day press SAMPLE RANGE 500 0 PPB lt TST TST gt CAL SAMPLE ENTER SETUP PASS 818 SETUP X X PRIMARY SETUP MENU
57. when setting from the RS 232 interface DAS HOLD OFF MENS 0 5 20 Duration of DAS hold off period TPC ENABLE OFF ON ON enables temperature and pressure compensation OFF disables it RCELL SET 50 30 70 Reaction cell temperature set point and warning limits Warnings 45 55 175 SET 50 30 70 125 temperature set point and warning limits M 45 55 DYN ZERO NN od ON ON enables contact closure dynamic zero OFF disables it DYN SPAN ON ON enables contact closure dynamic span OFF disables it CONC PRECISION 1 CLOCK ADJ Sec Day O 60 60 Time of day clock speed adjustment LANGUAGE SELECT ENGL Selects the language to use for the Number of digits to display to the right of the decimal point for concentrations on the display Enclose value in double quotes when setting from the RS 232 interface double quotes when setting from the RS 232 interface user interface Enclose value in 05492 Rev C A 11 APPENDI X A 2 Setup Variables For Serial O Revision A 3A TML87 Instruction Manual MAINT TI MEOUT Time until automatically switching out of software controlled maintenance mode MEASURE PERIOD Length of time to measure each gas MEASURE DELAY Minutes 3 0 1 20 How long to defer sampling after switching streams CONV TIME Conversion time for PMT and UV detector channels Enclose value in double quotes when setting from the RS 232 interface DWELL TI
58. 100 Records Maximum Basic Settings SMPFLW cc m AVG Set 0 0 Records rae O3FLOW cc m AVG Set 0 0 Records InHg AVG Set 0 0 Records SMPPRS InHg AVG Set 0 0 Records New Chan Number of Records 100 Trigger Event JATIMER V Enable Channel Hold Off Duplicate Print Reports Compact Reports Edit Automatic Timer Settings Start Date n Jan 02 Delete pucum Burg Ese JE New Param BOXTMP 0 AVG Set 0 0 Records z b Parameter PMTDET v Sample Mode ava Cancel Statt Time 00 0000 zi Sample Period O DDD HH MM eport fi fo Store number of samples in average Figure 6 15 sensor e com user interface for configuring the iDAS Once an iDAS configuration is edited which can be done offline and without interrupting DAS data collection it is conveniently uploaded to the instrument and can be stored on a computer for later review alteration or documentation and archival Refer to the sensor e com manual for details on these procedures The sensor e com user manual Teledyne Instruments part number 039450000 is included in the sensor e com installation file which can be downloaded at http www teledyne ML com Although Teledyne Instruments recommends the use of sensor e com the iDAS can also be accessed and configured through a terminal emulati
59. 2 Disconnect the UV lamp from its power supply e You can find the power supply connector by following the two white UV Lamp power supply wires from the lamp to the power supply 3 Loosen but do not remove the two UV lamp bracket screws and the large brass thumbscrew located on the shutter housing see Figure 11 11 so that the lamp can be moved 252 05496 Rev A6 TML87 Instruction Manual TROUBLESHOOTING amp REPAIR 4 Remove the UV Lamp by pulling it straight up 5 6 T 8 9 Insert the new UV lamp into the bracket Tighten the two UV lamp bracket screws but leave the brass thumb screw un tightened Connect the new UV lamp to the power supply Turn the instrument on and perform the UV adjustment procedure as defined in section 11 6 3 5 Finger tighten the thumbscrew 10 Perform a lamp calibration procedure see Section 6 9 7 and a zero point and span point calibration see Chapter 7 05496 Rev A6 253 TROUBLESHOOTING amp REPAIR TML87 Instruction Manual 11 6 3 7 Replacing the PMT HVPS or TEC The PMT should last for the lifetime of the analyzer However in some cases the high voltage power supply HVPS or the thermo electric cooler TEC may fail To replace the PMT the HVPS or the TEC PMT Housing End Plate This is the entry to the PMT Exchange PMT Output Connector PMT Preamp PCA PMT Power Sui amp Aux Signal Connector High voltage Power Supply HVPS
60. 6 83 Operating Instructions TML87 Instruction Manual 6 9 7 Lamp Calibration An important factor in accurately determining H2S concentration once the H2S is converted to SO is the amount of UV light available to transform the SO into SO5 see Section 10 1 1 and 10 1 2 The model TML87 compensates for variations in the intensity of the available UV light by adjusting the H2S concentration calculation using a ratio LAMP RATIO that results from dividing the current UV lamp UV LAMP intensity by a value stored in the CPU s memory LAMP CAL Both LAMP Ratio and UV Lamp are test functions viewable from the instruments front panel To cause the analyzer to measure and record a value for LAMP CAL press SAMPLE RANGE 500 0 PPB lt TST TST gt CAL SETUP SAMPLE ENTER SETUP PASS 818 8 1 8 ENTR Exit at any time to return to main SETUP SETUP XX PRIMARY SETUP MENU menu CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK M RE EXIT SETUP X X SECONDARY SETUP MENU COMM VARS DIAG EXIT SIGNAL I O Repeat Pressing NEXT until LAMP CALIBRATION ENTR DIAG FCAL LAMP CAL VALUE 4262 4 mV E EXIT The value displayed is the ENTR accepts the current output of the UV new value source reference detector EXIT ROB the new value 84 05496 Rev A6 87 Instruction Manual Operating Instructions 6 9 8 Pressure Calibration A sensor at the exit of the sample chamber contin
61. COMMUNICATIONS MENU ID HESN COM2 SETUP X HESSEN VARIATION TYPE 1 SET gt EDIT EXIT ENTR key accepts the new settings SETUP X X HESSEN VARIATION TYPE 1 3 EXI T key ignores the new settings TYPE1 TYPE2 SETUP HESSEN VARIATION 2 OFF ENTR EXIT affects both Ports NOTE While Hessen Protocol Mode can be activated independently for COM1 and 2 TYPE selection 05496 Rev A6 135 Operating Instructions TML87 Instruction Manual 6 12 4 5 Setting The Hessen Protocol Response Mode The Teledyne Instruments implementation of Hessen Protocol allows the user to choose one of several different modes of response for the analyzer Table 6 28 TML87 Hessen Protocol Response Modes MODE ID MODE DESCRIPTION CMD This is the Default Setting Reponses from the instrument are encoded as the traditional command format Style and format of responses depend on exact coding of the initiating command BCC Responses from the instrument are always delimited with lt 5 gt at the beginning of the response lt gt at the end of the response followed by a 2 digit Block Check Code checksum regardless of the command encoding TEXT Responses from the instrument are always delimited with CR at the beginning and the end of the string regardless of the command encoding To Select a Hessen response mode press SAMPLE RANGE 500 0 PPB TST TST CAL SET
62. CONFIGURATION DIAG AlO CONC_OUT_2 REC OFS 0 Exit to return to the main sample display NEXT ENTR EXIT SET SET EDIT EXIT AOUTS CALIBRATED NO DIAG AIO CONC OUT 2 AUTO CAL ON SET SET gt CAL SET SET EDIT EXIT Press SET gt to select the analog output channel to be configured Then press EDIT to continue DIAG AIO AOUT AUTO CAL ON DIAG AIO CONC OUT 2 5V CAL ON ENTR EXIT SET SET EDIT Toggles the ENTR accepts the new setting auto cal mode and returns to the previous menu 7 ON OFF for EXIT ignores the new setting and DIAGUAIO CONG DUT 2 RANGE 5V this analog returns to the previous menu output channel SET EDIT only Now the analog output channels should either be automatically calibrated or they should be set to manual calibration which is described next 6 9 4 3 Manual Analog Output Calibration and Voltage Adjustment For highest accuracy the voltages of the analog outputs can be manually calibrated Calibration is done through the instrument software with a voltmeter connected across the output terminals Figure 6 5 Adjustments are made using the front panel keys by setting the zero point first and then the span point Table 6 12 The software allows this adjustment to be made in 100 10 or 1 count increments Table 6 12 Voltage Tolerances for Analog Output Calibration FullScale Zero Tolerance
63. CPU to control the sample chamber heating circuit and as part of the H2S calculations when the instrument s Temperature Pressure Compensation feature is enabled This measurement is stored in the analyzer memory as a parameter RCEL TEMP and is viewable as a test function under the same name Section 6 2 1 through the analyzer s front panel 125 OPTION PERMEATION TUBE TEMPERATURE SENSOR This thermistor attached to the permeation tube in the IZS option reports the current temperature of that tube to the CPU as part of a control loop that keeps the tube at a constant temperature BOX TEMPERATURE SENSOR A thermistor is attached to the motherboard It measures the analyzer s inside temperature This information is stored by the CPU and can be viewed by the user for troubleshooting purposes through the front panel display This measurement is stored in the analyzer memory as the test function BOX TEMP and is viewable as a test function Section 6 2 1 through the analyzer s front panel 10 4 11 Analog Outputs The analyzer comes equipped with four Analog Outputs A1 A2 A4 and a fourth that is a spare A1 and A2 Outputs The first two A1 and A2 are normally set up to operate in parallel so that the same data can be sent to two different recording devices While the names imply that one should be used for sending data to a chart recorder and the other for interfacing with a data logger either can be used for both applications Both of these cha
64. DIAGNOSTIC FUNCTION AND MEANING MODE SECTION INDICATOR SIGNAL l O Allows observation of all digital and analog signals in the instrument DIAG I O Allows certain digital signals such as valves and heaters to be toggled ON and OFF ANALOG OUTPUT When entered the analyzer performs an analog output step DIAG AOUT test This can be used to calibrate a chart recorder or to test the analog output accuracy ANALOG I O CONFIGURATION Analog input output parameters are available for DIAG AIO viewing and configuration OPTIC TEST When activated the analyzer performs an optic test which turns on an DIAG OPTIC LED located inside the sensor module near the PMT Fig 10 15 This diagnostic tests the response of the PMT without having to supply span gas LAMP CALIBRATION The analyzer records the current voltage output of the UV DIAG LAMP source reference detector This value is used by the CPU to calculate the lamp ratio used in determining the H2S SO2 concentration see 10 2 2 PRESSURE CALIBRATION The analyzer records the current output of the sample DIAG PCAL gas pressure sensor This value is used by the CPU to compensate the H2S concentration when the TPC feature is enabled FLOW CALIBRATION This function is used to calibrate the gas flow output signals DIAG FCAL of sample gas and ozone supply These settings are retained when exiting DIAG TEST CHAN OUTPUT Configures the A4 analog output channel DIAG TCHN ELECTRICAL TEST When acti
65. O Test LED PMT Cold Block Connector to PMT Pre Amp PCA 12V Power Connector Insulation Gasket Light from Reaction PMT Temperature Ghambenenines Sensor through hole in side of Cold Block 7 Thermo Electric Cooler TEC PMT Heat Exchange Fins TEC Driver PCA Cooling Fan Housing Figure 11 13 PMT Assembly Exploded View 1 Remove the sensor module as described in Section 11 6 3 1 2 Remove the sample chamber from the PMT lens and filter housing by unscrewing the 4 hex screws that fasten the chamber to the housing 3 Remove the two connectors on the PMT housing end plate facing towards the front panel 4 Remove the end plate itself 4 screws with plastic washers 5 Remove the two desiccant bags inside the PMT housing 6 Along with the plate slide out the OPTIC TEST LED and the thermistor that measures the PMT temperature Both may be coated with a white thermal conducting paste Do not contaminate the inside of the housing or the PMT tube with this grease 254 05496 Rev A6 TML87 Instruction Manual TROUBLESHOOTING amp REPAIR T 10 11 Unscrew the PMT assembly It is held to the cold block by two plastic screws Because the threads of the plastic screws are easily damaged it is highly recommended to use new screws when reassembling the unit Carefully take out the assembly consisting of the HVPS the gasket and the PMT Change the PMT or the HVPS or both clean the PMT glass
66. ON ON holds D A outputs during zero span calibration OFF permits D A outputs to change PASS ENABLE EL OFF ON ON enables passwords OFF disables them STABIL GAS SO2 SO2 Gas to use to measure concentration H2S stability Enclose value in double quotes when setting from the RS 232 interface STABIL FREQ Seconds 10 1 300 Stability measurement sampling period STABIL SAMPLES Samples 25 2 40 Number of samples in concentration stability reading RCELL CYCLE Seconds 2 0 5 30 Reaction cell temperature control cycle period RCELL PROP 1 9C 0 3 prop 0 10 Reaction cell temperature PID band proportional coefficient 3 3 RCELL INTEG 0 005 0 10 Reaction cell temperature PID integral coefficient RCELL DERIV 0 5 0 10 Reaction cell temperature PID derivative coefficient 175 CYCLE 0 5 30 IZS temperature control cycle period A 16 05492 Rev C TML87 Instruction Manual APPENDI X A 2 Setup Variables For Serial O Revision 125 PROP 175 INTEG i IZS temperature PID integral coefficient IZS DERIV m 125 temperature PID derivative coefficient HVPS SET Volts 650 High voltage power supply warning limits Set point is not used Warnings 400 900 DETECTOR LIMIT UV lamp and PMT detector warning 175 temperature PID proportional coefficient limits Set point is not used Warnings 600 4995 DISP INTENSITY Front panel display intensity Enclose value in double quotes 4 when settin
67. OPT 20B Rack mount brackets with 24 in chassis slides OPT 21 Rack mount brackets only 5 2 Current Loop Analog Outputs Option 41 This option adds isolated voltage to current conversion circuitry to the analyzer s analog outputs This option may be ordered separately for any of the analog outputs it can be installed at the factory or added later Call Teledyne Instruments sales for pricing and availability The current loop option can be configured for any output range between 0 and 20 mA Information on calibrating or adjusting these outputs can be found in 6 9 4 5 Current Loop Option Installed on Analog Output A2 Figure 5 1 Current Loop Option Installed on the Motherboard 05496 Rev A6 35 Optional Hardware and Software TML87 Instruction Manual 5 3 Particulate Filter Kit Option 42A This option includes a one year supply of 50 replacement particulate filters 47mm in diameter 5 micrometer pore size 5 4 Calibration Valves Options 5 4 1 Zero Span Valves Option 50 The TML87 H2S analyzer be equipped with a zero span valve option for controlling the flow of calibration gases generated from external sources This option contains two sets of Teflon solenoid valves located inside the analyzer that allow the user to switch either zero span or sample gas to the instrument s sensor Figure 5 2 shows the internal pneumatic connections for a TML87 with the zero span valve option installed
68. SETUP XX SECONDARY SETUP MENU s CH INS DEL ENTR EXIT COMM EXIT Use these keys See Table 6 19 to edit HOSTNAME SETUP X X COMMUNI CATI ONS MENU HOSTNAME 101E FIELD1 ID INET EXIT INITIALIZING INET 0 2 INITIALIZING INET 100 INITIALIZATION SUCCEEDED INITIALIZATION FAILED SETUP X X COMMUNI CATI ONS MENU Contact your IT Network Administrator ID INET 98 05496 Rev A6 87 Instruction Manual Operating Instructions Table 6 17 Internet Configuration Keypad Functions Moves the cursor one character to the left Moves the cursor one character to the right Inserts a character before the cursor location Deletes a character at the cursor location FUNCTION Press this key to cycle through the range of numerals and characters available for insertion 0 9 A Z space 2 965 amp Y 7 Accepts the new setting and returns to the previous menu Ignores the new setting and returns to the previous menu Some keys only appear as needed 6 10 7 Multidrop RS 232 Set Up The RS 232 Multidrop consists of a printed circuit assembly that plugs onto the CN3 CN4 and CN5 connectors of the CPU card see Figure 6 9 and the cabling to connect it to the analyzer s motherboard This PCA includes all circuitry required to enable your analyzer for Multidrop operation It converts the instrument s COM1 port to Multid
69. Table 3 4 Inlet Outlet Connector Nomenclature REAR PANEL LABEL FUNCTION Connects the sample gas to the analyzer When operating the analyzer without zero span SAMPLE 227 option this is also the inlet for any calibration gases EXHAUST Connects to the exhaust of the analyzer SPAN On units with zero span shutoff valve options installed connect a gas line to the source of calibrated span gas here On Units with zero span valve or IZS option installed this port connects the zero air gas or ZERO AIR the zero air cartridge to the analyzer Calibrated 5 GAS Source of SAMPLE Gas Athigh MODEL 700 Gas concentr atio n Dilution Calibrator Removed during with eu c Calibration MODEL 701 Zero Air Generator Figure 3 6 Pneumatic Connections Basic Configuration Using Gas Dilution Calibrator 16 05496 Rev A6 TML87 Instruction Manual Getting Started Calibrated SO orH S GAS Source of At span gas SAMPLE Gas concentr atio n Removed during calibration Needle valve to control flow MODEL 701 Zero Air Generator Figure 3 7 Pneumatic Connections Basic Configuration Using Bottled Span Gas 1 Attach the 1 4 exhaust line to the exhaust port of the analyzer CAUTION The exhaust from the external pump needs to be vented outside the immediate area or shelter surrounding the instrument and conform to all safety requirements using a m
70. by CONV_SET variable WBOXTEMP BOX TEMP WARNING Chassis temperature outside of warning limits specified by BOX_SET variable WRCELLTEMP RCELL TEMP WARNING Reaction cell temperature outside of warning limits specified by RCELL_SET variable WIZSTEMP 175 TEMP WARNING 125 temperature outside of warning limits specified by 175 SET variable WPMTTEMP PMT TEMP WARNING PMT temperature outside of warning limits specified by PMT_SET variable WDARKCAL DARK CAL WARNING Dark offset above limit specified by DARK_LIMIT variable WHVPS HVPS WARNING High voltage power supply output outside of warning limits specified by HVPS_SET variable WDYNZERO CANNOT DYN ZERO Contact closure zero calibration failed while DYN ZERO was set to ON WDYNSPAN CANNOT DYN SPAN Contact closure span calibration failed while DYN SPAN was set to ON WREARBOARD REAR BOARD NOT DET Rear board was not detected during power up WRELAYBOARD RELAY BOARD WARN Firmware is unable to communicate with the relay board WFRONTPANEL FRONT PANEL WARN Firmware is unable to communicate with the front panel WANALOGCAL ANALOG CAL WARNING The A D or at least one D A channel has not been calibrated A 20 05492 Rev C TML87 Instruction Manual APPENDIX A 3 Warnings and Test Functions Revision A 3A Table A 3 TML87 Test Functions Revision A 3A TEST Function Message Text DESCRI PTI ON RANGE RANGE 500 0 PPB D A range in single or auto range modes RANGE1 RANGE1 500
71. measurement between that test point and T4 11 5 14 High Voltage Power Supply The HVPS is located in the interior of the sensor module and is plugged into the PMT tube Figure 10 13 It requires 2 voltage inputs The first is 15 which powers the supply The second is the programming voltage which is generated on the Preamp Board This power supply is unlike a traditional PMT HVPS It is like having 10 independent power supplies one to each pin of the PMT The test procedure below allows you to test each supply Adjustment of the HVPS is covered in the factory calibration procedure in Section 11 6 3 11 5 15 Pneumatic Sensor Assembly The pressure flow sensor circuit board located behind the sensor assembly can be checked with a voltmeter using the following procedure which assumes that the wiring is intact and that the motherboard and the power supplies are operating properly Measure the voltage across TP1 and 2 it should be 10 0 0 25 V If not the board is faulty Measure the voltage across capacitor C2 it should be 5 0 0 25 V If not the board may be faulty 11 5 15 1 Sample Pressure Measure the voltage across test points 1 and 4 With the sample pump disconnected or turned off this voltage should be 4500 250 mV With the pump running it should be about 0 2 V less as the sample pressure drops by about 1 in Hg A from ambient pressure If this voltage is significantly different the pressure transducer S2 or
72. o 3 of lt lt els al z Of Of o a 9140 ul gt xl gt z El of lt o oj z z wy at 916 z clo Oo fic lt 9145 Ole Figure 3 4 Status Output Connector 05496 Rev A6 13 Getting Started TML87 Instruction Manual Table 3 2 Status Output Signals REAR PANEL STATUS LABEL DEFINITION CONDITION SYSTEM OK ON if no faults are present OFF any time the HOLD OFF feature is active such as during calibration or when other faults exist possibly invalidating the current concentration measurement 2 CONC VALID example sample flow rate is outside of acceptable limits ON if concentration measurement is valid 3 HIGHRANGE ON if unit is in high range of the AUTO Range Mode 0004 ZERO CAL ON whenever the instrument s ZERO point is being calibrated SPAN CAL ON whenever the instrument s SPAN point is being calibrated 6 DIAGMODE ON whenever the instrument is in DIAGNOSTIC mode 7 8 SPARE D EMITTER BUS The emitters of the transistors on pins 1 8 are bussed together DC POWER 5 VDC 300 mA source combined rating with Control Output if used Digital Ground The ground level from the analyzers internal DC power supplies 3 1 1 3 Connecting the Control Inputs If you wish to use the analyzer to remotely activate the zero and span calibration modes several digital control inputs are provided through a 10 pin connector labeled
73. see Section 6 8 1 2 Supply a gas with a known concentration of SO to the sample gas inlet of the analyzer 3 Wait until the analyzer s SO concentration measurement stabilizes This can be determined by setting the analyzer s display to show the SO2 STB test function see Section 6 2 1 SO2 STB should be 0 5 ppb or less before proceeding 4 Record the stable SO concentration 5 Set the analyzer to 5 measurement mode see Section 6 8 1 6 Supply a gas with a known concentration of H2S equal to that of the SO gas used in steps 2 4 above to the sample gas inlet of the analyzer 7 Wait until the analyzer s SO concentration measurement stabilizes This can be determined by setting the analyzer s display to show the H2S STB test function see Section 6 2 1 H2S STB should be 0 5 ppb or less before proceeding 8 Record the stable H2S concentration Divide the H2S concentration by the SO concentration EXAMPLE If the SO and H2S concentration of the two test gases used is 500 ppb Measured SO concentration 499 1 ppb 05496 Rev A6 179 Instrument Maintenance TML87 Instruction Manual Measured H2S concentration 490 3 ppb Converter Efficiency 490 3 499 1 Converter Efficiency 0 982 98 2 It is recommended that the H2S gt 5 converter catalyst material be replaced if the converter efficiency falls below whatever rating is specified by local regulatory requirements 9 3 5 3 Changing the H2S gt 5 C
74. 0 PPB D A 1 range in independent range mode RANGE2 RANGE2 500 0 PPB D A 2 range in independent range mode STABILITY 502 STB 0 0 PPB Concentration stability standard deviation based on setting of STABIL_GAS STABIL_FREQ and STABIL_SAMPLES loop Time in parenthesis is standard deviation NORMPMTDET NORM PMT 742 9 MV PMT reading normalized for temperature pressure auto zero offset but not range UVDET UV LAMP 3457 6 MV UV lamp reading LAMPRATIO LAMP RATIO 100 0 UV lamp ratio of current reading divided by calibrated reading STRAYLI GHT STR LGT 0 1 PPB Stray light offset DARKPMT DRK PMT 19 6 MV PMT dark offset DARKLAMP DRK LMP 42 4 MV UV lamp dark offset SO2SLOPE 502 SLOPE 1 000 Slope for current range computed during zero span calibration SO2OFFSET SO2 OFFS 0 0 MV Offset for current range computed during zero span calibration H2SSLOPE H2S SLOPE 1 000 Slope for current range computed during zero span calibration H2SOFFSET H2SS OFFS 0 0 MV Offset for current range computed during zero span calibration PWTTEMP ZSDU TESTCHAN TEST 3721 1 MV Value output to TEST_OUTPUT analog output selected with TEST CHAN ID variable CLOCKTI ME TI ME 10 38 27 Current instrument time of day clock 05492 Rev C A 21 APPENDI X A 3 Warnings and Test Functions Revision TML87 Instruction Manual TEST Function Message Text DESCRIPTION 1 The name is used to request a message via the RS 232
75. 00 01 to point 366 23 59 Days Hours Minutes NUMBER OF The number of reports that will be stored in the 1 to 1 million limited by RECORDS data file Once the specified limit has been available storage space exceeded the oldest data are over written to make space for new data channel values to the RS 232 ports CHANNEL Enables or disables the channel Provides a EUN LEN or ON ENABLED convenient means to temporarily disable a data channel CAL HOLD OFF Disables sampling of data parameters while OFF or ON instrument is in calibration mode Note that when enabled here there is also a length of the DAS HOLD OFF after calibration mode which is set in the VARS menu Section 6 11 2 11 6 11 1 2 iDAS Parameters Data parameters are types of data that may be measured and stored by the iDAS For each Teledyne Instruments analyzer model the list of available data parameters is different fully defined and not customizable Appendix A 5 lists firmware specific data parameters for the TML87 The most common parameters are concentrations of measured gases H5S temperatures of heated zones converter sample chamber box temperature pressures and flows of the pneumatic subsystem and other diagnostic measurements as well as calibration data slope and offset for each gas Most data parameters have associated measurement units such as mV ppb cm min etc although some parameters have no units The only units that can be chan
76. 01 HF 157 1N4148 D5 TP3 e VREF 9 TEST PLUG Drain V gt R1 Lamp Voltage O IRF520 IRF520 v Q2 Q3 M4 8 1 4148 1 4148 Vdd GND RB VLAMP AO SDA oe IAN JP1 1 SCL R2 R3 R5 Vout PD anes JUMPERP TP1 5321 8 TEST PLUG R21 Q C23 0 2 Ohms 2 RIO VDAC gt Cee 11 75 1 4W v 2 N I lt Lamp Current 2 amp LAMP POWER CONTROL DAC RP2A vie 475 a 10 STAGE AMPLIFIER FOR COMP 12V C5 7ND w 59 0 01 uF 7V PWM CONTROLLER v o o c3 me 9 2 VREF R12 LAMP CURRENT FEEDBACK AMPLIFIER an 9 SET MENS IESE 14 DAC 2 ADDRESS XS Sorte GI Ai ADDRESS BEAD BDORESSASSY NUMBER S FTSTART DISCHARGE 1 i INV INPUT RT i 1 1E a TED SHUTDOWN GROUND OSC OUTPUT COMP Applies to PCAs 04540 01 and 02 13914 D9 REV DATE CHANGE DESCRIPTION INITIAL Ed HYSTERIESIS SET RESISTORS FOR PWM ERROR COMPARATOR A 5 1 03 CREATED CAC B 6 1 03 Changed layout on 1st switvher stage CAC 9 3 03 Changed R15 value CAC y NON TELEDYNE C1 11 8 08 Changed amp C15 values CAC MONITOR LABS BLINK MULTIVIBRATOR PRIMARY WINDING OVERCURRENT CUTOFF 001 uF The information herein is the property of TML and is submitted in strictest con fidence for reference only Unauthorized use by anyone for any other purposes is prohibited This document or any information contained in
77. 1 off Relay board digital output PCF8575 default I C address 44 hex RELAY_WATCHDOG Alternate between 0 and 1 at least every 5 seconds to keep relay board active A 24 05492 Rev C TML87 Instruction Manual APPENDI X 4 TML87 Signal 1 O Definitions Revision pud m RCELL HEATER 1 0 reaction cell heater on 1 off CONV_HEATER 2 0 converter cell heater on 1 off 3 Spare 0 IZS heater 1 off 5 Spare 1ZS_ HEATER CAL VALVE 0 let cal gas in 1 let sample gas in SPAN VALVE 7 0 let span gas in H2S VALVE 0 switch to secondary gas position H2S TRS 1 primary gas position 502 DARK SHUTTER 10 0 close dark shutter 1 open 11 15 gt HVPS_VOLTAGE PMT_TEMP UVLAMP SIGNAL SAMPLE PRESSURE TEST INPUT 8 REF 4096 MV 10 Spare thermocouple input et 5 Diagnostic temperature input TEST_INPUT_11 CONV_TEMP 1 m m 1 1 2 3 4 5 05492 Rev C 25 APPENDIX 4 TML87 Signal 1 O Definitions Revision A 3A TML87 Instruction Manual TEMP INPUTS 5 Dagrostictemperatwre pu DAC 2 DAC channel 2 loopback TEST OUTPUT 1 TML87 A 26 05492 Rev C TML87 Instruction Manual APPENDIX A 5 TML87 iDAS Functions Revision A 3A APPENDIX A 5 TML87 iDAS Functions Revision A 3A Table 5 TML87 DAS Trigger Events Revision name sroww sampe fow
78. 21 Parameters ee eee dede oes 107 6 11 1 3 4 DAS Triggering Events ice eret tender Fee exu Tene tee data ener e RR e da 108 6 11 2 DefaultiDAS Channels 2 rte LER ipt qp o ee iere elo foi ce eid Lipa na 108 6 11 2 1 Viewing iDAS Data and 110 05496 Rev A6 iii Table of Contents TML87 Instruction Manual 6 11 2 2 Editing IDAS Data Channels sikisirken renan erinnern aiea inei Enea bra iis 111 6 11 2 9 Trigger Events ine eer Ue tt rete ii ee eto ue Hester itta 113 6 11 2 4 Editing IDAS Parameters eterne nte nein tentent eed th 113 6 11 2 5 Sample Period and Report Period eene etre tr ite eie Pen E evo 115 6 11 2 6 Number of Records n eed tq cote es oec cue duce Deo 117 6 11 27 5 232 119 6 11 2 9 Compact Report ete a ep ER en EE 119 6 1 1 2 9 Starting Date E 119 6 11 2 10 Disabling Enabling Data 120 6 11 2 11 HOEDOEF e
79. 5V SET DIAG AIO CONC OUT 2 REC OFS 0 mV EXIT EDIT Pressing ENTR accepts the new setting and returns to the previous menu Pressing EXIT ignores the new setting and returns to the previous menu SET SET Set the recorder offset in mV of DIAG AIO the selected channel RECORD OFFSET 0 MV 0 0 0 0 ENTR EXIT __ 78 05496 Rev A6 87 Instruction Manual Operating Instructions 6 9 4 5 Current Loop Output Adjustment A current loop option is available and can be installed as a retrofit for each of the analog outputs of the analyzer Section 5 2 This option converts the DC voltage analog output to a current signal with 0 20 mA output current The outputs can be scaled to any set of limits within that 0 20 mA range However most current loop applications call for either 2 20 mA or 4 20 mA range All current loop outputs have a 5 over range Ranges with the lower limit set to more than 1 mA e g 2 20 or 4 20 mA also have a 5 under range To switch an analog output from voltage to current loop after installing the current output printed circuit assembly follow the instructions in Section 6 9 4 1 and select CURR from the list of options on the Output Range menu Adjusting the signal zero and span values of the current loop output is done by raising or lowering the voltage of the respective analog output This proportionally raises or lower
80. 6 10 e Use the RS 232 test function to send w characters to the modem terminal or computer See Section 6 10 10 Get your terminal modem or computer to transmit data to the analyzer holding down the space bar is one way The green LED on the rear panel should flicker as the instrument is receiving data Make sure that the communications software is functioning properly Further help with serial communications is available in a separate manual RS 232 Manual Teledyne Instruments part number 013500000 available online at http Awww Teledyne ML com 11 5 11 PMT Sensor The photo multiplier tube detects the light emitted by the UV excited fluorescence of SO It has a gain of about 500000 to 1000000 It is not possible to test the detector outside of the instrument in the field The best way to determine if the PMT is working properly is by using the optical test OTEST which is described in Section 6 9 5 The basic method to diagnose a PMT fault is to eliminate the other components using ETEST OTEST and specific tests for other sub assemblies 11 5 12 PMT Preamplifier Board To check the correct operation of the preamplifier board we suggest the technician carry out the electrical and optical tests described in 6 8 5 and 6 8 6 If the ETEST fails the preamplifier board may be faulty 11 5 13 PMT Temperature Control PCA The TEC control printed circuit assembly is located on the sensor housing assembly under the slant
81. 6 5 Figure 6 6 Figure 6 7 Figure 6 8 Figure 6 9 Figure 6 10 Figure 6 11 Figure 6 12 Figure 6 13 Figure 6 14 Figure 6 15 Figure 6 16 Figure 6 17 Figure 6 18 Figure 6 19 Figure 6 20 Figure 7 1 Figure 7 2 Figure 7 3 Figure 7 4 Figure 9 1 Figure 9 2 Figure 9 3 Figure 9 4 Figure 10 1 Figure 10 2 Figure 10 3 Figure 10 4 Figure 10 5 Figure 10 6 Figure 10 7 Location of Shipping 10 Rear Panel Layout Len e ed eed d tinere e ede es d kd 12 Analog Output Connector aie ee Dee ee e ta 12 Status Output Connector eiit Lee Ie nere let eoe ger eee a Lee dde ee etd 13 Control Input Connector et ceo iter ved mene deste aee e ee eoa a erue Lee adu dee teed 15 Pneumatic Connections Basic Configuration Using Gas Dilution Calibrator 16 Pneumatic Connections Basic Configuration Using Bottled Span 17 Basic Pneumatic Connections for Units with Valve 19 TML87 Layout With IZ iiie dete temet ei dd ede tei de db ed ee te ce doe aee d ded e nen 20 Front Panel Eayout steep eee eR e E RERO Pp ed wei ted edet 23 Pneumatic Diagram of the TML87 Standard 2 26 Current Loop Option Install
82. 9 1 or as needed This procedure can be carried out while the instrument is running Make sure that the analyzer is not in ZERO calibration mode l Locate the scrubber on the outside rear panel Figure 9 2 shows an exploded view of the scrubber assembly 05496 Rev A6 177 Instrument Maintenance TML87 Instruction Manual 00089 Scrubber Cap 00690 Retainer Pad CH 9 Purafil Chemical 00690 Retainer Pad CH 1 Charcoal Chemical B Scrubber Canister 00089 Scrubber Bottom FT 160 Tube Fitting Nylon Figure 9 2 Zero Air Scrubber Assembly Remove the old scrubber by disconnecting the 1 4 plastic tubing from the particle filter using 9 16 and 1 2 wrenches Remove the particle filter from the cartridge using 9 16 wrenches Unscrew the top of the scrubber canister and discard the Purafil and charcoal contents Make sure to abide to local laws about discarding these chemicals The rebuild kit listed in Appendix B comes with a Material and Safety Data Sheet which contains more information on these chemicals Refill the scrubber with charcoal at the bottom a white felt divider and the Purafil chemical at the top Put another felt divider on top of that and then close the cartridge with the screw top cap Tighten the cap on the scrubber hand tight only Replace the DFU filter with a new unit and discard the old Replace the scrubber assembly into its clips on the rear panel Reconnect the plastic tubing to th
83. Air Housing Outlet O Ring Shutter Assy Pad Sample Air hidden from view Inlet Sample Chamber p ARR Hester Detector Sample Chamber Sample Chamber Temperature Sensor Seal Sample Chamber Heater Light Trap Figure 10 13 TML87 Sample Chamber 10 4 3 Sample Chamber Heating Circuit In order to reduce temperature effects the sample chamber is maintained at a constant 50 just above the high end of the instrument s operation temperature range Two AC heaters one embedded into the top of the sample chamber the other embedded directly below the reference detector s light trap provide the heat source These heaters operate off of the instrument s main AC power and are controlled by the CPU through a power relay on the relay board A thermistor also embedded in the bottom of the sample chamber reports the cell s temperature to the CPU through the thermistor interface circuitry of the motherboard 10 4 4 Photo Multiplier Tube PMT The TML87 uses a photo multiplier tube PMT to detect the amount of fluorescence created by the SO in the sample chamber 05496 Rev A6 203 Theory Of Operation TML87 Instruction Manual PMT Input Signal Connector PMT Temperature jo ID SE f Heat Sink I nsulator lt lt gt Cold Block PMT Output Signal Connector High Voltage Power Supply Optical Test LED Light from Reaction Chamber shines TEC located
84. DATE PERFORMED 502 scrubber Replace As required Yes 9 3 3 5 gt 502 Converter Catalyst Replace As required Yes 9 3 5 1 Change Particulate filter particle filter Weekly No 9 3 1 Verify test functions and Weekl No Appendix C evaluate y pp Zero span check Evaluate offset Weekly 7 3 7 6 7 9 and slope 1 Zero span Zero and span 7 2 7 4 7 5 calibration calibration Evens months 77 78 1 External zero air Exchange scrubber optional chemical Fvery 3 months No 934 Perform flow check Check Flow Every 6 Months No 11 5 2 1 Sample chamber Clean windows Annually or as necessary Yes 9 3 6 optics and filters den m Critical flow orifice amp sintered filters Replace Annually Yes 9 3 7 Internal IZS Permeation Tube Replace Annually YES 9 3 2 Perform pneumatic Verify Leak Annually or after repairs 2 11 5 1 Tight involving pneumatics At least Every 2 years or See Pump diaphragm Replace if PRES is 2 33 00 in Hg Yes instruction in A diaphram kit On PMT preamp Low level changes if hardware calibration 2 0 7 lt SLOPE or Yes AAT SLOPE 1 3 These Items are required to maintain full warranty all other items are strongly recommended 2A pump rebuild kit is available from Teledyne Instruments Customer Service including all instructions and required parts see Appendix B for part numbers 172 05496 Rev A6 TML87 Instruction Man
85. DE Red ede c dete feti e e deba fo 232 11 4 3 The Analyzer Doesn t Appear on the LAN 232 11 5 S bsystem CheckoUut e e ue EE reus 233 11 5 1 Detailed Pressure Leak Check 2 iere einem cei quede di cud 233 11 5 2 Performing a Sample Flow 2 aE NE din 234 11 5 Power Configuration eo 234 14 54 TENT 235 05496 6 TML87 Instruction Manual Table of Contents DA uel c Y 236 11 5 6 Keyboard Display Interface ertet ttti rrr itte ER ege denen 236 11 5 7 ERE eR TNT 236 11 5 8 E 237 11 5 8 1 reri reet p Dh peti ede ded 237 11 5 8 2 Analog Output Voltages sbeebs rtr ere te necp eda Eau
86. DS5 a red LED on the upper portion of the motherboard just to the right of the CPU board flashes when the CPU is running the main program After power up DS5 should flash on and off about once per second If characters are written to the front panel display but DS5 does not flash then the program files have become corrupted Contact customer service because it may be possible to recover operation of the analyzer If 30 60 seconds after a restart DS5 is not flashing and no characters have been written to the front panel display the firmware may be corrupted or the CPU may be defective If 055 is permanently off or permanently on the CPU board is likely locked up and the analyzer should not respond either with locked up or dark front panel 226 05496 Rev A6 TML87 Instruction Manual TROUBLESHOOTING amp REPAIR CPU Status LED Figure 11 3 CPU Status Indicator 11 1 4 2 CPU Status Indicator The CPU board has two red LEDs LED1 is the upper most LED and is power indicator so it should always be on However both CPU LEDs only indicate if the CPU is powered up properly and generally working The lower LED will sometimes be stable and sometimes will blink It can continue to blink even if the CPU or firmware is locked up and is not an effective indicator for debugging system problems 11 1 4 3 Relay Board Status LEDs The most important status LED on the relay board is the red 2 Bus watch dog LED labeled D1 or
87. ETEST Adjustment Connector to HVPS and Figure 11 14 Pre Amplifier Board Layout 1 Setthe instrument reporting range type to SNGL amp 500 ppb see Section 6 7 4 2 Perform a zero point calibration using zero air see Chapter 7 3 Letthe instrument stabilize by allowing it to run for one hour 4 Adjust the UV Lamp See Section 11 6 3 5 5 Perform a LAMP CALIBRATION procedure see Section 6 9 7 256 05496 Rev A6 TML87 Instruction Manual TROUBLESHOOTING amp REPAIR 6 Locate the Preamp board see Figure 3 9 7 Locate the Following Components On the Preamp board see Figure 11 14 HVPS coarse adjustment switch Range 0 9 then A F HVPS fine adjustment switch Range 0 9 then A F e Gain adjustment potentiometer Full scale is 10 to 12 turns 8 Setthe HVPS coarse adjustment to its minimum setting 0 9 Setthe HVPS fine adjustment switch to its maximum setting F 10 Turn the gain adjustment potentiometer clockwise to its maximum setting 11 Set the front panel display to show STABIL see Section 6 2 1 12 Feed span gas into the analyzer 13 Wait until the STABIL value is below 0 5 ppb 14 Scroll to the OFFSET function and record the value 15 Scroll to the NORM PMT value 16 Determine the target NORM PMT value according to the following formulas e f the reporting range is set for x 2 000 ppb the instrument will be using the 2 000 ppb physical range Target NORM PMT 2 x span g
88. Figure 7 1 of Section 7 2 The calibration procedure must be initiated using the CAL key not the CALZ and CALS keys using the procedure defined in Section 7 2 Using the CAL key does not activate the zero span or sample cal valves of the IZS option thus allowing the introduction of zero air and sample gas through the sample port from more accurate external sources such as a calibrated bottle of H2S and SO or a Model 700 Dilution Calibrator SAMPLE RANGE 500 0 PPB lt ST TST gt CALZ CALS Use for formal Use only for calibration informal calibration operations checks 7 6 Manual Calibration Checks with IZS or Zero Span Valves Zero and span checks using the zero span valve or IZS option are similar to that described in Section 7 3 except On units with an IZS option installed zero air and span gas are supplied to the analyzer through the zero gas inlet and from ambient air On units with a zero span valve option installed zero air and span gas are supplied to the analyzer through the zero gas and span gas inlets from two different sources 05496 Rev A6 151 Calibration Procedures TML87 Instruction Manual The zero and calibration operations are initiated directly and independently with dedicated keys CALZ and CALS To perform a manual calibration check of an analyzer with a zero span valve or IZS Option installed use the following method STEP ONE Connect the sources of Zero Air and Span Ga
89. Gas Source of Dilution SAMPLE Gas li Removed Calibrator a A i during with Ozane Bench 3 Option Calibration pns 1 Sample Exhaust Span MODEL 701 Zero Air ZeroAir Generator Figure 7 4 Typical Setup for Manual Calibration of TML87 in Multigas Measurement Mode The analyzer will ask to have the GAS TYPE specified at the beginning of the process as follows SAMPLE H28 STB XXX X PPB XXX X lt TST TST gt CAL CALZ CALS SETUP SAMPLE GAS TO CAL H2S 502 25 ENTR SETUP SAMPLE GAS TO CAL SO2 LOW HIGH ENTR SETUP Wait until H2S STB falls below gt 0 5 ppb This may take several minutes ZERO CAL v STB XXX X PPB XXX X lt TST TST gt ZERO SPAN CONC EXIT Continue Calibration as per Standard Procedure Once this selection is made the calibration procedure continues as previously described The other gas may be calibrated by starting over from the main SAMPLE display 7 9 Automatic Calibration Checks AutoCal The AutoCal system allows unattended periodic operation of the zero span valve options by using the analyzer s internal time of day clock AutoCal operates by executing user defined sequences to initiate the various calibration modes of the analyzer and to open and close valves appropriately It is possible to program and run up to three separate sequences SEQ1 SEQ2 and SEQ3 Each sequence can op
90. Ibid 2 0 8 Ibid 8 2 Level 1 Calibrations versus Level 2 Checks After corrective action re calibrate analyzer Essential to quality assurance are scheduled checks for verifying the operational status of the monitoring system The operator should visit the site at least once each week It is recommended Level 1 zero and span check conducted on the analyzer every two weeks Level 2 zero and span checks should be conducted at a frequency desired by the user Definitions of these terms are given in Table 8 4 In addition an independent precision check between 0 08 and 0 10 ppm must be carried out at least once every two weeks Table 8 3 summarizes the quality assurance activities for routine operations A discussion of each activity appears in the following sections To provide for documentation and accountability of activities a checklist should be compiled and then filled out by the field operator as each activity is completed 164 05496 Rev A6 TML87 Instruction Manual EPA Protocol Calibration Table 8 4 Definition of Level 1 and Level 2 Zero and Span Checks from Section 2 0 9 of Q A Handbook for Air Pollution Measurement Systems LEVEL 1 ZERO AND SPAN CALIBRATION LEVEL 2 ZERO AND SPAN CHECK A Level 1 zero and span calibration is a simplified two A Level 2 zero and span check is an unofficial check of an point analyzer calibration used when analyzer linearity analyzer s response It may include dynamic checks made
91. Instruction Manual Operating Instructions To view the above properties press SAMPLE RANGE 500 0 PPB 25 XXX X SETUP DHCP TST 5 gt CAL SETUP SAMPLE ENTER SETUP PASS 818 SETUP X X INST 0 0 0 0 ENTR EXIT SET SET SETUP X X PRI MARY SETUP MENU SETUP GATEWAY 0 0 0 0 EDIT Key Disabled SET SET EXIT E SETUP SUBNET MASK 0 0 0 0 CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE SETUP XX SECONDARY SETUP MENU SET SET EXIT TCP PORT 3000 COMM VARS DIAG SETUP X X COMMUNI CATI ONS MENU SETUP X X ID INET 1 SET SET EDIT From this point on EXIT returns to SETUP X X HOSTNAME M101E COMMUNICATIONS MENU Do not alter unless directed to by Teledyne Instruments Customer Service personnel 05496 Rev A6 95 Operating Instructions TML87 Instruction Manual 6 10 6 3 Manually Configuring the Network IP Addresses There are several circumstances when you may need to manually configure the interface settings of the analyzer s Ethernet card e Your LAN is not running a DHCP software package e The DHCP software is unable to initialize the analyzer s interface You wish to program the interface with a specific set of IP addresses that may not be the ones automatically chosen by DHCP The INET sub menu may also be used to edit the Ethernet card s configuration properties Editing th
92. Keyboard A row of eight keys just below the vacuum florescent display see Figure 10 21 is the main method by which the user interacts with the analyzer As the software is operated labels appear on the bottom row of the display directly above each active key defining the function of that key as it is relevant for the operation being performed Pressing a key causes the associated instruction to be performed by the analyzer Note that the keys do not auto repeat In circumstances where the same key must be activated for two consecutive operations it must be released and re pressed 10 6 1 3 Display The main display of the analyzer is a vacuum fluorescent display with two lines of 40 text characters each Information is organized in the following manner see Figure 10 21 Mode Field Displays the name of the analyzer s current operating mode Message Field Displays a variety of informational messages such as warning messages operation data and response messages during interactive tasks Concentration Field Displays the actual concentration of H5S in the sample gas currently being measured by the analyzer Switches to indicate SO concentration if when the instrument is configured for SO measurement or between H2S and SO when the instrument is in multigas measurement mode Keypad Definition Field Displays the definitions for the row of keys just below the display These definitions are dynamic context sensitive and software driven
93. LABEL DESCRIPTION SECTION mE Used to set up and operate the analyzer s various external I O channels including RS 232 RS 485 modem communication 2 9 and or Ethernet access Used to view various variables related to the instrument s System Status Variables VARS current operational status 6 8 Used to access a variety of functions that are used to configure System Diagnostic Features DIAG test or diagnose problems with a variety of the analyzer s basic 6 9 systems 54 05496 Rev A6 87 Instruction Manual Operating Instructions 6 4 1 SETUP Mode Password Security Whenever the TML87 s SETUP mode is activated the instrument will prompt the user to enter a security password The default password is 818 This allows access to all of the instrument s basic functions and operating modes as well as some of its more powerful diagnostic tools and variables The analyzer will automatically insert 818 into the password prompt field Simply press ENTR to proceed Other password levels exist allowing access to special diagnostic tools and variables used only for specific and rarely needed troubleshooting and adjustment procedures They may be made available as needed by Teledyne Instruments Customer Service department 6 5 SETUP CFG Viewing the Analyzer s Configuration Information Pressing the CFG key displays the instrument configuration information This display lists the analyzer model
94. Lamp mV The output voltage of the UV reference detector Intensity LAMP The current output of the UV reference detector divided by the reading RATIO UV Source lamp ratio 96 stored in the CPU s memory from the last time a UV Lamp calibration was performed The offset due to stray light recorded by the CPU during the last zero point STR LGT Stray Light ppb calibration performed DRK PMT Dark PMT mV The PMT output reading recorded the last time the UV source lamp shutter was closed The UV reference detector output reading recorded the last time the UV DRK LMP Dark UV Source Lamp mV source lamp shutter was closed H2S H2S measurement The sensitivity of the instrument as calculated during the last calibration SLOPE Slope activity The slope parameter is used to set the span calibration point of the analyzer H2S H2S measurement The overall offset of the instrument as calculated during the last calibration OFFS Offset activity The offset parameter is used to set the zero point of the analyzer response HVPS V The PMT high voltage power supply RCELL Sample Chamber 2 C The current temperature of the sample chamber BOX Box Temperature C The ambient temperature of the inside of the analyzer case PMT Pmt Temperature C The current temperature of the PMT TEMP 3 o The current temperature of the internal zero span option Only appears IZS TEMP IZS Temperature C when IZS option is enabled CONV H2S gt S
95. ME Seconds 1 0 1 10 Dwell time before taking each sample FILT SIZE 240 1 480 Moving average filter size FILT ASIZE Samples 20 1 100 Moving average filter size in adaptive mode FILT DELTA PPB 20 1 100 Absolute change to trigger adaptive filter FILT PCT 96 1 100 Percent change to trigger adaptive filter FILT DELAY Seconds 180 0 300 Delay before leaving adaptive filter mode FILT ADAPT ON OFF ON ON enables adaptive filter OFF disables it DIL FACTOR 0 1 1000 Dilution factor if dilution enabled with FACTORY OPT variable USER UNITS Concentration units for user interface Enclose value in double quotes when setting from the RS 232 interface 1000 5000 Last calibrated UV lamp reading 0 5 1 5 UV lamp compensation attenuation factor 0 01 10 Temperature coefficient attenuation factor for pressure readings 0 1 10 Constant to make visible slope close to 1 OFF ON ON enables PMT UV dark calibration OFF disables it A 12 05492 Rev C TML87 Instruction Manual APPENDI X A 2 Setup Variables For Serial O Revision DARK FREQ 0 1 1440 Dark calibration period DARK PRE DWELL Seconds 1 60 Dwell time after closing dark shutter or turning off lamp or selecting preamp range DARK POST DWELL Seconds 1 180 Dwell time after opening dark shutter or turning on lamp DARK SAMPLES Number of dark samples to average size DARK LIMIT 200 0 1000 Maximum dark offset allowed SO
96. OFF ON or OFF ON or OFF ON or OFF ON Under the designation the analyzer may be operated with or without the following optional equipment e Rack mount with or without chassis slides e Zero span valve options e Internal zero span 125 option with H2S permeation tube 0 4ppm at 0 7 liter per minute certified uncertified H5S permeation tube 0 8 ppm at 0 7 liter per minute certified uncertified Under the designation the IZS option cannot be used as the source of calibration e 4 20mA isolated analog outputs e Status outputs e Control inputs e RS 232 output e Ethernet output e Zero air scrubber e 4 20mA isolated output 2 3 CE Mark Compliance 2 3 1 Emissions Compliance The Teledyne Instruments UV Fluorescence H2S Analyzer TML87 was tested and found to be fully compliant with 05496 Rev A6 87 Instruction Manual Specifications and approvals EN61326 1997 w A1 98 Class A FCC Part 15 Subpart B Section 15 107 Class A ICES 003 Class A ANSI C63 4 1992 amp AS NZS 3548 w A1 amp A2 97 Class A Tested on 07 21 03 2003 at Laboratories Inc Report Number CE03 021 2 3 2 Safety Compliance The Teledyne Instrument s UV Fluorescence H2S Analyzer TML87 was tested and found to be fully compliant with IEC 61010 1 90 A1 92 A2 95 2 4 Warranty Procedure e Customer shall notify of a defect within the warranty period and request a return authorization num
97. PREAMP2 U17 1150 IER 1 HIGAIN 3 53 2 4 CT 15V HIGAIN 0 68 uF T4AHC1GU04 15 U9A C29 don 0 68 uF 1 2 15V LF353 15 1 LF353 OPAMP TP8 2 R44 Es SEE TABLE GUARD RING R3 Cs 068uF 1 a t Ul SEE TABLE PMT Signal Conneeto 2 6 PREAMPI For 1 0 uF use COAX 124 R17 For 11 uF use amp C11B SEE TABLE 22uF 25V 22uF 25V TP2 PMTGND 1 OuF UL SEE TABL C2710uF 25 s R4 15 100 1 FB BUFOUT 3 AGND OUT 6 0 68 uF C30 068 uF 2 5V 7 V V 5 12V_REF DIV RATIO COSC C36 OluF LTC1062CN8 3900 pF FILM ETEST_SIGNAL VERSION TABLE 0100 M10XE SEE TABLE R19 0200 M20XE PMTGND 10K COMP 0100 0200 NOTES UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED SLE a CAPACITANCE IS MICROFARADS R17 20 0K 10 0 ohms Printed documents are uncontrolled R44 39 2K 255 PMTGND 2 RESISTORS ARE 1 1 4W Title 1 PMT Preamp PCA Schematic R od F no 2 RESISTANCE IS OHMS Au d Size Number Revision C11 11 0 1 0 4 THIS CIRCUIT MUST BE USED IS 04181 H AS A MATCHED PAIR WITH THE TEC CONTROL CIRCUIT Date 10 May 2007 Sheet of 3 File N PCBMGR 04179cc Source RevG 04 17 9 By il 2 3 4 5 6 HIGH VOLTAGE SUPPLY
98. RESISTOR AS d 100 can read slightly above full CLOS AS 2 VOLTAGE REF scale to prevent overflow of POSSIBLE TO 15V ADC reading X1 AND X2 A 10 uF 35V TANTALUM 058 74 574 0 15 uF ceramic C52 7AHC32 0 15 uF ceramic Title schematic for E Series Motherboard 05702 Size Number Revision Orcad B 05703 A Date 10 Jun 2006 Sheet 4of 8 File N Pcbmegr UNREL 05701 E motherboard gen4iiawrel89701a DDB 15V 15V C36 0 15 uF ceramic CT 0 15 uF ceramic BYPASS CAPS MUST BE WITHIN 1 2 OF THE REGULATOR INPUT OUTPUT PINS I5V 10 9 2 C60 10 uF 35V TANTALUM 4 14 8 DACOV Sow 5 5 DAC3V Schema ic for E Series Mo herboard PCA 05702 Size Number Revision Orcad B A Date 10 Jun 2006 Sheet bf 8 File N Pcbmegr UNREL 05701 E motherboard gen4iiawrel89701a DDB CONTROL INPUTS eo RN3 RN2 15Kx8 WEM AM EXTERNAL CONTROL IN A 7 bf Lf db aj wm Aj A R27 R28 R29 1005 100 100 330 pF 50V 330 pF SOV a oO Q ON S g 330 pF sov 2 330 pF 50V Place these termination resistors at the end of each data line Each data line should be laid out as a daisy chain the signal passing from one IC to the next X X X X EXTERNAL CONTROL IN B
99. RR anna 206 Figure 10 17 PMT Preamp Block 207 Figure 10 18 Relay Board Status LED 209 Figure 10 19 Power Distribution Block nennen nn 213 Figure 10 20 Interface Block 214 Figure 10 21 TML87 Front Panel 214 Figure 10 22 Keyboard and Display Interface Block Diagram 216 Figure 10 23 Basic Software 218 Figure 11 1 Viewing and Clearing warning 222 Figure 11 2 Example of Signal I O nennen nennen 226 Figure 1153 GPL Status 5 i t P n PU ear e Rn Rod ne LEER AER 227 Figure 11 4 Sensor Module Wiring and Pneumatic Fittings menn 244 Figure 11 5 Sensor Module Mounting 5 245 Figure 11 6 Sample Chamber Mounting 246 Figure 11 7 Hex Screw Between Lens Housing and Sample 247 Figure 11 8 UV Lens Housing Filter nemen nennen nennen nennen 248 Figure 11 9 PMT UV Filter Housing ennemis 248 Figure 11 10 Disassembling the
100. Rev A6 267 A Primer on Electro Static Discharge TML87 Instruction Manual e Opening the outer shipping box away from the anti ESD work area e Carry the still sealed anti ESD bag tube or bin to the anti ESD work area e Follow steps 6 and 7 of Section 12 4 2 3 above when opening the anti ESD container at the workstation e Reserve the anti ESD container or bag to use when packing electronic components or assemblies to be returned to Teledyne Instruments 12 4 2 5 Packing Components for Return to Teledyne Instruments Customer Service Always pack electronic components and assemblies to be sent to Teledyne Instruments Customer Service in anti ESD bins tubes or bags WARNING DO NOT use pink poly bags NEVER allow any standard plastic packaging materials to touch the electronic component assembly directly This includes but is not limited to plastic bubble pack Styrofoam peanuts open cell foam closed cell foam and adhesive tape DO NOT use standard adhesive tape as a sealer Use ONLY anti ESD tape 1 Never carry the component or assembly without placing it in an anti ESD bag or bin 2 Before using the bag or container allow any surface charges on it to dissipate f you are at the instrument rack hold the bag in one hand while your wrist strap is connected to a ground point f you are at an anti ESD workbench lay the container down on the conductive work surface e In either case wait s
101. SCRUBBER c E SUE KICKER FLOW FLOW PRESSURE SENSOR SENSOR PCA m MEM _ Figure 3 11 Pneumatic Diagram of the 87 Standard Configuration Table 3 8 H2S SO Switching Valve Operating States GAS VALVE PORT CONDITION H2S SO2 SWITCHING VALVE CONNECTION MODE FIG 5 2 H2S Open to SO Scrubber and Molybdenum Converter 223 so Open to directly to Sample Chamber Bypasses SO Scrubber 221 2 Molybdenum Converter H2S SO Switches between above two states every 10 minutes Sus 26 05496 Rev A6 TML87 Instruction Manual Getting Started 3 3 Initial Calibration 3 3 1 Basic Calibration Procedure The following three step procedure assumes that the instrument does not have any of the available zero span Z S or IZS valve options installed Section 7 0 contains instructions for calibrating instruments with valve options Section 8 0 contains directions for performing for EPA protocol calibrations The initial calibration should be carried out with the analyzer s reporting range for SINGLE range mode with a range span of 500 PPB factory default settings for most units This will enable you to compare your results to the factory calibration STEP ONE Set verify the analog output reporting range of the TML87 Press this button to set the analyzer for SNGL DUAL or AUTO ranges SAMPLE RANGE 500 0 PPB 25
102. SET EDIT DIAG AIOOUTPUT RANGE 5V These keys set the signal level and type of the 0 1V selected channel ENTR EXIT 1V 5V 10V CURR Pressing ENTR records the new setting DIAG AIOOUTPUT RANGE 10V returns to the previous menu Pressing EXIT ignores the new setting and 0 1V 1V 5V 10V CURR ENTR EXIT returns to the previous menu 6 9 4 2 Analog Output Calibration Mode The analog outputs can be calibrated automatically or manually In its default mode the instrument is configured for automatic calibration of all channels Manual calibration should be used for the 0 1V and 10V ranges or in cases where the outputs must be closely matched to the characteristics of the recording device Outputs configured for automatic calibration can be calibrated as a group or individually Calibration of the analog outputs needs to be carried out on first startup of the analyzer performed in the factory as part of the configuration process or whenever re calibration is required 74 05496 Rev A6 TML87 Instruction Manual Operating Instructions To calibrate the outputs as a group activate the ANALOG CONFIGURATION MENU see Section 6 9 1 then press STARTING FROM DIAGNOSTIC MENU see Section 6 9 1 DIAG ANALOG 1 CONFIGURATION Exit at any time to return to the NEXT ENTR EXIT main DIAG menu DIAG AIO AOUTS CALIBRATED NO If AutoCal has been turned off for any
103. SET EDIT GATEWAY IP 0 00 000 000 CH CH DEL ENTR EXIT SUBNET MASK 255 255 255 0 SET SET EDIT SUBNET 2 55 255 255 0 TCP PORT 3000 CH CH DEL ENTR EXIT SET The PORT number needs to remain at 3000 Do not change this setting unless instructed to by Pressing EXIT from any of the above display menus causes the Ethernet option to reinitialize its internal interface INITIALIZING INET 0 firmware INITIALIZING 100 INITIALIZATION SUCCEEDED INITIALIZATION FAILED Teledyne Instruments Customer Service personnel SETUPX X ONS MENU Contact your IT Network Administrator ID INET EXIT 05496 Rev A6 97 Operating Instructions TML87 Instruction Manual 6 10 6 4 Changing the Analyzer s HOSTNAME The HOSTNAME is the name by which the analyzer appears on your network The default name for all Teledyne Instruments TML87 analyzers is M101E To change this name particularly if you have more than one TML87 analyzer on your network press SAMPLE RANGE 500 0 PPB XXX X DHCP ON lt TST TST gt CAL SETUP SET gt EXIT Continue pressing SET UNTIL SAMPLE ENTER SETUP PASS 818 8 1 8 ENTR HOSTNAME 101E SETUP X X PRI MARY SETUP MENU EDIT CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE EXIT HOSTNAME M 101E
104. SO concentration measurement These are Line Voltage Change UV lamp energy is directly proportional to the line voltage This can be avoided by installing adequate AC Line conditioning equipment such as a UPS surge suppressor Lamp Aging Over a period of months the UV energy will show a downward trend usually 3096 in the first 90 days and then a slower rate until the end of useful life of the lamp Periodically running the UV lamp calibration routine see Section 6 9 7 will compensate for this until the lamp output becomes too low to function at all Lamp Positioning The UV output level of the lamp is not even across the entire length of the lamp Some portions of the lamp shine slightly more brightly than others At the factory the position of the UV lamp is adjusted to optimize the amount of UV light shining through the UV filter lens and into the reaction cell Changes to the physical alignment of the lamp can affect the analyzers ability to accurately measure SO 250 05496 Rev A6 TML87 Instruction Manual TROUBLESHOOTING amp REPAIR Reaction Cell DO NOT Shutter Housing use Lamp Cap to adjust Lamp position UV Lamp Power Supply Wires Adjust Lamp MENS Position by grasping lamp body ONLY Shutter Assy BN UV Lamp Bracket Mounting Screws UV Filter Retainer amp Lens Housing Figure 11 11 Shutter Assembly Exploded View CAUTION ALWAYS wear UV Protective Safety Glass
105. Setup CFG menu see Section 6 5 the firmware revision of the iChip processor on the Ethernet card should be listed It will appear something like SAMPLE iChip Rev IL702P16 1 3 NEXT PREV EXIT If appears as the revision number something is preventing the iChip from being initialized e On initial start up after iChip driver is enabled the analyzers COMM port driver tests the iChip to determine the baud rate at which it is set to function This test occurs when the instrument is approximately 75 though its boot up procedure and takes about 90 seconds to complete This test should only occur on the initial start up of the analyzer after the Ethernet card is installed and activated usually at the factory A 90 second pause at this point in its boot process every time it is turned on could indicate that a problem exists with the iChip itself the Ethernet card or the analyzer s Disk on Chip memory that is preventing it from holding the proper baud rate setting for the COM2 port in memory 11 5 Subsystem Checkout The preceding sections of this manual discussed a variety of methods for identifying possible sources of failures or performance problems within the analyzer In most cases this included a list of possible causes and in some cases quick solutions or at least a pointer to the appropriate sections describing them This section describes how to determine if a certain component or subsystem is actually the cause of the prob
106. Shutter Assembly 250 Figure 11 11 Shutter Assembly Exploded View sssssesseeeeneeeeeneeenem nennen 251 Figure 11 12 Location of UV Reference Detector 252 Figure 11 13 PMT Assembly Exploded 2 254 Figure 11 14 Pre Amplifier Board 256 Figure 12 1 Triboelectric Charging 2 creer ior Ete eee pere rte a a e ae ena da pod 261 Figure 12 2 Basic anti ESD Work 264 05496 Rev A6 ix List of Tables TML87 Instruction Manual LIST OF TABLES Table 2 1 TML87 Basic Unit eene eene nennen neret nnns nens 5 Table 3 1 Analog output Pin 0 ei aeiaai ae iiei iE 13 Table 3 2 Status Output 14 Table 3 3 Control Input Signals ertet oen ai node tne Dr de due ead 15 Table 3 4 Inlet Outlet Connector ener nennen rre nnne nnne 16 Table 3 5 NIST SRM s Available for Traceability of H2S amp SO Calibration Gases 18 Table 3 6 Front Panel Display During System eene 23 Table 3 7 Possible Warning Messages at 24 Table 3 8 5 50 Switching Valve Operating
107. Span Voltage Span Tolerance 76 05496 Rev 6 87 Instruction Manual Operating Instructions See Table 3 1 for 1 assignments of Analog Out connector on the rear panel DC Gnd Recording ANALYZER Device Figure 6 5 Setup for Calibrating Analog Outputs To make these adjustments the AOUT auto calibration feature must be turned off Section 6 9 4 2 Activate the ANALOG I O CONFIGURATION MENU see Section 6 9 1 then press FROM ANALOG I O CONFIGURATION MENU DIAG AIO CONC_OUT_1 5V NO CAL lt SET SET gt EDIT EXIT DIAG AIO CONC_OUT_1 AUTO CAL OFF Press SET gt to select the analog output channel to be configured DISPLAYED AS CHANNEL SET SET EXIT CONC OUT 1 A1 CONC OUT 2 A2 i TEST OUTPUT A4 DIAG AIO CONC OUT 2 CALIBRATED NO SET CAL EXIT DIAG AIO OUT 1 VOLT Z 0 mV 0100 UP10 UP DOWN DN10 D100 ENTR EXIT These keys increase decrease the analog output by 100 10 or 1 counts Continue adjustments until the voltage measured tolerance listed in Table 6 10 The concentration display will not change Only the voltage reading of your voltmeter will change 27 DIAG AIO CONC OUT 1 RANGE 5V DIAG ANALOG CONFIGURATION SET EDIT EXIT PREV NEXT ENTR EXIT DIAG AIO CONC OUT 1 OFS 0 D
108. TST gt CAL CALZ CALS SETUP fpe e ee SETUP X X STARTING TIME 14 15 SAMPLE ENTER SETUP PASS 818 8 1 8 ENTR v SETUP X X PRIMARY SETUP MENU CFG ACAL DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE EXIT SETUP X X SEQ 1 DISABLED NEXT MODE EXIT y SETUP X X SEQ 2 DISABLED PREV NEXT MODE EXIT SETUP X X MODE DISABLED NEXT ENTR EXIT SETUP XJ MODE ZERO v PREV NEXT ENTR EXIT SETUP ZERO SPAN PREV ENTR EXIT SETUP X X SEQ 2 ZERO SPAN 1 00 00 PREV NEXT MODE SET EXIT Default value is ON Toggle keys to set day month amp year Format DD MON YY Toggle keys to set time Format HH MM This is a 24 hr clock PM hours are 13 24 2 15 PM 14 15 SETUP TIMER ENABLE SET EDIT EXIT SETUP STARTING DATE 01 JAN 02 SET SET EDIT EXIT SETUP STARTING DATE 01 JAN 02 SET SET EDIT EXIT SETUP X X DELTA DAYS 1 SET SET EDIT EXIT Toggle keys y to set number of SETUP X X DELTA DAYS 1 days between 0 0 2 ENTR EXIT procedures 1 367 SETUP X X DELTA DAYS 2 lt SET SET gt EDIT EXIT SETUP DELTA TIME00 00 lt SET
109. The firmware is unable to communicate with the relay board SAMPLE FLOW WARN The flow rate of the sample gas is outside the specified limits SAMPLE PRESS WARN Sample pressure outside of operational parameters SYSTEM RESET The computer was rebooted UV LAMP WARNING The UV lamp intensity measured by the reference detector reading too low or too high To view and clear warning messages after several attempts to clear it the message may indicate a real problem and not an artifact of the warm up period SAMPLE HVPS WARNING SO2 0 00 TEST deactivates warning messages TEST CAL MSG SETUP SAMPLE RANGE 500 000PPB 502 0 00 MSG activates warning messages lt TST TST gt CAL MSG setup f SITST TSTS replaced with TEST key SAMPLE SYSTEM RESET 502 0 00 Press CLR to clear the current TEST CAL MSG CLR SETUP bd _ NOTE S If more than one warning is active the If the warning message persists next message will take its place Once the last warning has been cleared the analyzer returns to SAMPLE mode Make sure warning messages are not due to real problems 24 05496 Rev A6 TML87 Instruction Manual Getting Started 3 2 4 Functional Check l Afterthe analyzer s components have warmed up for at least 30 minutes verify that the software properly supports any hardware options that were
110. This relationship is derived from the instrumental response to successive samples of different known concentrations As a minimum three reference points and a zero point are recommended to define this relationship The true values of the calibration gas must be traceable to NIST SRM s See Table 7 1 All monitoring instrument systems are subject to some drift and variation in internal parameters and cannot be expected to maintain accurate calibration over long periods of time Therefore it is necessary to dynamically check the calibration relationship on a predetermined schedule Zero and span checks must be used to document that the data remains within control limits These checks are also used in data reduction and validation Table 8 3 summarizes the initial quality assurance activities for calibrating equipment Table 8 2 is a matrix for the actual dynamic calibration procedure Calibrations should be carried out at the field monitoring site The Analyzer should be in operation for at least several hours preferably overnight before calibration so that it is fully warmed up and its operation has stabilized During the calibration the TML87 should be in the CAL mode and therefore sample the test atmosphere through all components used during normal ambient sampling and through as much of the ambient air inlet system as is practicable If the Instrument will be used on more than one range i e IND or AUTO ranges it should be calibrated separately o
111. Valve Options Installed If your analyzer is equiped with either the zero span valve option Option 50 or the internal zero span option Option 51 the pneumatic connections should be made as follows 18 05496 Rev A6 Getting Started TML87 Instruction Manual Zero Span Valves Option 50 Source of SAMPLE Gas VENT if input is pressurized MODEL 700 Gas Dilution Calibrator with generator option External Zero Air Scrubber MODEL 701 Zero Air Calibrated SO or H2S Generator gas At high concentration Internal Zero Span Option 125 Option 51 Source of SAMPLE Gas VENT if input is pressurized Ambient Air Figure 3 8 Basic Pneumatic Connections for Units with Valve Options 19 05496 Rev A6 TML87 Instruction Manual Getting Started Front Panel MM source Lap Particulate Filter ON OFF SWITCH Hydrocarbon Scrubber Kicker Hidden from view SO Scrubber PMT Housing Pump Assy PMT Preamp PCA Reaction Cell PMT Cooling System Relay Board SO gt H2S Converter Molybdenum Converter PS2 12 VDC SO gt H2S Switching Valve PS1 5 VDC 15VDC IZS and ZS CS Valves Power Receptacle PC 104 Card V Rear Panel Vacuum Manifold Mother Board Figure 3 9 TML87 Layout with IZS 20 05496 Rev A6 TML87 Instruction Manual Getting Started 3 2 Initial Operation CAUTION Do not look at the UV lamp while the unit is
112. W D which indicates the health of the 2 communications bus This LED is located in the upper left hand corner of the relay board when looking at the electronic components If D1 is blinking then the other LED s can be used in conjunction with the DIAG menu functions to test hardware functionality by switching devices and off and watching the corresponding LED go on or off The LED only indicates that the logic signal for an output has been activated If the output driver i e the relay or valve driver IC is defective then the LED will light up but the attached peripheral device will not turn on 05496 Rev A6 227 TROUBLESHOOTING amp REPAIR TML87 Instruction Manual Table 11 3 Relay Board Status LEDs FAULT LED COLOR FUNCTION STATUS INDICATED FAILURE S D1 red Watchdog Circuit 2 bus Continuously Failed or halted CPU faulty motherboard operation ON or OFF keyboard relay board wiring between motherboard keyboard or relay board 5 V power supply D2 yellow Relay 0 sample chamber Continuously Heater broken thermistor broken heater ON or OFF D3 yellow Relay 1 H2S converter heater Continuously Heater broken thermocouple broken ON or OFF yellow Relay 2 unused D5 yellow Relay 3 IZS heater Continuously Heater broken thermistor broken ON or OFF D6 yellow Relay 4 Spare N A N A D7 green Valve 0 zero span valve status Con
113. Yoon e ede ces 198 10 4 Electronic Operation 1 EI etre Iri a ea raaa fee 199 MU EBMIU e 200 LE SNPIE SO Men EMI 201 10 4 1 2 FlaSW GRIP REP 201 05496 Rev 6 Table of Contents TML87 Instruction Manual 10 4 2 Sensor Module amp Sample chamber necne tnnt ttes error dba rene E rec ena eed 202 10 4 2 1 Sample Chatmiber reete ert Ur De tema t eei iP OIM 202 10 4 3 Sample Chamber Heating Circuit 2 203 10 4 4 Photo Multiplier Tube PMT Jessiina ee oett tite e eere een de eene e ce ne ER 203 10 4 5 PMT Cooling debeas 205 10 4 5 1 Thermoelectric Cooler freres terere reet treten uera cesse 205 10 4 5 2 TEC Gornttrol Bard ctr re Eee Reto tta eem e c eto edis 206 10 4 6 i us 206 10 4 7 Pneumatic Sensor Board tede treinta ne Een A ERR ER ARE Tenue a aere e RR E Ri Nereus 208 10 4 8 ir ee LBS e de eee Mie d a eoe te ette Nal deuote dg 208 10 4 8 1 Heater Contr
114. access is available through the LAN this option also allows communication with the instrument over the public Internet When installed this option is electronically connected to the instrument s COM2 serial port making that port no longer available for RS 232 RS 485 communications through the COM2 connector on the rear panel The option consists of a Teledyne Instruments designed Ethernet card Figure 5 5 which is mechanically attached to the instrument s rear panel Figure 5 6 A 7 foot long CAT 5 network cable terminated at both ends with standard RJ 45 connectors is included as well Maximum communication speed is limited by the RS 232 port to 115 2 kBaud DC Power Connector Female RJ 45 Connector LNK LED ACT LED TxD LED RxD LED a RS 232 connector to the Motherboard Figure 5 5 TML87 Ethernet Card 42 05496 Rev A6 87 Instruction Manual Optional Hardware and Software CPU ETHERNET OPTION Rear Panel Ethernet as seen frominside Card iiis q M Connector Analog Out Link LIS LED 00050006 CONTROLIN Activity LED 8 Fou Transmit LED e Receive e LED i EEEE Interior View Exterior View Figure 5 6 TML87 Rear Panel with Ethernet Installed This option can be installed in conjunction with the RS 2323 Multidrop option 62 allowing the instrument to communicate on both types of networks simultaneously For more information on using and se
115. activated The mode field of the display will External Span Cal read SPAN CAL R Uwe SSS Pies SSCS V Digital Ground Provided to ground an external device e g recorder U DC Power For Input Input for 5 VDC required to activate inputs A F This voltage can be Pull Ups taken from an external source or from the pin Internal source of 5 which can be used to activate inputs when Internal 5v Supply connected to There two methods to activate control inputs The internal 5V available from the pin is the most convenient method Figure 6 18 However to ensure that these inputs are truly isolated a separate external 5 VDC power supply should be used Figure 6 19 E E CONTROL IN A B C D E F U ZERO SPAN Figure 6 18 Control Inputs with local 5 V power supply CONTROL IN C D F A B v ZERO SPAN 5 Power Supply Figure 6 19 Control Inputs with external 5 V power supply 126 05496 Rev A6 87 Instruction Manual Operating Instructions 6 12 2 Remote Operation Using the External Serial 6 12 2 1 Terminal Operating Modes The TML87 can be remotely configured calibrated or queried for stored data through the serial ports As terminals and computers use different communication schemes the analyzer supports two communicate modes specifically designed to interface with these two types of devices Comp
116. an appropriately lower actual concentration For example with a dilution set to 100 a 1 ppm gas can be used to calibrate a 100 ppm sample gas if the span gas is not routed through the dilution system On the other hand if a 100 ppm span gas is used it needs to pass through the same dilution steps as the sample gas Set the dilution factor as a gain e g a value of 20 means 20 parts diluent and 1 part of sample gas SAMPLE RANGE 500 0 PPB 25 lt 5 TST CAL SAMPLE ENTER SETUP PASS 818 ENTR EXIT SETUP C 3 PRI MARY SETUP MENU CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE SETUP C 3 RANGE CONTROL MENU DIL only appears if the dilution ratio option has been MODE SET UNIT DIL installed EXIT ignores the new setting SETUP C 3 DIL FACTOR 1 0 GAIN ENTR accepts the Toggle these keys to set the dilution f new setting factor 0 ENTR This is the number by which the analyzer will multiply the H2S concentrations of the gas passing SETUP DIL FACTOR 20 0 GAIN through the reaction cell 0 0 ENTR The analyzer multiplies the measured gas concentrations with this dilution factor and displays the result 4 Calibrate the instrument 6 8 SETUP VARS Using the Internal Variables The TML87 has several user adjustable software variables which define certain operational parameters Usually these variables are automatically set by the instrument s firmware but can be manu
117. channel the message for that channel will be AUTO CALIBRATING CONC OUT 1 similar to DIA AUTO CALIBRATING CONC OUT 2 NOT AUTO CAL AUTO CALIBRATING TEST OUTPUT CONC OUT 1 SET SET gt CAL If any of the channels have not been calibrated this message will read NO Exit to return to the configuration menu DIAG AIO AOUTS CALIBRATED SET SET CAL To automatically calibrate a single analog channel activate the ANALOG I O CONFIGURATION MENU see Section 6 9 1 then press DIAG ANALOG I CONFIGURATION EXIT to Return PREV NEXT ENTR EXIT Sample Display DIAG AIO AOUTS CALIBRATED NO lt CAL Z Press SET gt to select the Analog Output channel to be configured Then Press EDIT to continue DIAG AIO CONC_OUT_2 5V CAL SET SET gt EDIT EXIT DIAG AIO RANGE 5V DIAG AIO CONC OUT 2 CALIBRATED NO SET EDIT EXIT SET CAL EXIT DIAG AIO CONC OUT 2 OFS 0 mV DIAG AIO AUTO CALIBRATING CONC OUT 2 SET SET EDIT EXIT DIAG CONC OUT 2 AUTO CAL ON DIAG AIO CONC OUT 2 CALIBRATED YES SET SET EDIT EXIT SET CAL EXIT 05496 Rev A6 75 Operating Instructions TML87 Instruction Manual To select manual output calibration for a particular channel activate the ANALOG I O CONFIGURATION MENU see Section 6 9 1 then press DIAG ANALOG
118. configuration settings are stored in a backup file on the EEPROM It is recommended to document all analyzer parameters that may have been changed such as calibration range auto cal analog output serial port and other settings before replacing the chip l Turn off power to the instrument fold down the rear panel by loosening the mounting screws 242 05496 Rev A6 TML87 Instruction Manual TROUBLESHOOTING amp REPAIR 2 When looking at the electronic circuits from the back of the analyzer locate the Disk on Chip in the right most socket of the CPU board The chip should carry a label with firmware revision date and initials of the programmer Remove the IC with a dedicated IC removal tool or by gently prying it up from the socket Do not bend the connector pins 3 Install the new Disk on Chip making sure the notch at the end of the chip matches the notch in the socket It may be necessary to straighten the pins somewhat to fit them into the socket Press the chip all the way in 4 Close the rear panel and turn on power to the machine Generally all of the setup information will need to be re entered unless the firmware revision has not changed and the analyzer is equipped and properly configured with an EEPROM chip Whenever changing the version of installed software the memory must be reset Failure to ensure that memory is reset can cause the analyzer to malfunction and invalidate measurements Note especially that the A D
119. converter minutes flushed of previous gas 3 10 Analyzer measures florescence sample chamber SO Gas stream bypasses 0 3 Wait period dwell time Ensures sample chamber scrubber and converter minutes has been flushed of previous gas 3 10m Analyzer measures florescence in sample chamber Cycle repeats every 20Minuites The timing of the above cycle is set by two variables see Appendix A 2 MEASURE PERIOD which sets the total dwell time for each gas mode and MEASURE DELAY which sets the wait period before the instrument begins making measurements after the gas mode has been switched 10 3 3 Flow Rate Control The TML87 uses a special flow control assembly located in the exhaust vacuum manifold Figure 10 7 to maintain a constant flow rate of the sample gas through the instrument This assembly consists of e A critical flow orifice e Two o rings Located just before and after the critical flow orifice The o rings seal the gap between the walls of assembly housing and the critical flow orifice A spring Applies mechanical force needed to form the seal between the o rings the critical flow orifice and the assembly housing 10 3 3 1 Critical Flow Orifice The most important component of this flow control assembly is the critical flow orifice Critical flow orifices are a remarkably simple way to regulate stable gas flow rates They operate without moving parts by taking advantage of the l
120. does not need to be checked or verified Sometimes with uncertified test concentrations artificial stimulation of the when no adjustments are made to the analyzer the analyzer s detector electronic or other types of checks of a Level 1 calibration may be called a zero span check in portion of the analyzer etc which case it must not be confused with a Level 2 zero span check Since most analyzers have a reliably linear or near linear output response with concentration they can be adequately calibrated with only two concentration standards two point concentration Furthermore one of the standards may be zero concentration which is relatively easily obtained and need not be certified Hence only one certified concentration standard is needed for the two point Level 1 zero and span calibration Although lacking the advantages of the multipoint calibration the two point If a Level 2 zero and span check is to be used in the quality zero and span calibration because of its simplicity can Control program a reference response for the check should be and should be carried out much more frequently be obtained immediately following a zero and span or Also two point calibrations are easily automated multipoint calibration while the analyzer s calibration is Frequency checks or updating of the calibration accurately known Subsequent Level 2 check responses relationship with a two point zero and span calibration Should then be compa
121. flow orifice used in the 87 is designed to provide a flow rate of 650 cm min 10 3 4 Sample Particulate Filter To remove particles in the sample gas the analyzer is equipped with a Teflon membrane filter of 47 mm diameter also referred to as the sample filter with a 5 uim pore size The filter is accessible through the front panel which folds down and should be changed according to the suggested maintenance schedule in Table 9 1 10 3 5 Hydrocarbon Scrubber Kicker It is very important to make sure the air supplied to sample the chamber is clear of hydrocarbons To accomplish this task the TML87 uses a single tube permeation scrubber The scrubber consists of a single tube of a specialized plastic that absorbs hydrocarbons very well This tube is located within the outer flexible plastic tube shell As gas flows through the inner tube hydrocarbons are absorbed into the membrane walls and transported through the membrane wall and into the hydrocarbon free purge gas flowing through the outer tube This process is driven by the hydrocarbon partial pressure gradient between the inner and outer tubes 196 05496 Rev A6 87 Instruction Manual Theory Of Operation CLEAN PURGE AIR FROM VACUUM MANIFOLD OUTER TUBE Clean Air USED PURGE AIR CLEANED PUMP SAMPLE AIR AND TO EXHAUST PORT SAMPLE CHAMBER SAMPLE AIR in FROM PARTICULATE FILTER Ambie
122. iDAS channel CALDAT for data analysis documentation and archival Make sure that these parameters are within the limits listed in Table 7 5 Table 7 5 Calibration Data Quality Evaluation FUNCTION MINIMUM VALUE OPTIMUM VALUE MAXIMUM VALUE H2S SLOPE 0 700 1 000 1 300 H2S OFFS 50 0 mV n a 250 0 mV These values should not be significantly different from the values recorded on the Teledyne Instruments Final Test and Validation Data sheet that was shipped with your instrument If they are refer to the troubleshooting Chapter 11 1 Shown as they appear when analyzer is in H2S mode In SO2 mode they appear as SO2 OFFS amp 502 SLOPE In multigas mode both version are listed and should be checked User Notes 160 05496 Rev A6 TML87 Instruction Manual EPA Protocol Calibration 8 0 EPA PROTOCOL CALIBRATION 8 1 Calibration Requirements When configured for SO measurement mode or multigas measurement mode the TML87 may be used for EPA SLAMS monitoring In these cases it must be calibrated in accordance with the instructions in this section At the writing of this manual there is no EPA requirements for the monitoring of H2S or published H5S calibration protocols therefore these instructions only discuss the calibration of the SO measurement feature In order to insure that high quality accurate measurements are obtained at all times the TML87 must be calibrated prior to use A quality a
123. installed Default value is ON 1 Only appears when the ENABLE I NTERNET mode is enabled for either COM1 COM2 ON OFF Figure 5 Secondary Setup Menu COMM amp VARS 05492 Rev C A 7 APPENDI X 1 TML87 Software Menu Trees Revision TML87 Instruction Manual SETUP CFG RNGE PASS CLK MORE COMM VARS DI AG ENTER SETUP PASS 818 15 PREV NEXT JUMP EDIT PRINT MEASURE MODE CAL GAS DAS HOLD OFF TPC ENABLE RCELL SET 125 SET DYN ZERO DYN SPAN CONC PRECISION CLOCK ADJ COMM VARS MENU TREE Fig A 5 SET SET INSTRUMENT IP GATEWAY IP SUBNET MASK TCP PORT HOSTNAME Go To DI AG MENU TREE Fig A 8 INSTRUMENT IP GATEWAY 5 SUBNET MASK TCP PORT 1 Only appears if a valve option is installed 2 Only appears when the Ethernet card option 63 is installed 3 Although TCP PORT is editable regardless of the DHCP state do not change the setting for this property unless instructed to by Teledyne Instruments Customer Service personnel HOST NAME is only editable when DHCP is ON INSTRUMENT GATEWAY amp SUBNET MASK are only editable when DHCP is OFF Figure A 6 Secondary Setup Menu COMM Menu with Ethernet Card A 8 05492 Rev C TML87 Instruction Manual APPENDI X A 1 TML87 Software Menu Trees Revision A 3A SETUP CFG RNGE PASS CLK MORE COMM VARS DI AG ID COM1 COM
124. installed Check to make sure that the analyzer is functioning within allowable operating parameters Appendix C includes a list of test functions viewable from the analyzer s front panel as well as their expected values These functions are also useful tools for diagnosing performance problems with your analyzer Section 11 1 2 The enclosed Final Test and Validation Data sheet part number 04551 lists these values before the instrument left the factory To view the current values of these parameters press the following key sequence on the analyzer s front panel Remember until the unit has completed its warm up these parameters may not have stabilized SAMPLE RANGE 500 0 PPB NOX X X lt TST TST gt CAL Toggle lt TST TST gt keys to scroll through list of functions SETUP RANGE H2S STB PRES SAMP FL PMT NORM PMT UV LAMP LAMP RATIO STR LGT DARK PMT Refer to DARK LAMP Section H2S SLOPE 6 2 1 for H2S OFFS definitions HVPS of these RCELL TEMP test 1 RP BOX TEMP functions Only appears if IZS option is PMT TEMP installed 125 TEMP 2 Only appears if analog output 4 TEST is actively reporting a test function TI ME 3 Shown as they appear when analyzer is in H2S mode In SO mode appear as 502 STB SO2 OFFS amp SO2 SLOPE In multigas mode both versions appear If your analyzer has an Ethernet card Option 63 installed and your network is running a dynamic host configura
125. interface as BOXTEMP 2 Engineering software 3 Current instrument units TML87 A 22 05492 Rev C TML87 Instruction Manual APPENDI X A 4 TML87 Signal 1 O Definitions Revision APPENDIX A 4 TML87 Signal O Definitions Revision A 3A Table 4 TML87 Signal Definitions Revision A 3A BIT OR DESCRI PTI ON CHANNEL NUMBER Internal inputs U7 J 108 pins 1 8 bits 9 16 default I O address 322 hex Internal outputs U8 J 108 pins 1 8 bits 0 7 default I O address 322 hex ELEC_TEST 1 electrical test on 5 1 1 optic test on PREAMP RANGE 1 select high preamp range 1 1 reset Sre 5 12 RST 0 hardware reset 8584 chip MEME eee Control inputs 011 J 1004 pins 1 6 bits 0 5 default 1 address 321 hex EXT ZERO CAL 0 go into zero calibration 1 exit zero calibration EXT SPAN CAL 0 go into Don calibration Omm Control inputs 014 J 1006 pins 1 6 bits 0 5 default 1 address 325 hex 19 Spree 7 7 Control outputs 017 J 1008 pins 1 8 bits 0 7 default 1 address 321 hex Control outputs 021 J 1008 pins 9 12 bits 0 3 default O address 325 hex Alarm outputs 021 J 1009 pins 1 12 bits 4 7 default 1 O address 325 hex ST SYSTEM 2 1 system 0 any alarm condition
126. is described in detail in Section 6 11 7 2 Manual Calibration The following section describes the basic method for manually calibrating the TML87 analyzer in H2S measurement mode The same method may be used to calibrate the TML87 analyzers configured for SO measurement by substituting SO span gas for the H2S span gas listed See Section 7 8 for instructions on calibrating analyzers configured for multigas measurement mode 05496 Rev A6 143 Calibration Procedures TML87 Instruction Manual STEP ONE Connect the sources of zero air and span gas as shown below No Valve Options Installed Calibrated H2S GAS At high MODEL 700 Gas Source of con ion Dilution SAMPLE Gas Calibrator Removed during eala Calibration MODEL 701 Zero Air Sample Generator Exhaust Span OR Calibrated H2S GAS At spon gas Source of con cen tration SAMPLE Gas Removed during calibration Needle valve to control flow MODEL 701 Zero Air Generator Exhaust Sample Span Figure 7 1 Setup for Manual Calibration without Z S valve or IZS Option 144 05496 Rev A6 TML87 Instruction Manual Calibration Procedures STEP TWO Set the expected H2S span gas concentrations In this example the instrument is set for single SNGL range mode with a reporting range span of 500 ppb SAMPLE RANGE 500 0 PPB XXX X This sequence causes the lt TST TST gt CAL SETU
127. may be sufficient for quick daily calibration checks we recommend the use of certified H5S gases for accurate calibration 142 05496 Rev A6 TML87 Instruction Manual Calibration Procedures 7 1 5 Calibration Gas Traceability All equipment used to produce calibration gases should be verified against standards of the National Institute for Standards and Technology NIST To ensure NIST traceability we recommend acquiring cylinders of working gas that are certified to be traceable to NIST Standard Reference Materials SRM These are available from a variety of commercial sources Table 7 1 5 5 Available for Traceability of H2S and SO Calibration Gases 4 NOMINAL MISTER CONCENTRATION 2730 Hydrogen sulfide 5000 ppb 2731 Hydrogen sulfide in gt 20 ppm 1693a Sulfur dioxide in 50 ppm 1694a Sulfur dioxide in 100 ppm 1661a Sulfur dioxide 500 ppm 7 1 6 Data Recording Devices A strip chart recorder data acquisition system or digital data acquisition system should be used to record data from the TML87 s serial or analog outputs If analog readings are used the response of the recording system should be checked against a NIST traceable voltage source or meter The data recording device should be capable of bi polar operation so that negative readings can be recorded For electronic data recording the TML87 provides an internal data acquisition system iDAS which
128. mil traces J14 NIFIT 2 Title eee d TML41 50 60 87 RELAY PCB Use 40 mil traces Size Number 03956 Revision 12 Date 30 Jun 2004 Sheet 2 of 3 3 N PCBMGRWMELEASED 03954cd PR amp XIEIBY03954a ddb 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 R7 15V S5K VDD TC ZRI C15 C7 0 1 T 5 6V TON O 715 C16 m ZR3 5 gt 050 0 1 R21 10 1 U8 U7A 20k 1 3 7 J 2 2 J TC Connector 4 118 ROFIT 4 KIR ME R9 TYPEk K TC Connector 1K VDD_TCo lt 784 U7B 20k 10V 7 R22 6 6 2277 9 v ME R16 R12 TYPEJ N 9 z HK C20 J TC Connector U10 R10 m o R20 uF 3 JP6 lt TOUT c X 118 2 UMPER 5K Cll LT1025 C12 0 1 61 VEE TCo Title TYPEK RELAY PAB J19 2 oa Number 03956 Revision Date 30 Jun 2004 Sheet 3 of 3 3 File N PCBMGR RELEASED 03954c PR amp iHB 03 954a ddb 1 2 3 4 5 6 Ta Ta 1 2 3 4 15V R2 1 1K 51 NH VR2 D ASCX PRESSURE SENSOR 2 3 4 3 C2 1 0UF 1 LMA040CIZ TP4 5 TP3 TP2 1 51 54 OUTS2 OUT 53 OUT 10 REF GND 15V O O O O O J1 3 6 i BB 1 ASCX PRESSURE SENSOR 3 4 5 15V 6
129. modem there are activity indicators just above the COM1 port Once a cable is connected between the analyzer and a computer or modem both the red and green LEDs should be on If the lights for COM 1 are not lit use small switch on the rear panel to switch it between DTE and DCE modes see Section 6 10 5 If both LEDs are still not illuminated check the cable for proper wiring The two LEDs located over 2 are currently deactivated If you have problems getting 2 to activate it may be necessary to install null modem cable contact customer service for information 6 10 4 RS 485 Configuration of COM2 As delivered from the factory COM2 is configured for RS 232 communications This port can be re configured for operation as a non isolated half duplex RS 485 port capable of supporting up to 32 instruments with a maximum distance between the host and the furthest instrument being 4000 feet If you require full duplex or isolated operation please contact Teledyne Instruments Customer Service To reconfigure 2 as an RS 285 port set switch 6 of SW1 to the ON position see Figure 6 9 e The RS 485 port can be configured with or without a 150 O termination resistor To include the resistor install jumper at position JP3 on the CPU board see Figure 6 9 To configure COM2 as an un terminated RS 485 port leave JP3 open 90 05496 Rev A6 87 Instruction Manual Operating Instructions CN4 JP3 COM2 RS 23
130. of zero air and sample gas and procedures should conform to those described in Section 7 2 for analyzers with no valve options Section 7 5 for analyzers with an IZS valve option installed and Section 7 4 for analyzers with Z S options installed 8 4 2 Precision Check A periodic check is used to assess the data for precision A one point precision check must be carried out at least once every 2 weeks on each analyzer at an SO concentration between 0 08 and 0 10 ppm The analyzer must be operated in its normal sampling mode and the precision test gas must pass through all filters scrubbers conditioners and other components used during normal ambient sampling The standards from which precision 166 05496 Rev A6 TML87 Instruction Manual EPA Protocol Calibration check test concentrations are obtained must be traceable to NIST SRM see Table 7 1 Those standards used for calibration or auditing may be used To perform a precision check the instrument set up sources of zero air and SO span gas and procedures should conform to those described in Section 7 3 for analyzers with no valve options or Section 7 6 for analyzers with 175 or 218 options installed with the following exception e Connect the analyzer to a precision gas that has an SO concentration between 0 08 and 0 10 ppm If a precision check is made in conjunction with a zero span check it must be made prior to any zero or span adjustments Record this value Information fr
131. off edge matches that of the socket Press the chip symmetrically and straight all the way in 4 Close the rear panel and turn on power to the machine 11 6 3 Sensor Module Repair amp Cleaning 05496 Rev A6 243 TROUBLESHOOTING amp REPAIR TML87 Instruction Manual UV Lamp Power Supply Wiring N Shutter Cabling Exits here fitting e TEC Power Cable Heater Wiring Connector exits here Gas Inlet fitting Thermistor UV Detector Wiring exits here Wiring Connector Figure 11 4 Sensor Module Wiring and Pneumatic Fittings 11 6 3 1 Removing and Reinstalling the Sensor Module Several of the procedures in this section either require the sensor module to be removed from the instrument or are easier to perform if it has been removed To remove the Sensor Module 1 Turn off the instrument power 2 Openthe top cover of the instrument e Remove the set screw located in the top center of the rear panel 244 05496 Rev A6 TML87 Instruction Manual TROUBLESHOOTING amp REPAIR e Remove the screws fastening the top cover to the unit four per side e Liftthe cover straight up 3 Disconnect the sensor module pneumatic lines see Figure 11 4 e Gas inlet line 1 8 black Teflon line with stainless steel fitting e Gas outlet line 1 4 black Teflon line with brass fitting 4 Disconnect all electrical wiring to the Sensor Module e UV lamp power supply wiring e Shutter ca
132. per mol PPM micrograms per cubic meter ug m UG or milligrams per cubic meter mg m MG Changing units affects all of the display analog outputs COM port and iDAS values for all reporting ranges regardless of the analyzer s range mode To change the concentration units Select the preferred concentration unit SAMPLE RANGE 500 0 PPB 25 lt TST 5 gt CAL SETUP SAMPLE ENTER SETUP PASS 818 8 1 8 ENTR EXIT SETUP X X PRI MARY SETUP MENU CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE EXIT SETUP X X RANGE CONTROL MENU MODE SET UNIT EXIT SETUP X X CONC UNITS PPB PPM PPB UGM MGM ENTER EXIT SETUP X X CONC UNITS tm PPM PPB UGM MGM ENTER EXIT EXIT returns to the main menu ENTR accepts the new unit EXIT returns to the SETUP menu 64 05496 Rev A6 TML87 Instruction Manual Operating Instructions 6 7 8 Dilution Ratio The dilution ratio is a software option that allows the user to compensate for any dilution of the sample gas before it enters the sample inlet Using the dilution ratio option is a 4 step process l Select reporting range units Follow the procedure in Section 6 7 7 Select the range Use the procedures in Section 6 7 3 6 7 6 Make sure that the SPAN value entered is the maximum expected concentration of the undiluted calibration gas and that the span gas is either supplied through the same dilution inlet system as the sample gas or has
133. perform a flow check as described in Section 11 5 2 is essential 228 05496 Rev A6 TML87 Instruction Manual TROUBLESHOOTING amp REPAIR 11 2 1 Zero or Low Sample Flow If the pump is operating but the unit reports an XXXX gas flow do the following three steps e Check for actual sample flow e Check pressures e Carry out a leak check To check the actual sample flow disconnect the sample tube from the sample inlet on the rear panel of the instrument Make sure that the unit is in basic SAMPLE mode Place a finger over the inlet and see if it gets sucked in by the vacuum or more properly use a flow meter to measure the actual flow If there is proper flow of around 650 700 cm min contact customer service If there is no flow or low flow continue with the next step Check that the sample pressure is at or around 28 in Hg A about 1 in below ambient atmospheric pressure 11 2 2 High Flow Flows that are significantly higher than the allowed operating range typically 10 11 of the nominal flow should not occur in the TML87 unless a pressurized sample zero or span gas is supplied to the inlet ports Be sure to vent excess pressure and flow just before the analyzer inlet ports When supplying sample zero or span gas at ambient pressure a high flow would indicate that one or more of the critical flow orifices are physically broken very unlikely case allowing more than nominal flow or were replaced with an orifice of wro
134. port Z S checks can be controlled via the RS 232 port See Section 6 12 2 and Appendix A 6 of this manual for more details 8 4 Precisions Calibration Procedures and Checks Calibration must be performed with a calibrator that meets all conditions specified in Subsection 2 9 2 Q A Handbook The user should be sure that all flow meters are calibrated under the conditions of use against a reliable standard All volumetric flow rates should be corrected to 25 C 77 F and 760mm 29 92in Hg Make sure the calibration system can supply the range of the concentration at a sufficient flow over the whole range of concentration that will be encountered during calibration All operational adjustments to the TML87 should be completed prior to the calibration The following software features must be set into the desired state before calibration Single range selection See Section 6 7 4 of this manual If the instrument will be used more than one range it should be calibrated separately on each applicable range e Automatic temperature pressure compensation e Alternate units make sure ppb units are selected for EPA monitoring See Section 6 7 7 The analyzer should be calibrated on the same range used for monitoring If the AUTO range mode is selected the highest of the ranges will result in the most accurate calibration and should be used 8 4 1 Precision Calibration To perform a precision calibration the instrument set up input sources
135. rte tete epe EAE Dee OE etica o Een hn 215 10 6 1 2 Keyboard E 215 10 6 1 3 Display E 215 10 6 1 4 Keyboard Display Interface 216 10 7 5 atA a aA ataa aetati 217 akO ETAWA o FETII LEH Filter E EAE A I AEA ED AAA 218 10 7 2 Calibration Slope and 002000 000 dee esed deve 218 10 7 3 Temperature and Pressure Compensation TPC 219 10 7 4 Internal Data Acquisition System 5 220 11 0 TROUBLESHOOTING amp REPAIR seen 221 11 1 General Troubleshooting tree ree etes meo 221 11 1 1 Fault Diagnosis with Warning 222 11 1 2 Fault Diagnosis with Test Functions sienne 224 11 1 3 Using the Diagnostic Signal 225 11 1 4 Status WEDS er e E EE E MER e e FER NER RE rh ren KERN TE ERR EU RR ER 226 11 1 4 1 Motherboard Status Indicator 226 11 1 4 2 CPU Status Indicator siiin erede t en
136. see Section 6 12 1 1 CONTROL INPUTS By applying 5VDC power supplied from an external source such as a PLC or Data logger see Section 6 12 1 2 Zero and Span calibrations can be initiated by contact closures on the rear panel 10 4 13 Data Bus The 1 data bus is used to communicate data and commands among the CPU the keyboard display interface and the various switches and relays on the relay board is a two wire clocked bi directional digital serial I O bus that is used widely in commercial and consumer electronic systems A transceiver on the motherboard converts data and control signals from the PC 104 bus to The data is then fed to the keyboard display interface see Section 10 6 1 4 and finally onto the relay board 10 4 14 Power up Circuit This circuit monitors the 5V power supply during start up and sets the analog outputs external digital I O ports and circuitry to specific values until the CPU boots and the instrument software can establish control 10 5 Power Supply Circuit Breaker The analyzer operates on 100 VAC 115 VAC or 230 VAC power at either 50Hz or 60Hz Individual units are set up at the factory to accept any combination of these five attributes As illustrated in Figure 10 18 below power enters the analyzer through a standard IEC 320 power receptacle located on the rear panel of the instrument From there it is routed through the ON OFF switch located in the lower right corner of the f
137. temperature input TEMP INPUT 6 Ground reference REF GND mV RF4096 4096 mV reference REF_4096_MV mV TML87 A 28 05492 Rev C TML87 Instruction Manual APPENDI X A 6 Terminal Command Designators Revision A 3A APPENDIX A 6 Terminal Command Designators Revision A 3A Table A 7 Terminal Command Designators Revision COMMAND ADDITI ONAL COMMAND SYNTAX DESCRI PTI ON ID Display help screen and commands list LOGON ID password Establish connection to instrument LOGOFF ID Terminate connection to instrument SET name hexmask Display test s LIST ALL name hexmask NAMES HEX Print test s to screen TP name Print single test CLEAR ALL name hexmask Disable test s SET name hexmask Display warning s W ID LIST ALL name hexmask NAMES HEX Print warning s name Clear single warning CLEAR name hexmask Clear warning s ZERO LOWSPAN SPAN 1 2 Enter calibration mode ASEQ number Execute automatic sequence C ID COMPUTE ZERO SPAN Compute new slope offset EXIT Exit calibration mode ABORT Abort calibration sequence LIST Print all 1 0 signals name value Examine or set 1 0 signal LIST NAMES Print names of all diagnostic tests ENTER name Execute diagnostic test EXIT Exit diagnostic test RESET DATA CONFIG exitcode Reset instrument D ID PRINT name SCRIPT Prin
138. the CPU 200 05496 Rev A6 87 Instruction Manual Theory Of Operation RS 485 COM1 amp COM2 Disk on chip RS 232 485 Configuration jumper Flash EEPROM Vite 11075819 RS 485 enable jumper gt El t c 11740314 41414144114 107777171717 Figure 10 11 TML87 CPU Board The CPU includes two types of non volatile data storage one disk on chip and one or two flash chips 10 4 1 1 Disk On Chip While technically an EEPROM the disk on chip DOC appears to the CPU as behaves as and performs the same function in the system as an 8 Mb disk drive It is used to store the computer s operating system the Teledyne Instruments firmware and most of the operational data generated by the analyzer s internal data acquisition system iDAS Sections 10 7 4 and 6 11 10 4 1 2 Flash Chip This non volatile memory includes 64 kb of space The TML87 CPU board can accommodate up to two EEPROM flash chips The TML87 standard configuration is one chip with 64 kb of storage capacity which is used to store a backup of the analyzer configuration as created during final checkout at the factory Separating these data onto a less frequently accessed chip significantly decreases the chance of those key data to get corrupted In the unlikely event that the flash chip should fail the analyzer will continue to operate with just the DOC However all configuration information will be lost requiring the unit
139. the PREV amp NEXT keys to cycle between the SO2 amp H2S Toggle this key to switch reporting Between ON and OFF KEY FUNCTION lt PREV Moves to next gas entry in list NEXT gt Moves the cursor previous gas entry in list INS Inserts a new gas entry into the list DEL Deletes the gt gt gt gt gt ENTR Accepts the new setting and returns to the previous menu EXIT Ignores the new setting and returns to the previous menu SETUP X X HESSEN VARIATION TYPE 1 SET gt EXIT SETUP gt HESSEN RESPONSE MODE CMD EXIT SETUP X X SET EDIT HESSEN GAS LIST SETUP X X NEXT INS EDIT SO2 111 REPORTED SETUP X X NEXT JENIR EXIT GAS 502 qo SETUP X X GAS 111 0 0 0 ENTR EXIT SETUP X X ON REPORTED ON ENTR EXIT L ENTR key accepts the new settings EXIT key ignores the new settings 05496 Rev A6 Operating Instructions TML87 Instruction Manual 6 12 4 7 Setting Hessen Protocol Status Flags Teledyne Instruments implementation of Hessen protocols includes a set of status bits that the instrument includes in responses to inform the host computer of its condition Each bit can be assigned to one operational and warning message flag The default settings for these bit flags are Table 6 29 Default Hesse
140. the appropriate SO switching valves and software several gas measurement modes are available The instrument can be set to measure H2S SO or cycle between both gases see Section 10 3 2 To select one of these three measurement modes press SAMPLE RANGE 500 0 PPB lt TST 5 gt CAL SAMPLE ENTER SETUP PASS 818 ENTR SETUP X X PRI MARY SETUP MENU CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE SECONDARY SETUP MENU COMM VARS DIAG EXIT SETUP X X 0 MEASURE MODE H2S JUMP EDIT PRNT EXIT EXIT ignores the new setting H2S mode is the SETUP X X MEASURE MODE H2S default mode for the ENTR accepts the TML87 PREV new setting Press the PREV and NEXT buttons SETUP MEASURE MODE H2S SO2 to move back and forth between gas FREY NEXT modes SETUP X X MEASURE MODE SD2 NEXT 68 05496 Rev A6 87 Instruction Manual Operating Instructions 6 9 SETUP DIAG Using the Diagnostics Functions A series of diagnostic tools is grouped together under the SETUP MORE DIAG menu As these parameters are dependent on firmware revision see Menu Tree A 5 in Appendix A The individual parameters however are explained in more detail in the following section indicated in Table 6 7 These tools can be used in a variety of troubleshooting and diagnostic procedures and are referred to in many places of the maintenance and trouble shooting sections Table 6 7 87 Diagnostic DIAG Functions FRONT PANEL
141. them very susceptible to damage from the discharge of static electricity Controlling electrostatic discharge begins with understanding how electro static charges occur in the first place Static electricity is the result of something called triboelectric charging which happens whenever the atoms of the surface layers of two materials rub against each other As the atoms of the two surfaces move together and separate some electrons from one surface are retained by the other Materials Materials Makes Separate Contact e PROTONS 3 PROTONS 3 8 PROTONS PROTONS 3 ELECTRONS 3 ELECTRONS 3 TRONS ELECTRONS 4 TUNI NET CHARGE 0 NET CHARGE 0 CHARGE 1 NET CHARGE 1 Figure 12 1 Triboelectric Charging If one of the surfaces is a poor conductor or even a good conductor that is not grounded the resulting positive or negative charge cannot bleed off and becomes trapped in place or static The most common example of triboelectric charging happens when someone wearing leather or rubber soled shoes walks across a nylon carpet or linoleum tiled floor With each step electrons change places and the resulting electro static charge builds up quickly reaching significant levels Pushing an epoxy printed circuit board across a workbench using a plastic handled screwdriver or even the constant jostling of Styrofoam pellets during shipment can also build hefty static charges 0549
142. through hole is side between Cold Block of Cold Block and Heat Sink Figure 10 14 PMT Assembly A typical PMT is a vacuum tube containing a variety of specially designed electrodes Photons from the reaction are filtered by an optical high pass filter enter the PMT and strike a negatively charged photo cathode causing it to emit electrons A high voltage potential across these focusing electrodes directs the electrons toward an array of high voltage dynodes The dynodes in this electron multiplier array are designed so that each stage multiplies the number of emitted electrons by emitting multiple new electrons The greatly increased number of electrons emitted from one end of electron multiplier is collected by a positively charged anode at the other end which creates a useable current signal This current signal is amplified by the preamplifier board and then reported to the motherboard 204 05496 Rev A6 87 Instruction Manual Theory Of Operation Current Flow E Photocathode Dynode Focusinq Electrode Electron Multiplier Figure 10 15 Basic PMT Design A significant performance characteristic of the PMT is the voltage potential across the electron multiplier The higher the voltage the greater is the number of electrons emitted from each dynode of the electron multiplier making the PMT more sensitive and responsive to small variations in light intensity but also more noisy dark noise The gain voltage o
143. to be recalibrated 05496 Rev A6 201 Theory Of Operation TML87 Instruction Manual 10 4 2 Sensor Module amp Sample chamber Electronically the TML87 sensor module is a group of components that create the UV light that initiates the fluorescence reaction between SO and O sense the intensity of that fluorescence and generate various electronic signals needed by the analyzer to determine the SO concentration of the sample gas and sense and control key environmental conditions such as the temperature of the sample gas and the PMT SAMPLE CHAMBER SS UV Lamp Lamp Shutter Housing Reaction Cell PMT Preamp PCA Sample Gas Outlet Sample Gas Inlet Reference Detector PMT Cooling System PMT HOUSING Figure 10 12 TML87 Sensor Module These components are divided into two significant subassemblies the sample chamber and the PMT assembly e Figure 10 13 shows an exploded view of the sample chamber assembly e Figure 10 14 shows an exploded view of the PMT Assembly 10 4 2 1 Sample Chamber The main electronic components of the sample chamber are the reference detector see Section 10 2 2 of the TML87 Manual the UV Lamp see Section 10 2 1 of the TML87 Manual and its electronically operated shutter and the sample chamber heating circuit 202 05496 Rev A6 87 Instruction Manual Theory Of Operation UV Source Lamp Shutter Housing UV Source Lens amp Housin 3 PMT Lens amp Sample
144. to indicate that the control circuit is receiving power TEC Control Test Points Four test points are also located at the top of this assembly They are numbered left to right starting with the point immediately to the right of the power status LED See Section 11 5 13 for more information 10 4 6 PMT Preamplifier The PMT preamplifier board amplifies the PMT signal into a useable analog voltage PMT that can be processed by the motherboard into a digital signal to be used by the CPU to calculate the H2S concentration of the gas in the sample chamber The output signal of the PMT is controlled by two different adjustments First the voltage across the electron multiplier array of the PMT is adjusted with a set of two hexadecimal switches Adjusting this voltage directly affects the HVPS voltage and hence the signal from the PMT Secondly the gain of the amplified signal can further be adjusted through a potentiometer These adjustments should only be performed when encountering 206 05496 Rev A6 87 Instruction Manual Theory Of Operation problems with the software calibration that cannot be rectified otherwise See Section 11 6 3 for this hardware calibration O Test Control From CPU PMT Preamp PCA O Test Generator PMT Coarse PMT Fine Gain Set Gain Set Rotary Rotary Switch Switch D A Converter Amp to Voltage Converter Amplifier Low Pass Noise Filter E Test Control From CPU
145. tube with a clean anti static wipe and DO NOT TOUCH it after cleaning If the cold block or TEC is to be changed disconnect the TEC driver board from the preamplifier board Remove the cooler fan duct 4 screws on its side including the driver board Disconnect the driver board from the TEC and set the sub assembly aside e Remove the end plate with the cooling fins 4 screws and slide out the PMT cold block assembly which contains the TEC e Unscrew the TEC from the cooling fins and the cold block and replace it with a new unit Re assemble the TEC subassembly in reverse order CAUTION The thermo electric cooler needs to be mounted flat to the heat sink If there is any significant gap the TEC might burn out Make sure to apply heat sink paste before mounting it and tighten the screws evenly and cross wise 12 13 14 15 16 sure to use thermal grease between and cooling fins as well as between TEC and cold block e Align the side opening in the cold block with the hole in the PMT housing where the sample chamber attaches e Evenly tighten the long mounting screws for good thermal conductivity Re insert the TEC subassembly Make sure that the O ring is placed properly and the assembly is tightened evenly Re insert the PMT HVPS subassembly Don t forget the gasket between HVPS and PMT Use new plastic screws to mount the PMT assembly on the PMT cold block Insert the
146. types such as data channel names which may contain letters and numbers They consist of a quotation mark followed by one or more printable characters including spaces letters numbers and symbols and a final quotation mark For example 1 123abc and are all valid text strings It is not possible to include a quotation mark character within a text string e Some commands allow you to access variables messages and other items such as iDAS data channels by name When using these commands you must type the entire name of the item you cannot abbreviate any names 6 12 2 5 Status Reporting Reporting of status messages as an audit trail is one of the three principal uses for the RS 232 interface the other two being the command line interface for controlling the instrument and the download of data in electronic format You can effectively disable the reporting feature by setting the interface to quiet mode Section 6 10 8 Table 6 18 Status reports include iDAS data when reporting is enabled warning messages calibration and diagnostic status messages Refer to Appendix A 3 for a list of the possible messages and this section for information on controlling the instrument through the RS 232 interface General Message Format All messages from the instrument including those in response to a command line request are in the format X DDD HH MM Id MESSAGE lt CRLF gt Where X is a command type designator
147. via the front panel as the test function LMP The PMT offset is stored as and viewable via the front panel as the test function DRK PMT 05496 Rev A6 189 Theory Of Operation TML87 Instruction Manual 10 2 5 Optical Filters The TML87 analyzer uses two stages of optical filters to enhance performance The first stage conditions the UV light used to excite the SO by removing frequencies of light that are not needed to produce SO The second stage protects the PMT detector from reacting to light not produced by the SO returning to its ground state 10 2 5 1 UV Source Optical Filter Zinc vapor lamps generate light at other wavelengths beside the 214nm required for the SO SO transformation including a relatively bright light of the same wavelength at which SO fluoresces as it returns to its SO ground state 330 nm In fact the intensity of the light emitted by the UV lamp at 330nm is so bright nearly five orders of magnitude brighter than that resulting from the SO decay it would drown out the SO fluorescence BEFORE AFTER UV SOURCE OPTICAL FILTER BANDWI DTH MW 1 I E 101 9 2 1 a LAMP OUTPUT Arbitrary Untis LAMP OUTPUT Arbitrary Untis 101 M A E TAE SEA gm SO FLUORESCENT SPECTRUM WAVELENGTH nm WAVELENGTH nm Figure 10 4 Excitation Lamp UV Spectrum Before After Filtration To solve this problem t
148. you wish to utilize either of the analyzer s two serial interfaces refer to Section 6 10 and 6 12 of this manual for instructions on configuration and usage 3 1 1 5 Connecting to a LAN or the Internet If your unit has a Teledyne Instruments Ethernet card Option 63 plug one end of the 7 CAT5 cable supplied with the option into the appropriate place on the back of the analyzer see Figure 5 6 in Section 5 6 3 and the other end into any nearby Ethernet access port 05496 Rev A6 15 Getting Started TML87 Instruction Manual 3 1 1 6 Connecting to a LAN or the Internet If your unit has a Teledyne Instruments RS 232 Multidrop card Option 62 see section 6 10 7 for instructions on setting it up 3 1 2 Pneumatic Connections CAUTION To prevent dust from getting into the analyzer it was shipped with small plugs inserted into each of the pneumatic fittings on the rear panel Make sure that all dust plugs are removed before attaching exhaust and supply gas lines Sample and calibration gases should only come into contact with PTFE Teflon or glass materials They should not come in contact with FEP or stainless steel materials Figure 3 6 and Figure 3 7 show the most common configurations for gas supply and exhaust lines to the TML87 Analyzer Figure 3 8 shows the connections for units with valve options installed Please refer to Figure 3 2 for pneumatic connections at the rear panel and Table 3 4 for nomenclature
149. zero air generator Model 701 and a gas dilution calibrator Model 700 for this purpose What do do if the concentration on the instrument s front panel display does not match the value recorded or displayed on my data logger even if both instruments are properly calibrated A This most commonly occurs for one or both of the following reasons 1 a difference in circuit ground between the analyzer the data logger or 2 a scale problem with the input to the data logger The analog outputs of the analyzer can be manually calibrated to compensate for either or both of these effects see Section 6 9 4 2 amp 6 9 4 3 Q How do measure the sample flow A Sample flow is measured by attaching a calibrated flow meter to the sample inlet port when the instrument is operating The sample flow should be 600 75 cm min Section 11 5 2 includes detailed instructions on performing a check of the sample gas flow Q How often do need to change the particulate filter A Once per week Table 9 2 contains a maintenance schedule listing the most important regular maintenance tasks 05496 Rev A6 31 Frequently Asked Questions amp Glossary TML87 Instruction Manual Q How long does the sample pump last A The sample pump should last about one year and the pump head should to be replaced annually or when necessary Use the RCEL pressure indicator on the front panel to see if the pump needs replacement If this value falls below 10 i
150. 0 PCA ANALOG OUTPUTISOLATOR ESERIES 3 046250000 55 RXCELL HEATER FUSE TML50 87 02 046260000 ASSY THERMISTOR RXCELL TML50 67 3 046860000 55 SWITCHING VALVE 118140202 046880000 55 502 SCRUBBER PTFE CART TML87 CCC 047400100 MANUAL OPERATION TML87 1402 4 047520100 DISK ON CHIP SOFTWARE TML87 10 3 048620200 PCA SERIAL INTERFACE w MD ESERIES 03 048830000 KIT EXP EXHAUST CLNSR SILCA GEL o o o 1 O 049310100 CONTROL ESERIES 03 j PUMP INT E SERIES 115 240V 2 050630100 TML50 UV REF DETECTOR WOPT20 03 WPOPP FO MP CPP WIC W O OW O WP WW W W o COo o Go ro Co Oo Oo ro 2 ro Co PO TML87SP RevP Page 2 of 4 TML 87 INDIVIDUAL SPARE PARTS LIST Part Number 051990000 ASSY SCRUBBER INLINE EXHAUST DISPOS 2 iHWo000005 JFOOT CHASSIS 0 3 HW0000030 ISOLATOR SENSORASSY 83 HW0000031 FERRULE SHOCKMOUNT gt 1 S 3 O IHWo0000036 TFE TAPE 1 4 48 FT ROLL 1000095__ REPLACEMENT COOLER KIT 5041 8 3 000227 TML87RELAYRETROFIT 14 3 KIT SPARE PS37 E SERIES 3 O 000254 SUPPLY SWITCHING 12V 60W 3 2 000031 WINDOW QUARTZ REFDETECTOR 1422 ORO000001 ORING FLOW CONTROUIZS 1421
151. 0000pF 10000pF T 10000pF m l EL Z 19 CSDACA Y 8 ESEBEERS 2 E 18 CSRANGEI PRECISION DUAL 88889889 0 15 uF ceramic 2 U36A OP AMP PRECISION Bub DUAL DAC Al c DUAL DAC A2 8 DAC 12 BIT TI 3 15V 10k 1 SOCKET U33 CI2 0 15 uF ceramic AN 0 15 uF ceramic OP AMP PRECISION QUAD V SV OP AMP PRECISION QUAD OP AMP PRECISION QUAD usc O VCC 4 0 15 uF ceramic 0 15 uF ceramic CIF 0 15 uF ceramic 0 15 uF ceramic OP AMP PRECISION QUAD 8 POT DIGITAL OP AMP PRECISION QUAD Title Schema ic for E Series Mo herboard PCA 05702 OP AMP PRECISION QUAD Number Revision D7 and D8 05703 A Must be located ithin 1 of U32 amp U34 within 1 of U3 Shet Gi 8 01 Orcad B Date 102060 File N PcomgAUNREL 05701 E mo herboard vi a 4 I00Kx8 15V 15V ANALOG INPUTS C55 0 15 uF ceramic 0 15 uF ceramic 10 uF 35V TANTALUM OP AMP PRECISION pi aT 6 give a live 0 for sensors with 0 or slightly negative output 1M 196 1206 CHIP 12 C45 10 uF 35 TANTALUM 0 15 uF ceramic 1 2 uF 63V ceramic C49 e 1 xi TN R47 and R48 reduce the gain for PLACE 100 OHM MHZ analog inputs by 1 so that we
152. 02 Number rd Orcad B 10 Jun 2006 Shet of 8 N Pcbmgr UNREL 05701 E motherboard ee AUX DC T LED RED smt 1206 TX for Com 49K 5 LED smt 1206 TX for Com2 LED GRN smt 1206 RX for Com 49K 596 122 RB 22K 5 VCCO NOT INSTALLED RIO NOT INSTALLED a LED RED smt 1206 RX for Com2 TPI3 4 TPIS 6 7 TPIS S NES do 312V 412VRET 45V A A D9 amp R35 must be within 1 of J15 15V Jg 7 Com2 RS232 B RS485 J1013 Coml RS232 A SW PUSHBUTTON4PDT MT6 7 8 MT9 MOUNTING HOLE MOUNTING HOLE MOUNTING HOLE MOUNTING HOLE MTI 2 MOUNTING HOLE MOUNTING HOLE MOUNTING HOLE MOUNTING HOLE 10 uF 35V TANTALUM Cl C2 10 uF 35V TANTALUM Schema ic for E Series Mo herboard PCA 05702 Size Number Revision Orcad B 5 Date 10 Jun 2006 Sheet 2f 8 File N Pcbmegr UNREL 05701 E motherboard 2105701 DDB 15 lt co TP21 i C U29A a 015 ceramic DAC RANGE amp OFFSET PROGRAM 3 OP AMP PRECISION DUAL le 1 x7 3 R63 iens Suri l cn t cis 10k 110000 pF 10000 pF 10000 pF 10000 I E 6 0 15 uF ceramic U29B 0 15 uF ceramic HE U30 5 AU T4HCS74 5 oc E L zi se 221 TF 1
153. 1 lt 2 b TP2 TP4 TPS 6 TP7 VCC 7 DGND 5V AGND 15V 15V 128 12V DC PWR IN KEYBRD MTHR BRD SYNC DEMOD SPARE Exp ede i pis o d ste ass i J5 J7 J8 9 J10 Jl 1 J12 B CAC 10 3 02 CE MARK LINE VOLTAGE TRACE SPACING FIX i DGND zl Li am 1 m 2 KGND e e e e e 3 e e e os 5 9 5 4 lt a La AGND c 5 a c c c 2 I 5V 0 0 Su e 6 s 7 HIKI 5 c c a a Title 8 V 8 ZS 0 8 0 8 lt 6 TML41 50 60 87 Relay PCB m 10 Size Number 03956 Revision A CONIO THRQUGH CONIOTHROUGH CONIOTHROUGH CONIOTHROUGH CONIOTHROUGH CONIOTHROUGH B CONIOTHROUGH APPLES torceosssa Date 30 Jun 2004 Sheettof 3 3 File NAPCBMGRWRELEASED 03954cc PRAXEEB3O3954a ddb 1 2 3 4 5 6 3 4 5 6 AC Line J20 1 2 Aux Relay Connector 4 5 6 MOLEX6 Neutral DC 3 g 4 D16 GRN NL Fw TRI IO3 6 1010 DL 12V J6 1013 1 EM U6 1 y 16 INA OUT4 1 2 Valve4 SN74HC04 IN3 5 3 lt VLV_ENAB ENABLE OUT 3 4 SE U3D n 2 Valves 7 9 208 6 d d d l 8 Valve7 2 S UDN2540B 16 10 U3B e U3E CONIO 1014 3 4 11 10 VCCo U3C U3F 5 ee 6 IO15 12 C13 o1 5 NIFIT 2 Q2 IRL3303 Use 50
154. 1 Location of Shipping Screws 10 05496 Rev A6 TML87 Instruction Manual Getting Started VENTILATION CLEARANCE Whether the analyzer is set up on bench or installed into an instrument rack be sure to leave sufficient ventilation clearance AREA MINIMUM REQUIRED CLEARANCE Back of the instrument 10 cm 4 inches Sides of the instrument 2 5 cm 1 inch Above and below the instrument 2 5 cm 1 inch e Various rack mount kits are available for this analyzer See Chapter 5 of this manual for more information 3 1 1 Electrical Connections CAUTION Check the voltage and frequency label on the rear panel of the instrument See Figure 3 2 for compatibility with the local power before plugging the 87 into line power Do not plug in the power cord if the voltage or frequency is incorrect CAUTION Power connection must have functioning ground connection Do not defeat the ground wire on power plug Turn off analyzer power before disconnecting or connecting electrical subassemblies Do not operate with cover off 05496 Rev A6 11 Getting Started TML87 Instruction Manual CONTROL IN gom qme nomm pump pum rump ree ese Se pues arma ume peut quee qmm gem cen Figure 3 2 Rear Panel Layout 3 1 1 1 Connecting the Analog Outputs Attach a stri
155. 1 Im be high for display to DEFAULT ADDRESS SELECTS FOR 12C TO PARALLEL be powered km 35 DISP 5 LANG SWITCH DECODERS vec RN2 lt ADRS SLCTS 3 14 D X 5 KEYBOARD 0 2 1500uF 3 4 111 DISPLAY ONTROL 3M 2514 6002UB oe I DISPL CONTROL DISP CN A0 A1 05 a 443DV 011 OR KS DISP CN AO 1 3 4 DISP_WR T GND 5 DISP 8 KYBRD INT E DISP NAL 2 40 HE DISP BUSY DISP PWR OVR TP2 TP3 TP4 5 DISP_CN_A2 3 A2 P2 6 DISP_PWR_E oa od SDA KYBRD INT NOTES 2 7 MAINT LED MICPI2OT 4 OM 5 DISP 1 This schematic is based on SCL 14 oy 319 A e DISP PWR DISP RET BUSY SCL the PWB PN 03974 and SDA TERSA ps 0 Vdd RST MMBT3904 TP6 a TP7 fe TPS q TP9 D applies to PCA PN 03975 P6 a U6 E Q2 DISP PWR DISP_RET DISEBUSY Scr S Lm IK LB S 45 DISP INT lt 485V DICT q qe w 2 045 A EJ 1 6 SCL 1 6 SCL DISP RET m SPR I O 1 15 56 2 7 KYBRD INT DISP 2 7 KYBRD INT EROS SPR 2 2 c10 c14 6 Ss gt DISP RET Ss gt DISP RET SDA 5 10 SDA 5 TA 220pF 220pF 220pF 100uF uF uF Title 1 12 DISP RET Schematic for 04258 04257 Keyboard Display Interface for E series HH B Size Number 04259 Revision B a Date 21 Mar 2002 Sheet of File N2YHWorkW300B keyboard 0425721042594 ddBrawn By 1 2 3 4 5 6
156. 169 EPA Protocol Calibration TML87 Instruction Manual User Notes 170 05496 Rev A6 TML87 Instruction Manual Instrument Maintenance 9 0 INSTRUMENT MAINTENANCE Predictive diagnostic functions including data acquisition failure warnings and alarms built into the analyzer allow the user to determine when repairs are necessary without performing unnecessary preventative maintenance procedures There is however a minimal number of simple procedures that when performed regularly will ensure that the analyzer continues to operate accurately and reliably over its lifetime Repair and troubleshooting procedures are covered in Chapter 9 and Chapter 11 of this manual 9 1 Maintenance Schedule Table 9 1 shows a typical maintenance schedule for the analyzer Please note that in certain environments i e dusty very high ambient pollutant levels some maintenance procedures may need to be performed more often than shown CAUTION Risk of electrical shock Disconnect power before performing any operations that require entry into the interior of the analyzer NOTE The operations outlined in this chapter must be performed by qualified maintenance personnel only 05496 Rev A6 171 Instrument Maintenance TML87 Instruction Manual Table 9 1 TML87 Preventative Maintenance Schedule CAL MANUAL ITEM ACTION FREQUENCY CHECK SECTION
157. 2 SET SET VARI ATI ON RESPONSE MODE GAS LIST STATUS FLAGS TYPE 1 mee IN MANUAL CALI BRATION MODE IN ZERO CALIBRATION MODE IN SPAN CALIBRATION MODE ae eee UGM MGM PREV NEXT INS DEL EDIT PRNT T a Flag Assignments PPM available gases see Section 6 12 4 6 CAE Miis Set Hessen ID number for selected gas type H S 112 REPORTED REPORTED ae section E 1 Only appears if a valve is installed 2 Only appears when the HESSEN mode is enabled for either COM1 or 2 SO2 111 REPORTED Figure A 7 Secondary Setup Menu HESSEN Submenu 05492 Rev C A 9 APPENDI X A 1 TML87 Software Menu Trees Revision TML87 Instruction Manual SAMPLE SIGNAL m PREV NEXT 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 27 29 30 31 32 4 56 PASS DI AG COMM VARS PREV NEXT ANALOG ANALOG I O OPTIC ELECTRICAL LAMP PRESSURE FLOW TEST OUTPUT CONFIGURATION TEST TEST CALIBRATION CALIBRATION CALIBRATION CHANNEL L L ENTR ENTR ENTR ENTR ENTR ENTR Pape Start step Test Starts Test Starts Test Starts Test Starts Test Starts Test EXT ZERO CAL EXT SPAN CAL MAINT MODE LANG2 SELECT NONE PMT READI NG SAMPLE LED SET SET UV READING CAL LED S
158. 2 1080000084 JORING UV FILTER gt 14 1 PUO000022 KIT PUMPREBUILD 14 4 RLO000015 JRELAY GORDOS 1 1 2 5 0000051 SWITCH POWER CIRCBR 03 SPARE PARTS FOR ANALYZER OPTIONS ARE ON FOLLOWING PAGE S TML87SP RevP Page 3 of 4 INDEX OF OPTIONS FOR 87 Description Current Loop Analog Output Zero Air Scrubber Maintenance Kit Zero Span Valves IZS Generator TML 87 INDIVIDUAL OPTIONS SPARE PARTS LIST Option PartNumber Description T Leve 41 KITO00219 PCA 4 20MA OUTPUT E SERIES _ 3 Levels marked with an R are TML recommended parts to have on hand for typical repairs and maintenance Level 1 General maintenance supplies and expendables such as filters O rings lamps etc Level 2 Critical items that are known from experience to have a higher failure rate such as pumps heaters converters valves and circuit boards Level 3 Other miscellaneous items not included in Level 1 or 2 This level includes other spare parts that are not expected to fail over a given time frame TML87SP RevP Page 4 of 4 Warranty Repair E S TELEDYNE Questionnaire MONITOR LABS TMLS87 A Teledyne Technologies Company Company Contact Name Phone Number Fax Number Email Site Address Can we connect to the instrument If so provide IP address or modem TML87 Serial Number
159. 2 CN3 COM1 RS 232 CN5 2 RS 485 POPP DPR C lt M6117C A1 0314 1507 xBU60921000F 34111 gt 431335 1 LA 111 Teo e f eon sx Figure 6 9 CPU card Locations of RS 232 485 Switches Connectors and Jumpers When 2 is configured for RS 485 operation the port uses the same female DB 9 connector on the back of the instrument as when 2 is configured for RS 232 operation however the pin assignments are different 05496 Rev A6 91 Operating Instructions TML87 Instruction Manual Female DB 9 COM2 As seen from outside analyzer RX TX RX TX GND 0000 88 485 Figure 6 10 Back Panel connector Pin Outs for 2 RS 485 mode The signal from this connector is routed from the motherboard via a wiring harness to a 6 pin connector on the CPU card CN5 CN5 Located on CPU card RX TX RX TX GND As seen from inside analyzer Figure 6 11 CPU connector Pin Outs for 2 in RS 485 mode 6 10 5 DTE and DCE Communication RS 232 was developed to allow communications between data terminal equipment DTE and data communication equipment DCE Basic terminals always fall into the DTE category whereas modems are always considered DCE devices The difference between the two is the pin assignment of the Data Receive and Data Transmit functions e DTE devices receive data on pin 2 and transmit data on pin 3 e DCE devi
160. 2 SPAN1 Conc 0 1 50000 Target SO concentration during span calibration of range 1 Conc 0 1 50000 Target SO concentration during span calibration of range 2 502 SLOPEI1 PPB mV 0 25 4 SO slope for range 1 PPB mV 0 25 4 50 slope for range 2 mV SO2 OFFSET1 1500 1500 SO offset for range 1 SO2 OFFSET2 1500 1500 SO offset for range 2 mV span calibration of range 2 0 8 1 2 Converter efficiency factor for H2S TRS for range 1 0 8 1 2 Converter efficiency factor for H2S TRS for range 2 SNGL Range control mode Enclose value in double quotes when setting from the RS 232 interface 0 1 2500 Low pre amp range 0 1 2500 High pre amp range p H2S SLOPE1 PPB mV H2S 5 1 Conc 0 1 50000 Target H5S concentration during span calibration of range 1 H2S OFFSET1 H2S OFFSET2 ped CE FACTOR2 RANGE MODE conc 5 SAMP FLOW SET cc m 700 0 1200 Sample flow set point for flow Warnings calculation and warning limits 350 1200 05492 Rev C A 13 mV PP 30 10 10 5 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 20 500 00 ao C p B B n B CE 500 500 APPENDI X A 2 Setup Variables For Serial O Revision A 3A TML87 Instruction Manual SAMP FLOW SLOPE SAMP PRESS SET 29 92 Warnings 15 35 SAMP PRESS SLOPE 0 5 1 5 Sample flow slope correction factor adjusted flow 2 measured flow x slope Sample press
161. 21 261 12 1 How Static Charges are Created onion eerie Irene ira nee Ede LX e Eg dn eme e Eae dne en Pee 261 12 2 How Electro Static Charges Cause 262 12 3 Common Myths About ESD seen nnne enne 263 12 4 Basic Principles of Static COMtrol 264 124 1 ite P nee ep eee ei Eg e eee eee 264 12 4 2 Basic anti ESD Procedures for Analyzer Repair and Maintenance 265 12 4 2 1 Working at the Instrument Rack siisii rriaire iiaee nren pen te genae sie Eben 266 12 4 2 2 Working at a Anti ESD eene nnne enhn enne nenne nennen nnns 266 12 4 2 3 Transferring Components from Rack To Bench and 267 12 4 2 4 Opening Shipments from Teledyne Instruments Customer 267 12 4 2 5 Packing Components for Return to Teledyne Instruments Customer Service 268 05496 Rev A6 vii List of Figures TML87 Instruction Manual LIST OF FIGURES Figure 3 1 Figure 3 2 Figure 3 3 Figure 3 4 Figure 3 5 Figure 3 6 Figure 3 7 Figure 3 8 Figure 3 9 Figure 3 10 Figure 3 11 Figure 5 1 Figure 5 2 Figure 5 3 Figure 5 4 Figure 5 5 Figure 5 6 Figure 6 1 Figure 6 2 Figure 6 3 Figure 6 4 Figure
162. 237 11 5 8 3 Status OUutpuls ett teo mr een iet 238 11 5 8 4 Control IMPUS ainis ee etc reti erede d ed eene dede 238 e I cM d 238 11 5 10 R 9 232 Communicatlon Perte EO doe ina elie eae 239 11 5 10 1 General RS 232 Troubleshootihg 239 11 5 10 2 Modem or Termirial Operation 1 cree rt En Re RR 239 114 5 11 PMT SENSO Sc 240 11 5 12PMI Preamplifier Board iere Re aee e en EOS Rare uan 240 11 5 13 PMT Temperature Control PCA tesi iee pitch cte nad 240 11 5 14 High Voltage Power terns n sss ss nnne 241 11 5 15 Pneumatic Sensor Assemibly 5 ene e pt e deed de d e eR Hp Ee denen 241 11 5 15 1 Sample PressUre 1 5 ee eei EDS Ie 241 11 5 16175 Ese tue TE 241 11 547 dul toad ent Genes 242 11 5 18 PIT Temperature er reete corre e
163. 3 mer Er e OR sie epe E RE ea e ie e tei 171 9 2 Predictive DidQnOStiCs C 173 9 3 Maintenance Procedures e 174 9 3 1 Changing the Sample Particulate 174 9 3 2 Changing the IZS Permeation 175 9 3 3 Maintaining the SOs Scrubber ed eee eee e e e ti ede rt Er ed een laa epe dpa Er oa 176 9 3 3 1 Predicting When the SO Scrubber Should Be Replaced 2 176 9 3 3 2 Checking the Function of the 02 177 9 3 3 3 Changing the 5 gt Scrubber 177 9 3 4 Changing the External Zero Air 177 9 3 5 Maintaining the 25 gt SO 179 9 3 5 1 Predicting When the Converter Catalyst Should Be 179 9 3 5 2 Checking the Efficiency of the H2S SO eene 179 9 3 5 3 Changing the H2S SO Converter Catalyst 180 9 3 6 Cleaning the Sample chamber ea terne Peer tene ide edes 181 9 3 7 Cleaning or Changing Critical Flow 182 9 3 8 Checking for Light Leaks 1 iret eer eet eoe tee er gre vea ee aded pev qu
164. 5 0 05 05496 Rev A6 235 TROUBLESHOOTING amp REPAIR TML87 Instruction Manual 11 5 5 Bus Operation of the 1 bus can be verified by observing the behavior of the LED labeled D1 on the relay board in conjunction with the performance of the front panel display Assuming that the DC power supplies are operating properly and the wiring from the motherboard to the keyboard as well as from the keyboard to the relay board is intact the IC bus is operating properly if D1 on the relay board is flashing or e D1 is not flashing but pressing a key on the front panel results in a change to the display If the display is locked up or if the analyzer is not booting up at all the 2 bus may be the cause Contact customer service if you suspect a problem with the 2 bus 11 5 6 Keyboard Display Interface The front panel keyboard the display and the keyboard display circuit board can be verified by observing the operation of the display when power is applied to the instrument and when a key is pressed on the front panel Assuming that there are no wiring problems and that the DC power supplies are operating properly e The vacuum fluorescent display is working properly if on power up a character is visible on the upper left hand corner of the display e If the analyzer starts operation with a normal display but pressing a key on the front panel does not change the display then there are
165. 6 Rev A6 261 A Primer Electro Static Discharge TML87 Instruction Manual 12 2 How Electro Static Charges Cause Damage Table 12 1 Static Generation Voltages for Typical Activities MEANS OF GENERATION 65 90 RH 10 25 RH Walking across nylon carpet 1 500V 35 000V Walking across vinyl tile 250V 12 000V Worker at bench 100V 6 000V Poly bag picked up from bench 1 200V 20 000V Moving around in a chair padded 1 500V 18 000 with urethane foam Damage to components occurs when these static charges come into contact with an electronic device Current flows as the charge moves along the conductive circuitry of the device and the typically very high voltage levels of the charge overheat the delicate traces of the integrated circuits melting them or even vaporizing parts of them When examined by microscope the damage caused by electro static discharge looks a lot like tiny bomb craters littered across the landscape of the component s circuitry A quick comparison of the values in Table 12 1 with those shown in the Table 12 2 listing device susceptibility levels shows why Semiconductor Reliability News estimates that approximately 6096 of device failures are the result of damage due to electro static discharge Table 12 2 Sensitivity of Electronic Devices to Damage by ESD DAMAGE SUSCEPTIBILITY VOLTAGE DEVICE RANGE DAMAGE BEGINS CATASTROPHIC OCCURRING AT DAMAGE A
166. 818 8 1 8 ENTR SETUP X X PRI MARY SETUP MENU SETUP COMMUNICATIONS MENU CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE ID COM2 Toggle these keys to cycle through the available character set ENTR key accepts the new settings F EXIT key ignores the new settings SETUP X MACHINE ID 100 ID ENTR EXIT The ID can be any 4 digit number and can also be used to identify analyzers in any number of ways e g location numbers company asset number etc 88 05496 Rev A6 87 Instruction Manual Operating Instructions 6 10 2 COM Port Default Settings As received from the factory the analyzer is set up to emulate a DCE or modem with pin 3 of the DB 9 connector designated for receiving data and pin 2 designated for sending data e COM1 5 232 fixed DB 9 male connector o Baud rate 19200 bits per second baud o Data Bits 8 data bits with 1 stop bit o Parity None e COM2 RS 232 configurable DB 9 female connector o Baud rate 115000 bits per second baud o Data Bits 8 data bits with 1 stop bit o Parity None CAUTION Cables that appear to be compatible because of matching connectors may incorporate internal wiring that makes the link inoperable Check cables acquired from sources other than Teledyne Instruments for pin assignments before using 6 10 3 RS 232 COM Port Cable Connections In its default configuration the TML87 analyze
167. A option 62 99 RS232 Multidrop PCA Host Analyzer Interconnect Diagram see 101 Default IDAS Gh hannels Setups a adah 109 sensor e com user interface for configuring the 5 122 iDAS Configuration Through a Terminal Emulation 123 Status Output Conniector icri tete ent pe ea DA Ma Lan EA no HR Etna a RR AURA 124 Control Inputs with local 5 V power supply 126 Control Inputs with external 5 V power 126 sensor e com Remote Control Program 133 Setup for Manual Calibration without Z S valve or IZS Option 144 Setup for Manual Calibration with Z S Valve Option Installed 148 Setup for Manual Calibration Check with Z S Valve or IZS 152 Typical Setup for Manual Calibration of TML87 in Multigas Measurement Mode 155 Sample Particulate Filter 175 Zero Air scrubber Assembly Wine d d eite td de ete ae de 178 5 gt SO Converter Assembly e
168. AL SETUP Wait until S02 STB falls below 0 5 ppb This may take several minutes Record the SO reading as SPAN CAL RANGE 500 0 PPB SO X XXX displayed on the instrument s front panel TST 5 gt CONC Press EXIT to Return to the Main SAMPLE Display ACTION Allow Calibration Gas diluted to proper concentration for Midpoint 1 to enter the sample port 8 6 Special Calibration Requirements for Independent Range or Auto Range If Independent Range or Auto Range is selected then it should be calibrated for both Range1 and Range2 separately For zero and span point calibration follow the procedure described in Section 7 2 Repeat the procedure for both the HIGH and LOW Ranges 8 7 References l Environmental Protection Agency Title 40 Code of Federal Regulations Part 50 Appendix A Section 10 3 Quality Assurance Handbook for Air Pollution Measurement Systems Volume II Ambient Air Specific Methods 600 4 77 027 1977 Catalog of NBS Standard Reference Materials NBS Special Publication 260 1975 76 Edition U S Department of Commerce NBS Washington D C June 1975 Tel 301 975 6776 for ordering the catalog 168 05496 Rev A6 TML87 Instruction Manual EPA Protocol Calibration Quality Assurance Handbook for Air Pollution Measurement Systems Volume I Principles EPA 600 9 76 005 March 1976 User Notes 05496 Rev A6
169. AMPLE A Indicates that unit is in SAMPLE mode and AUTOCAL feature is activated SPAN CAL M Unit is performing SPAN calibration initiated manually by the user SPAN CAL R Unit is performing SPAN calibration initiated remotely through the COM ports or digital control inputs ZERO CAL A Unit is performing ZERO calibration procedure initiated automatically by the AUTOCAL feature ZERO CAL M Unit is performing ZERO calibration procedure initiated manually by the user ZERO CAL R Unit is performing ZERO calibration procedure initiated remotely through the COM ports or digital control inputs Only Appears on units with Z S valve or IZS options The revision of the analyzer firmware is displayed following the word SETUP e g SETUP c 4 i SPAN CAL A Unit is performing SPAN calibration initiated automatically by the analyzer s AUTOCAL feature SETUP X i SETUP mode is being used to configure the analyzer The gas measurement will continue during this process Finally the various CAL modes allow calibration of the analyzer Because of its importance this mode is described separately in Chapter 7 6 2 Sample Mode This is the analyzer s standard operating mode In this mode the instrument is analyzing H2S and calculating concentrations 6 2 1 Test Functions A series of test functions is available at the front panel while the analyzer is in SAMPLE mode These parameters provide information about the present operating status of the instru
170. AMPLE PRESSURE FAULT LED AQUTS CALIBRATED CONC OUT 1 TEMP PREAMP RANGE HIGH ST SYSTEM OK CAL CONC OUT 2 PMT TEMP ST CONC VALID TEST OUTPUT ST HIGH RANGE ST ZERO CAL ST SPAN CAL ST DIAG MODE ST LAMP ALARM HVPS VOLTAGE EDIT ST DARK CAL ALARM m ST FLOW ALARM ST PRESS ALARM lt SET SET gt SR TEMP ALARM ST HVPS ALARM ST H2S MODE ST SYSTEM ON2 RELAY WATCHDOG RCELL HEATER CONV HEATEER 1ZS HEATER CAL VALVE SPAN VALVE H2S VALVE DARK SHUTTER x oe er ee a RANGE REC OFFSET AUTO CAL 1 Only relevant to analyzers with IZS options installed CALI BRATED ON ead CAL 1V 5V 10V CURR INTERNAL ANALOG VOLTAGE SIGNALS see Appendix A Figure 8 Secondary Setup Menu DI AG A 10 05492 Rev C TML87 Instruction Manual APPENDI X A 2 Setup Variables For Serial O Revision APPENDIX A 2 Setup Variables For Serial O Revision A 3A Table A 1 187 Setup Variables Revision 4 SETUP VARI ABLE NUMERI C DEFAULT VALUE RANGE DESCRIPTION UNITS VALUE MEASURE_ MODE 502 25 502 Gas measurement mode Enclose 02 25 value in double quotes when setting from the RS 232 interface CAL GAS DEF DEF Selects calibration gas i e valve SO2 position as opposed to slope offset DEF selects default behavior in H2S which valve position and slope offset are the same Enclose value in double quotes
171. ATE2 19200 300 RS 232 COM2 baud rate Enclose 1200 value in double quotes 4 when setting from the RS 232 interface 2400 4800 9600 19200 38400 57600 115200 MODEM 2 Any character in RS 232 COM2 modem initialization the allowed string Sent verbatim plus carriage character set return to modem on power up or Up to 100 manually Enclose value in double characters long quotes 4 when setting from the RS 232 interface Hd 940331 0 999999 RS 232 log on password d MACHINE ID tm 0 9999 Unique ID number for instrument 102 3 COMMAND PROMPT gt Any character RS 232 interface command the allowed prompt Displayed only if enabled character set with RS232_MODE variable Up to 100 Enclose value in double quotes characters long when setting from the RS 232 interface 05492 Rev C A 15 APPENDI X A 2 Setup Variables For Serial O Revision A 3A TML87 Instruction Manual TEST CHAN ID NONE NONE Diagnostic analog output ID Enclose value in double quotes 4 when PMT setting from the RS 232 interface READING UV READING SAMPLE PRESSURE SAMPLE FLOW RCELL TEMP CHASSIS TEMP 125 TEMP PMT TEMP CONV TEMP HVPS VOLTAGE REMOTE_CAL_MODE 502 1 SO2 LOW Gas and range to calibrate during SO2 HIGH contact closure and Hessen calibration Enclose value in double H25 LOW quotes when setting from the H2S HI GH RS 232 interface HOLD DAC ON CAL OFF OFF
172. C is physically attached to a cold block that absorbs heat directly from the PMT and a heat sink that is cooled by moving air see Figure 10 16 A Thermocouple embedded into the cold block generates an analog voltage corresponding to the current temperature of the PMT The PMT Preamp PCA conditions and amplifies this signal then passes it on to the TEC Control PCA 05496 Rev A6 205 Theory Of Operation TML87 Instruction Manual Preamp PCA sends buffered and TEC PCA sets amplified thermistor signal to TEC PCA appropriate drive voltage for cooler TEC PMT Preamp Control PCA PCA ThermoElectric Cooler Thermistor outputs temp of cold block to preamp PCA Heat Sink Cold Block Heat from PMT is absorbed by the cold block and transferred to the heat sink via the TEC then bled off into the cool air stream SS Cooling Fan Figure 10 16 PMT Cooling System 10 4 5 2 TEC Control Board The TEC control printed circuit assembly is located on the sensor housing assembly under the slanted shroud next to the cooling fins and directly above the cooling fan Using the amplified PMT temperature signal from the PMT preamplifier board Section 10 4 6 it sets the drive voltage for the thermoelectric cooler The warmer the PMT gets the more current is passed through the TEC causing it to pump more heat to the heat sink TEC Control Power Status LED A red LED located on the top edge of this assembly glows constantly
173. CONTROL IN on the analyzer s rear panel There are two methods for energizing the control inputs The internal 5V available from the pin labeled is the most convenient method However if full isolation is required an external 5 VDC power supply should be used 14 05496 Rev A6 TML87 Instruction Manual Getting Started CONTROL IN CONTROL IN d CN EE de ZERO CAL SPAN CAL ZERO CAL SPAN CAL 5 VDC Power Supply Local Power Connections External Power Connections Figure 3 5 Control Input Connector Table 3 3 Control Input Signals INPUT STATUS DEFINITION ON CONDITION A The analyzer is placed in Zero Calibration mode The mode field of REMOTE ZERO CAL the display will read ZERO CAL R The analyzer is placed in low span calibration mode as part of performing a low span midpoint calibration The mode field of the GAL display will read LO CAL CDE amp RF SPARE oo V Digital Ground The ground level from the analyzer s internal DC power supplies same as chassis ground External Power input Input pin for 5 VDC required to activate pins A F Internally generated 5V DC power To activate inputs A F place a 5 VDC output jumper between this pin and the 4 pin The maximum amperage through this port is 300 mA combined with the analog output supply if used 3 1 1 4 Connecting the Serial Ports If
174. Firmware revision The serial number can be found on the back of the instrument the firmware revision is displayed in the upper left corner of the display when pressing SETUP on the front panel Example 1 List all front panel error warning messages 2 Please complete the following table Depending on options installed not all test parameters shown below may be available in your instrument RECORDED ACCEPTABLE RECORDED ACCEPTABLE PARAMETER VALUE VALUE PARAMETER VALUE VALUE RANGE ppb ppm 50 ppb 20 ppm SLOPE 1 0 0 3 H2S STB ppb lt 1 ppb with zero H2S OFFS mV lt 250 air SAMP FL cm3 min 600 75 HVPS V 5500 900 PMT signal mV 20 to 150 ETEST mv 2000 1000 with zero air PMT signal at 0 5000 5 mV 2000 1000 span gas conc ppb ppm 0 20 000 ppb NORM PMT at mV 0 5000 RCELL TEMP C 50 1 span gas conc ppb ppm 0 20 000 ppb UV LAMP mV 2 000 to 4 000 BOX TEMP C Ambient 5 STR LGT lt 100 ppb zero PMT TEMP 7 2 50 to 200 125 TEMP 50 3 DARK LAMP mV 50 to 200 3 Has the analyzer been checked for leaks Yes No L For proper flows Yes No L 4 What are the failure symptoms Continue on back if necessary 5 Which tests have you done trying to solve the problem Continue on back if necessary 6 If possible fax a portion of a strip chart or email a data file
175. IAG AIO AOUTS CALIBRATED NO SET SET EDIT EXIT SET SET gt CAL EXIT If AutoCal is ON go to Section 6 7 at the output of the analyzer and or the input of DIAG AIO OUT 1 VOLT S 4500 mV new setting the recording device matches the value in the ENTR accepts the upper right hand corner of the display to the 0100 UP10 UP DOWN DN10 D100 ENTR EXIT new setting EXIT ignores the DIAG AIO CONC OUT 1 CALIBRATED YES SET CAL EXIT 05496 Rev A6 77 Operating Instructions TML87 Instruction Manual 6 9 4 4 Analog Output Offset Adjustment Some analog signal recorders require that the zero signal is significantly different from the baseline of the recorder in order to record slightly negative readings from noise around the zero point This can be achieved in the TML87 by defining a zero offset a small voltage e g 1096 of span which can be added to the signal of individual output channels by activating the ANALOG I O CONFIGURATION MENU see Section 6 9 1 then pressing 4 FROM ANALOG CONFIGURATION MENU DIAG ANALOG I O CONFIGURATION NEXT ENTR EXIT DIAG AIO AOUTS CALIBRATED NO SET SET CAL Press SET gt to select the analog output channel to be configured Then press EDIT to continue DIAG AIO CONC OUT 2 5V CAL SET SET EDIT DIAG AIO CONC OUT 2 RANGE
176. IAG OPTIC RANGE 500 000 PPB 502 lt TST TST gt EXIT Press TST until While the optic test is activated PMT should be DIAG OPTIC 2000 mV 1000 mV SETUP X X SECONDARY SETUP MENU COMM VARS DIAG PMT 2751 MV SO2 X XXX lt TST TST gt EXIT 82 05496 Rev 6 87 Instruction Manual Operating Instructions 6 9 6 Electrical Test The electrical test function creates a current which substitutes the PMT signal and feeds it into the preamplifier board This signal is generated by circuitry on the pre amplifier board itself and tests the filtering and amplification functions of that assembly along with the A D converter on the motherboard It does not test the PMT itself The electrical test should produce a PMT signal of about 2000 1000 mV To activate the electrical test press the following keys SAMPLE RANGE 500 0 PPB SIGNAL I O NEXT JUMP EXIT Press NEXT until lt TST 5 gt CAL SAMPLE ENTER SETUP PASS 818 DIAG ELECTRICAL TEST ENTR EXIT SETUP X X PRIMARY SETUP MENU CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE DIAG ELEC RANGE 500 000 PPB O2 X XXX lt TST TST gt EXIT Press TST until While the electrical test is activated PMT should equal PMT 1732 MV 2000 mV 1000 mV SETUP X X SECONDARY SETUP MENU COMM VARS DIAG SO2 X XXX lt TST TST gt EXIT 05496 Rev
177. INSTRUCTION MANUAL TML87 UV FLOURESCENCE H S ANALYZER Na TELEDYNE MONITOR LABS A Teledyne Technologies Company Y 35 INVERNESS DRIVE EAST ENGLEWOOD CO 80112 USA TOLL FREE SUPPORT 800 846 6062 FAX 303 799 4853 TEL 303 792 3300 E MAIL tml_support teledyne com WEBSITE http www teledyne ml com 047400000 Copyright 2009 REV A13 Teledyne Monitor Labs Inc July 2009 THIS PAGE IS INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK 87 Instruction Manual Safety Messages SAFETY MESSAGES Your safety and the safety of others is very important We have provided many important safety messages in this manual Please read these messages carefully A safety message alerts you to potential hazards that could hurt you or others Each safety message is associated with a safety alert symbol These symbols are found in the manual and inside the instrument The definition of these symbols is described below GENERAL SAFETY HAZARD Refer to the instructions for details on the specific hazard CAUTION Hot Surface Warning TECHNICIAN SYMBOL All operations marked with this symbol are to be performed by qualified maintenance personnel only N CAUTION Electrical Shock Hazard CAUTION The analyzer should only be used for the purpose and in the manner described in this manual If you use the analyzer in a manner other than that for which it was intended unpredictable behavior could ensue wi
178. L87 Instruction Manual 11 3 2 No Response If the instrument shows no response display value is near zero even though sample gas is supplied properly and the instrument seems to perform correctly Confirm response by supplying H2S span gas of about 80 of the range value to the analyzer e Check the sample flow rate for proper value Check for disconnected cables to the sensor module e Carry out an electrical test with the ELECTRICAL TEST procedure in the diagnostics menu see Section 6 9 6 If this test produces a concentration reading the analyzer s electronic signal path is working Carry out an optical test using the OPTIC TEST procedure in the diagnostics menu see Section 6 9 5 If this test results in a concentration signal then the PMT sensor and the electronic signal path are operating properly If the TML87 passes both ETEST and OTEST the instrument is capable of detecting light and processing the signal to produce a reading Therefore the problem must be in the pneumatics optics or the UV lamp lamp driver 11 3 3 Unstable Zero and Span Leaks in the TML87 or in the external gas supply and vacuum systems are the most common source of unstable and non repeatable concentration readings e Check for leaks in the pneumatic systems as described in Section 11 5 1 Consider pneumatic components in the gas delivery system outside the TML87 such as a change in zero air source ambient air leaking into zero air line or a wo
179. L87 is very tolerant of variations in sample gas flow rate and therefore does not suffer from this type of interference 10 2 7 4 Third Body Quenching While the decay of SO to SO happens quickly it is not instantaneous Because it is not instantaneous it is possible for the extra energy possessed by the excited electron of the SO molecule to be given off as kinetic energy during a collision with another molecule This in effect heats the other molecule slightly and allows the excited electron to move into a lower energy orbit without emitting a photon The most significant interferents in this regard are nitrogen oxide NO carbon dioxide CO water vapor H2O and molecular oxygen O2 In ambient applications the quenching effect of these gasses is negligible For stack applications where the concentrations of some or all of these may be very high specific steps MUST be taken to remove them from the sample gas before it enters the analyzer 10 2 7 5 Light Pollution Because TML87 measures light as a means of calculating the amount of SO present obviously stray light can be a significant interfering factor The TML87 removes this interference source in several ways The sample chamber is designed to be completely light tight to light from sources other than the excitation UV source lamp All pneumatic tubing leading into the sample chamber is completely opaque in order to prevent light from being piped into the chamber by the tubi
180. LED and thermistor into the cold bloc Insert new two desiccant bags Carefully replace the end plate 05496 Rev A6 255 TROUBLESHOOTING amp REPAIR TML87 Instruction Manual 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 e Make sure that the O ring is properly in place Improperly placed O rings will cause leaks which in turn cause moisture to condense on the inside of the cooler causing the HVPS to short out Reconnect the cables and the sensor chamber e Be sure to tighten these screws evenly Replace the sensor assembly into the chassis and fasten with three screws and washers Perform a leak check the system Power up the analyzer and verify the basic operation of the analyzer using the ETEST and OTEST features see Section 6 9 5 amp 6 9 6 or by measuring calibrated zero and span gases Allow the instrument to warm up for 60 minutes Perform a PMT Hardware calibration see Section 11 6 3 8 Perform a zero point and span calibration See Chapter 7 11 6 3 8 PMT Hardware Calibration FACTORY CAL The sensor module hardware calibration adjusts the slope of the PMT output when the instrument s slope and offset values are outside of the acceptable range and all other more obvious causes for this problem have been eliminated Connector to TEC control board HVPS Coarse Adjustment HVPS Fine Adjustment Shield Gain Adjustment Configuration Plug Connector to Signals Connector to Power OTEST Adjustment
181. Lens Reference Detector Filtered Fluorescent UV Excitation UV Optical Filter 330 nm Fluorescent PMT Lens MM EM uv Only Focused Fluorescent UV PMT Figure 10 2 UV Light Path 10 2 1 UV Source Lamp The source of excitation UV light for the TML87 is a low pressure zinc vapor lamp An AC voltage heats up and vaporizes zinc contained in the lamp element creating a light producing plasma arc Zinc vapor lamps are preferred over the more common mercury vapor lamps for this application because they produce very strong emission levels at the wavelength required to convert SO to SO 213 9 nm see Figure 10 4 188 05496 Rev A6 87 Instruction Manual Theory Of Operation The lamp used in the TML87 is constructed with a vacuum jacket surrounding a double bore lamp element Figure 10 3 The vacuum jacket isolates the plasma arc from most external temperature fluctuations The jacket also contains the thermal energy created by the lamp s operation thereby helping the lamp heat up to and maintain proper vaporization temperature Light is emitted through a 20 mm x 5 mm portal Vacuum Jacket Light Output Zinc Vapor Plasma Arc Figure 10 3 Source UV Lamp Construction 10 2 2 The Reference Detector A vacuum diode UV detector that converts UV light to a DC current is used to measure the intensity of the excitation UV source lamp Its location directly across from the source la
182. M s Available for Traceability of H2S and SO Calibration Gases 143 Table 7 2 AutoCal Modes uio ed eoe opea 156 Table 7 3 AutoCal Attribute Setup nennen 156 Table 7 4 Example Auto Cal inns 157 Table 7 5 Calibration Data Quality 160 Table 8 1 Activity Matrix for Calibration Equipment amp Supplies 162 Table 8 2 Activity Matrix for Calibration 162 Table 8 3 Activity Matrix cese cede D deci ada c uec ATAA de a d d 164 Table 8 4 Definition of Level 1 and Level 2 Zero and Span 165 Table 9 1 TML87 Preventative Maintenance 5 172 Table 9 2 Predictive Uses for Test Functions 174 x 05496 Rev A6 TML87 Instruction Manual List of Tables Table 10 1 TML87 Multigas Valve 195 Table 10 2 Relay Board Status LED 5 dirae dee Detenido PU ta E sette e Ee uoi es 209 Table 10 3 Panel Status LED S 2 4 04 chaise ree e PH Oder odere LO ee RR es 215 Table 11 1 Warning Messages Indicated 223 Table 11 2 Test Functions Possible Cause
183. Med eot 121 6 11 3 Remote IDAS Config ration e a iaaa de d 122 6 12 Remote Operation of the 124 6 12 1 Remote Operation Using the External Digital 0 124 iR PME ESICUESe cd 124 6 12 12 Control Inp lts 5 itte pe eid tato eoe Ld ipee eue co aceto eee DO ded 125 6 12 2 Remote Operation Using the External Serial 1 sse 127 6 12 2 1 Terminal Operating Modes nee ee eee net ipee Fue c AE A eee 127 6 12 2 2 Help Commands in Terminal 127 6 12 2 3 Command Syl ge e ose 128 0 1224 Data Types s ipie D uei den dite t 128 6 12 2 5 Status Repottllig t ieri rr EU te e 129 6 12 2 6 Remote Access by qe eise encode desee ee 130 6 12 2 7 COM Port Password Security 1 a eei e Ted ea cadre eec dus 131 6 12 2 8 sensor e com Remote Control 132 6 12 3 Additional Communications 133 6 12 4 Using the TML87 with a Hessen Protocol
184. NN reta eor eese Nep Per eR RE 242 11 6 Repair Procedures enne EH pr ete ipei de i pee eee ee shee le 242 11 6 1 Disk on Chip Replacement 2 2 a a duse deg 242 11 6 2 Flash Chip Replacement or 243 11 6 3 Sensor Module Repair amp 243 11 6 3 1 Removing and Reinstalling the Sensor enm enne 244 11 6 3 2 Cleaning the Sample chamber creer trece eren e ned eens e de da a 246 11 6 3 3 Cleaning the PMT Lens amp PMT filter eene nennen 247 11 6 3 4 Replacing the UV filter l ns 2 1 icit teorie iare teste Leite it Le Ded tano Pe SLE id 249 11 6 3 5 Adjusting the UV Lamp Peaking the 250 11 6 3 6 Replacing the irent dr acte Fon Re pode Pepe dene dede e PET Eee 252 11 6 3 7 Replacing the PMT HVPS or TEC 254 11 6 3 8 PMT Hardware Calibration FACTORY 256 11 6 3 9 PMT Hardware Calibration FIELD nennen nennen nnne 258 12 0 A PRIMER ON ELECTRO STATIC 5
185. O Converter Ze The current temperature of the catalytic converter that changes the H2S TEMP Temperature present in the sample gas into 02 TEST Test Signal mV Signal of a user defined test function on output channel A4 TIME Clock Time hh mm ss The current day time for iDAS records and calibration events Shown as they appear when analyzer is in H2S mode In SO mode appear as SO2 STB 502 OFFS amp 502 SLOPE In multigas mode both versions appear Only appears if analog output A4 is actively reporting a test function Only appears if IZS option is installed 05496 Rev A6 49 Operating Instructions TML87 Instruction Manual To view the TEST Functions press the following Key sequence SAMPLE lt TST TST gt CAL Toggle lt TST TST gt keys to scroll through list of functions Only appears if IZS option is installed Only appears if analog output 4 is actively reporting a test function Shown as they appear when analyzer RANGE 500 0 RANGE H2S STB PRES SAMP FL PMT NORM PMT UV LAMP LAMP RATIO STR LGT DARK PMT DARK LAMP H2S SLOPE H2S OFFS HVPS RCELL TEMP BOX TEMP PMT TEMP 125 TEMP TEST TI ME Refer to Section 6 2 1 for definitions of these test functions is in H2S mode In SO mode appear as SO2 STB 502 OFFS amp SO2 SLOPE In multigas mode both versions appear Figure 6 2 6 2 2 Warning Messages View
186. ONC_OUT_2 Same as for CONC_OUT_1 but for analog channel 2 H2S TEST OUTPUT Same as for CONC_OUT_1 but for analog channel 4 TEST AIN CALIBRATED Shows the calibration status YES NO and initiates a calibration of the analog to digital converter circuit on the motherboard To configure the analyzer s four analog outputs set the electronic signal type of each channel and calibrate the outputs This consists of e Selecting an output type voltage or current if an optional current output driver has been installed and the signal level that matches the input requirements of the recording device attached to the channel see Sections 6 9 4 1 e Calibrating the output channel This can be done automatically or manually for each channel see Sections 6 9 4 2 and 6 9 4 3 e Adding a bipolar recorder offset to the signal if required Section 6 9 4 4 In its standard configuration the analyzer s outputs can be set for the following DC voltages Each range is usable from 5 to 5 of the nominal range Table 6 9 Analog Output Voltage Ranges RANGE MINIMUM OUTPUT MAXIMUM OUTPUT 0 0 1 V 5 mV 105 mV 0 1 V 0 05 V 1 05 V 0 5 V 0 25 V 5 25 V 0 10 V 0 5 V 10 5 The default offset for all ranges is 0 VDC 72 05496 Rev A6 87 Instruction Manual Operating Instructions The following DC current output limits apply to the current loop modules Table 6 10 Analog Outpu
187. ORE NUM SAMPLES OFF PARAMETER HVPS MODE AVG PRECISION 4 STORE NUM SAMPLES OFF PARAMETER REFGND MODE AVG PRECISION 4 STORE NUM SAMPLES OFF PARAMETER REF4096 MODE AVG PRECISION 4 STORE NUM SAMPLES OFF Figure 6 14 Default iDAS Channels Setup These default Data Channels can be used as they are or they can be customized from the front panel to fit a specific application They can also be deleted to make room for custom user programmed Data Channels 05496 Rev A6 109 Operating Instructions TML87 Instruction Manual Appendix A 5 lists the firmware specific iDAS configuration in plain text format This text file can either be loaded into sensor e com and then modified and uploaded to the instrument or can be copied and pasted into a terminal program to be sent to the analyzer 6 11 2 1 Viewing iDAS Data and Settings iDAS data and settings can be viewed on the front panel through the following keystroke sequence SAMPLE RANGE 500 0 PPB 25 XXX X VIEW KEYPAD FUNCTIONS lt TST 5 gt CAL FUNCTION SAMPLE ENTER SETUP PASS 818 Moves to the next Parameter ENTR EXIT Moves to the previous Parameter EXIT will return to the Moves the view forward 10 data points channels main SAMPLE Display SETUP X X PRI MARY SETUP MENU NEXT Moves to the next data point channel CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE
188. OTOCOL ON PREV NEXT ENTR EXI Continue pressing the NEXT and PREV keys to select any other modes you which to enable or disable returns to the previous menu ENTR key accepts the new settings EXIT key ignores the new settings 05496 Rev 6 103 Operating Instructions TML87 Instruction Manual 6 10 9 COM Port Baud Rate To select the baud rate of one of the COM Ports press SAMPLE RANGE 500 0 lt TST 5 gt CAL SAMPLE ENTER SETUP PASS 818 SETUP X X PRI MARY SETUP MENU CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE EXIT returns to the previous menu SETUP XX SECONDARY SETUP MENU Select which COM port to configure Press SET until you reach COM1 BAUD RATE Use PREV and NEXT keys to move between available baud rates 300 1200 4800 9600 19200 38400 57600 115200 SETUP X X COMMUNICATIONS MENU ID COM1 COM2 EXIT SETUP X X COM1 MODE 0 SET EDIT EXIT EXAMPLE SETUP X X COM1 BAUD RATE 19200 key ignores the new setting SET SET EDIT SETUP X X COM1 BAUD RATE 19200 ENTR key PREV NEXT ENTR EXIT accepts the new setting SETUP X X COM1 BAUD RATE 9600 NEXT ON ENTR EXIT 104 05496 Rev A6 87 Instruction Manual Operating Instructions 6 10 10 COM Port Testing The serial ports can be tested for correct connection and output in the COMM
189. P analyzer to prompt for the expected H2S span concentration The 5 span concentration values automatically default to 450 0 Conc SAMPLE RANGE 500 0 PPB XXX X To change this value to the actual concentration of the span gas enter the number by pressing the key under each digit until the expected value appears lt TST TST gt ZERO EXIT ignores the new setting The span gas concentration M P CAL H2S SPAN CONC 450 0 Conc and returns to the previous should always be 90 of the display selected reporting range ENTR EXIT ENTR new sging EXAMPLE Reporting range 800 ppb previous display Span gas conc 720 ppb 05496 Rev A6 145 Calibration Procedures TML87 Instruction Manual STEP THREE Perform the zero span calibration SAMPLE RANGE 500 0 PPB 25 TST TST gt CAL SETUP SAMPLE RANGE 500 0 PPB H2S XXX X lt TST TST gt CAL SETUP ACTION Allow zero gas to enter the sample port at the rear of the instrument M P CAL H2S STB X XXX PPB H2S XXX X lt TST TST gt CAL SETUP M P CAL H2S STB X XXX PPB H2S XXX X lt TST TST gt ZERO CONC EXIT M P CAL H2S STB X XXX PPB H2S XXX X lt TST TST gt CONC EXIT Set the Display to show the H2S STB test function This function calculates the stability of the H2S measurement Wait until H2S STB falls below 0 5 ppb
190. Press SET key until SETUP X X CAL HOLD OFF ON SET EDIT PRINT EXIT ENTR accepts the new setting and returns to the previous menu SETUP X X CAL HOLD OFF ON EXIT ignores the new setting and returns to the previous HOLDOFF ON or OFF ON ENTR EXIT menu Toggle key to turn 05496 Rev A6 121 Operating Instructions TML87 Instruction Manual 6 11 3 Remote iDAS Configuration Editing channels parameters and triggering events as described in this section is can be performed via the sensor e com remote control program using the graphic interface shown in Figure 6 15 Refer to the next Section 6 12 for details on remote access to the TML87 analyzer DAS Configuration and Downloaded Data CONCEO 100 Records Maximum NXCNC1 PPM AVG Set 0 0 Records NOCNCI PPM AVG Set 0 0 Records N2CNC1 PPM AVG Set 0 0 Records O STABIL PPM AVG Set 0 0 Records O CALDAT 100 Records Maximum O NXSLP1 AVG Set 0 0 Records NOSLP1 AVG Set 0 0 Records NXZSC1 PPM AVG Set 0 0 Records 0 NOZSCI PPM AVG Set 0 0 Records r Configuration Data Bet Config Auto On Off Send Tio Inst Load Config Graph Data Save Config Save Data i Get Data E N2CNC PPM AVG Set 0 0 Records l C STABIL PPM AVG Set 0 0 Records New Config Basic Advanced E O ENGDAT ATIMER
191. Range X OZONE FLOW OZONE GEN OFF SYNC WARN SOURCE WARN BENCH TEMP WHEEL TEMP SAMPLE TEMP PHOTO TEMP ID machine or internet 100 102 200 300 360 ID Hessen Gas 150 160 141 130 120 05492 Rev C TML87 Instruction Manual APPENDIX B TML87 Spare Paris List APPENDIX B TML87 Spare Parts List NOTE Use of replacement parts other than those supplied by ML may result in non compliance with European standard EN 61010 1 TML87SP Spare Parts List TML87 05493 Rev B Pg B 1 THIS PAGE IS INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK MONITOR LABS A Teledyne Technologies Company TELEDYNE TML87 ANALYZER SPARE PARTS LIST REVISION HISTORY TML87SP RevP Page 1 of 4 TML 87 INDIVIDUAL SPARE PARTS LIST Part Number 1 1 _ 1 Leve 2 002700000 002720000 FILTER PMT OPTICAL 3300NM 14 2 2 003290000 55 THERMISTOR 14083 j 009690000 TFE FLTR ELEMENT 47MM FLO 100 2 009690100 TFE FLTR 47MM FLO 30 1402 011630000 GASKET HVPSINSULATOR r 7 012720000 ASSY CELLADAPTOR 3 013140000 55 COOLER FAN NOX SOX 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 J j 013210000 55 VACUUM MANIFOLD 5 80 1 1 1 1 1 83
192. SET gt EDIT EXIT Toggle keys i to set SETUP X X DELTA TIME 00 00 delay time for each iteration ofthe 0 0 0 ENTR EXIT sequence HH MM Y 0 24 00 SETUP DELTA TIEM 00 30 SET SET EDIT EXIT SETUP DURATION 15 0 MINUTES Toggle keys SET SET EDIT EXIT to set duration for each iteration of SETUP DURATION 15 0MINUTES the p sequence 3 20 ENTR EXIT Set in Decimal Y minutes from SETUP X X DURATION 30 0 MINUTES 01600 SET SET EDIT EXIT I SETUP CALIBRATE OFF lt SET SET gt EDIT EXIT Toggle key SETUP X X CALIBRATE OFF between I Off and ON ENTR EXIT ON SETUP X X CALIBRATE ON lt SET SET gt EDIT EXIT EXIT returns 0 4 SEP 0 3 ENTR EXIT SETUP X X STARTING DATE 04 SEP 03 SET SET EDIT EXIT SETUP STARTING DATE 04 SEP 03 lt SET SET gt EDIT EXIT SETUP STARTING TIME 00 00 lt SET SET gt EDIT EXIT SETUP X X STARTING TIME 00 00 1 4 24 5 ENTR EXIT SETUP SEQ 2 ZERO SPAN 2 00 30 to the SETUP PREV NEXT SET ue EXIT gt Menu Sequence Delta Time MODE Delta Days With dynamic calibration turned on the state of the internal setup variables DYN_SPAN and DYN_ZERO is set to ON and the instrument will reset the slope and offset values for the H2S response each time the AutoCal program runs This continuous re adjustment of calibration parameters can often mask subtle fault conditions in the analy
193. SETUP CFG Primary Setup Menu DAS RANG PASS CLK MORE Secondary Setup Menu COMM VARS DIAG Only appears when warning messages are activated see Section 6 2 2 Press this key to cycle through list of active warning messages Press this key to clear erase the warning message currently displayed Basic Sample Display Menu 05492 Rev C APPENDI X A 1 TML87 Software Menu Trees Revision TML87 Instruction Manual SAMPLE TEST CAL CALZ CALS MSG SETUP Only appear if reporting range TST TST gt is set for LOW HI GH LOW HI GH LOW HI AUTO range RANGE un STABIL PRES ZERO SPAN CONC ZERO SPAN SAMP FL PMT NORM PMT UV LAMP LAMP RATIO Primary Setup Menu STR LGT DRK PMT DRK LAMP SLOPE CFG DAS RANG PASS MORE OFFSET HVPS RCELL TEMP BOX TEMP Secondary Setup Menu PMT TEMP 125 TEMP TEST bes TI ME TEST FUNCTIONS Only appears when warning messages are activate Viewable by user while See Section 6 2 2 COMM WARS BIAG instrument is in SAMPLE Mode Press this key to cycle through list of active warning see Section 6 2 1 messages Press this key to clear erase the warning message currently displayed Figure A 2 Sample Display Menu Units with Z S Valve or 175 Option installed 4 05492 TML87 Instruction Manual APPENDI X A 1 TML87 Software Menu Trees Revision A 3A SETUP
194. SION 4 STORE NUM SAMPLES OFF PARAMETER CONC1 LIST OF CHANNELS NAME CONC EVENT ATIMER REPORT PERIOD 000 00 05 NO OF RECORDS 4032 RS 232 REPORT ON CHANNEL ENABLED ON CAL HOLD OFF ON PARAMETER S2CONC1 MODE AVG PRECISION 1 STORE NUM SAMPLES OFF PARAMETER STABIL MODE AVG PRECISION 2 STORE NUM SAMPLES OFF PARAMETER SMPFLW MODE AVG PRECISION 1 STORE NUM SAMPLES OFF PARAMETER SMPLPRS MODE AVG PRECISION 1 STORE NUM SAMPLES OFF MODE AVG PRECISION 3 STORE NUM SAMPLES OFF PARAMETER S2SLP1 MODE INST PRECISION 3 PARAMETER STABIL STORE NUM SAMPLES OFF MODE NON NAME CALDAT PRECISION 4 EVENT SLPCHG STORE NUM SAMPLES OFF j PARAMETER S20FS1 NO OF RECORDS 200 MODE INST NAME DETAIL RS 232 REPORT OFF PRECISION 1 EVENT ATIMER CHANNEL ENABLED ON STORE NUM SAMPLES OFF REPORT PERIOD 000 01 00 CAL HOLD OFF OFF NO OF RECORDS 480 RS 232 REPORT OFF PARAMETER 5225 1 CHANNEL ENABLED ON MODE INST CAL HOLD OFF OFF PRECISION 1 STORE NUM SAMPLES OFF PARAMETER STRLGT MODE AVG PRECISION 4 STORE NUM SAMPLES OFF PARAMETER RCTEMP MODE AVG PRECISION 2 STORE NUM SAMPLES OFF NAME FAST EVENT ATIMER Same parameters REPORT PERIOD 000 00 01 PARAMETER SMPPRS NO OF RECORDS 360 MODE AVG settings as DETAIL RS 232 REPORT OFF PRECISION 4 CHANNEL ENABLED ON STORE NUM SAMPLES OFF CAL HOLD OFF OFF PARAMETER BOXTEMP MODE AVG PRECISION 4 ST
195. T MOSFET 10 100 VMOS 30 1800 NMOS 60 100 GaAsFET 60 2000 EPROM 100 100 JFET 140 7000 SAW 150 500 Op AMP 190 2500 CMOS 200 3000 Schottky Diodes 300 2500 Film Resistors 300 3000 menm 00 500 500 SCR 500 1000 Schottky TTL 500 2500 262 05496 Rev A6 87 Instruction Manual A Primer on Electro Static Discharge Potentially damaging electro static discharges can occur e Any time a charged surface including the human body discharges to a device Even simple contact of a finger to the leads of a sensitive device or assembly can allow enough discharge to cause damage A similar discharge can occur from a charged conductive object such as a metallic tool or fixture e When static charges accumulated on a sensitive device discharge from the device to another surface such as packaging materials work surfaces machine surfaces or other device In some cases charged device discharges can be the most destructive A typical example of this is the simple act of installing an electronic assembly into the connector or wiring harness of the equipment in which it is to function If the assembly is carrying a static charge as it is connected to ground a discharge will occur e Whenever a sensitive device is moved into the field of an existing electro static field a charge may be induced on the device in effect discharging the field onto the device If the device is then momentarily grounded while wi
196. T p es name NAME see Section oe 2 2 EVENT PARAMETERS jt REPORT PERI opD __ OF RECORDS Sets the RS 232 REPORT amount of time CHANNEL ENABLE between each CAL HOLD report EDIT wa Gs Ane Be SET gt EDIT PRNT Cycles through Selects max already active no of records t PARAMETER SAMPLE MODE PRECISION 0 this channel PREV NEXT INST AVG MIN MAX see Section 6 12 2 4 Figure A 4 Cycles through available active parameters 1 Only appears if Z S valve IZS option is installed Primary Setup Menu iDAS 05492 Rev C TML87 Instruction Manual APPENDI X A 1 TML87 Software Menu Trees Revision A 3A SAMPLE CFG RNGE PASS CLK MORE COMM VARS DI AG a Sh 4 required ID INET 1 COM2 5 5 5 PREV NEXT JUMP EDIT PRINT MEASURE MODE CAL GAS DAS HOLD OFF TPC ENABLE RCELL SET 125 SET DYN ZERO DYN SPAN CONC PRECISION LOCK ADJ SET SET gt EDIT MODE BAUD RATE TEST PORT PREV NEXT PREV NEXT TEST QUI ET 300 COMPUTER Go To SECURI TY 5402 DIAG MENU TREE HESSEN PROTOCOL 150 Fig 8 lt 4 9600 RS 485 MULTI DROP PROTOCOL 19200 ENABLE MODEM 38400 ERROR CHECKI NG 57760 XON XOFF HANDSHAKE HARDWARE HANDSHAKE HARDWARE FI FO COMMAND PROMPT 115200 Only appears if Z S valve 125 option is
197. T gt CAL SETUP CAL FAULT TELEDYNE MONITOR LABS FLUORESCENCE H2S ANALYZER MODEL TML87 KEY DEFINITIONS KEYBOARD ON OFF SWITCH Figure 10 21 TML87 Front Panel Layout 214 05496 Rev A6 87 Instruction Manual Theory Of Operation The most commonly used method for communicating with the TML87 UV Fluorescence H5S Analyzer is via the instrument s front panel which includes a set of three status LEDs a vacuum florescent display and a keyboard with 8 context sensitive keys 10 6 1 1 Analyzer Status LED s Three LEDS are used to inform the user of the instrument s basic operating status Table 10 3 Front Panel Status LED s NAME COLOR STATE DEFINITION SAMPLE Green Off Unit is not operating in sample mode iDAS is disabled On Sample Mode active Front Panel Display being updated iDAS data being stored Blinking Unit is operating in sample mode front panel display being updated iDAS hold off mode is ON iDAS disabled CAL Yellow Off AutoCal disabled On AutoCal enabled Blinking Unit is in calibration mode FAULT Red Off No warnings exist Blinking Warnings exist 10 6 1 2
198. U COMM EXIT SETUP COMMUNICATIONS MENU EXIT 1 dos SET EDIT EXIT SETUP X X COM1 QUIET MODE OFF NEXT ENTR EXIT C Continue pressing next until SETUP COM1 HESSEN PROTOCOL OFF OFF PREV NEXT SETUP X X 1 E 7 1 MODE OFF OFF SETUP X X 1 E 7 1 MODE ENTR EXIT 6 12 4 4 Selecting a Hessen Protocol Type SETUP COM1 HESSEN PROTOCOL ON TM keys activate deactivate selected mode ENTR key accepts the new settings EXIT key ignores the new settings Currently there are two version of Hessen Protocol in use The original implementation referred to as TYPE 1 and a more recently released version TYPE 2 that more flexibility when operating with instruments that can measure more than one type of gas For more specific information about the difference between TYPE 1 and TYPE 2 download the Manual Addendum for Hessen Protocol from the Teledyne Instruments web site http www teledyne ML com To select a Hessen Protocol Type press SAMPLE RANGE 500 0 PPB XXX X TST TST gt CAL SETUP SAMPLE ENTER SETUP PASS 818 8 1 8 ENTR SETUP X X PRIMARY SETUP MENU CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE EXIT SETUP SECONDARY SETUP MENU COMM Press to change protocol type gt SETUP
199. UP SAMPLE ENTER SETUP PASS 818 8 1 8 ENTR SETUP X X COMMUNICATIONS MENU ID HESN COM2 EXIT SETUP X X PRI MARY SETUP MENU CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE EXIT SETUP HESSEN VARIATION TYPE 1 SET EXIT SETUP SECONDARY SETUP MENU ENTR key accepts the new settings CQMM BAIT SETUPX X HESSEN RESPONSE MODE CMD EXIT key ignores the new settings SET gt EDIT EXIT Press to change SETUP HESSEN RESPONSE MODE CMD response mode Bcc TEXT CMD ENTR EXIT 136 05496 Rev 6 TML87 Instruction Manual Operating Instructions 6 12 4 6 Hessen Protocol Gas ID Since the TML87 can be when the proper optional equipment is installed and operating a multigas instrument that measures both H2S and SO both of these gases are listed in the Hessen protocol gas list In its default state the Hessen protocol firmware assigns both gases a Hessen ID number and actively reports both even if the instrument is only measuring one To change or edit these settings press SAMPLE RANGE 500 0 PPB XXX X lt TST TST gt CAL SETUP SAMPLE ENTER SETUP PASS 818 8 1 8 ENTR SETUP X X PRI MARY SETUP MENU CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE EXIT SETUP SECONDARY SETUP MENU ind EXIT SETUP X X COMMUNICATIONS MENU ID HESN COM2 EXIT Use the PREV amp NEXT keys to cycle existing entries in Hessen gas list Use
200. UP DOWN DN10 D100 DIAG AIO CONC OUT 2 ZERO 27 mV U100 UP10 UP DOWN DN10 D100 ENTR EXIT DIAG AIO OUT 2 SPAN 10000 mV U100 UP10 UP DOWN DN10 D100 Increase or decrease the current output by 100 10 or 1 counts The resulting change in output voltage is displayed in the upper line Continue adjustments until the correct current is measured with the current meter DIAG AIO OUT 2 ZERO 9731 mV 0100 UP10 UP DOWN DN10 D100 ENTR EXIT DIAG AIO OUT 2 CALIBRATED YES SET CAL EXIT EXIT ignores the new setting ENTR accepts the new setting If a current meter is not available an alternative method for calibrating the current loop outputs is to connect a 250 1 resistor across the current loop output Using a voltmeter connected across the resistor follow the procedure above but adjust the output to the following values Table 6 13 Current Loop Output Calibration with Resistor FULL SCALE VOLTAGE FOR 2 20 MA VOLTAGE FOR 4 20 MA measured across resistor measured across resistor 096 0 5 V 1 0V 10096 5 0 V 5 0V 80 05496 Rev A6 87 Instruction Manual Operating Instructions 6 9 4 6 AIN Calibration This is the sub menu to conduct the analog input calibration This calibration should only be necessary after major repair such as a replacement of CPU motherboard or power supplies Activ
201. a makes calculations and reports results using specialized firmware developed by Teledyne Instruments It communicates with the user as well as receives data from and issues commands to a variety of peripheral devices through a separate printed circuit assembly to which the CPU is mounted the motherboard The motherboard is directly mounted to the rear panel and collects data performs signal conditioning duties and routes incoming and outgoing signals between the CPU and the analyzer s other major components Concentration data of the TML87 are generated by the photo multiplier tube PMT which produces an analog current signal corresponding to the brightness of the fluorescence reaction in the sample chamber This current signal is amplified to a DC voltage signal front panel test parameter PMT by a PMT preamplifier printed circuit assembly located on top of the sensor housing PMT is converted to digital data by a bi polar analog to digital converter located on the motherboard In addition to the PMT signal a variety of sensors report the physical and operational status of the analyzer s major components again through the signal processing capabilities of the motherboard These status reports are used as data for the H2S concentration calculation e g pressure and temperature reading used by the temperature pressure compensation feature and as trigger events for certain warning messages and control commands issued by the CPU They are sto
202. a single character indicating the message type as shown in the Table 6 25 DDD HH MM is the time stamp the date and time when the message was issued It consists of the Day of year DDD as a number from 1 to 366 the hour of the day HH as a number from 00 to 23 and the minute MM as a number from 00 to 59 ID is the analyzer ID a number with 1 to 4 digits MESSAGE is the message content that may contain warning messages test measurements iDAS reports variable values etc lt CRLF gt is a carriage return line feed pair which terminates the message The uniform nature of the output messages makes it easy for a host computer to parse them into an easy structure Keep in mind that the front panel display does not give any information on the time a message was issued hence it is useful to log such messages for trouble shooting and reference purposes Terminal emulation programs such as HyperTerminal can capture these messages to text files for later review 05496 Rev 6 129 Operating Instructions TML87 Instruction Manual 6 12 2 6 Remote Access by Modem The TML87 can be connected to a modem for remote access This requires a cable between the analyzers COM port and the modem typically a DB 9F to DB 25M cable available from Teledyne Instruments with part number WR0000024 Once the cable has been connected check to make sure the DTE DCE is in the correct position Also make sure the TML87 COM port is set for a b
203. ally re defined using the VARS menu Table 6 6 lists all variables that are available within the 818 password protected level 05496 Rev 6 65 Operating Instructions TML87 Instruction Manual Table 6 6 Variable Names VARS Revision A 1 NO VARIABLE DESCRIPTION ALLOWED VALUES Selects the gas measurement mode in which the instrument is to SO operate SO only H2S only or dual gas measurement of SO and MEASURE MORE H2S simultaneously Dual gas mode requires that a special 502 H28 witching optional be installed see Section 5 5and 6 8 1 H2S Changes the internal data acquisition system iDAS hold off time hich is the duration when data are not stored in the iDAS because Can be between 0 5 DAS HOLD OFF he software considers the data to be questionable That is the case and 20 minutes during warm up or just after the instrument returns from one of its B alibration modes to SAMPLE mode DAS HOLD OFF can be Default 15 min disabled entirely in each iDAS channel TPC ENABLE Enables or disables the temperature and pressure compensation ON OFF TPC feature Sets the sample chamber temperature Increasing or decreasing this emperature will increase or decrease the rate at which SO2 decays 30 C 709 C RCELL SET into SO2 Section 10 1 2 T Do not adjust this setting unless under the direction of Teledyne sp Instruments customer service personnel Sets the IZS option temperature Increasing or decreasing this 30
204. ame as used for calibration Table 8 2 System must be checked out against known standards Locate problem and correct or return to supplier Activity Matrix for Calibration Procedure EQUIPMENT SU FREQUENCY AND METHOD OF ACTION IF REQUIREMENTS ARE NOT Calibration Gases Dilution Gas Multi Point NIST traceable Assayed against an NIST SRM semi annually Sec 2 0 7 Handbook Zero air free of contaminants See Section 2 9 2 Q A Manual Use calibration Perform at least once every quarter Working gas standard is unstable and or measurement method is out of control take corrective action such as obtaining new calibration gas Return to supplier or take appropriate action with generation system Repeat the calibration Calibration procedure in Subsec 2 2 Q A Handbook also Federal Register or anytime a level span check indicates a discrepancy or after maintenance which may affect the calibration Subsec 2 5 Q A Manual 8 1 2 Data Recording Device Either a strip chart recorder data acquisition system or digital data acquisition system should be used to record the data from the Mode TML87 RS 232 port or analog outputs If analog readings are being used the response of that system should be checked against a NIST referenced voltage source or meter Data recording devices should be capable of bi polar operation so that negative readings can be recorded 162 05496 Rev A6
205. ample chamber reduces the effects of stray light via its optical geometry and spectral filtering 05496 Rev A6 187 Theory Of Operation TML87 Instruction Manual The net result is that any variation in UV fluorescence can be directly attributed to changes in the concentration of SO in the sample gas 10 2 The UV Light Path The optical design of the TML87 s sample chamber optimizes the fluorescent reaction between SO and UV Light Figure 10 2 and assures that only UV light resulting from the decay of SO into SO is sensed by the instrument s fluorescence detector UV radiation is generated by a lamp specifically designed to produce a maximum amount of light of the wavelength needed to excite SO into SO 214 nm and a special reference detector circuit constantly measures lamp intensity see Equation 10 3 A Photo Multiplier Tube PMT detects the UV given off by the SO decay 330 nm and generates an analog signal Several focusing lenses and optical filters make sure that both detectors are exposed to an optimum amount of only the right wavelengths of UV To further assure that the PMT only detects light given off by decaying SO the pathway of the excitation UV and field of view of the PMT are perpendicular to each other and the inside surfaces of the sample chamber are coated with a layer of black Teflon that absorbs stray light UV Source Optical Filter 214 nm Window Seal UV Lamp UV Source
206. are available for the IZS option They are identical in size and shape but are designed to have different effusion rates Since the TML87 can be configured as either H2S or SO analyzer both types of permeation tubes are included here OPTION GAS TYPE dior CO ER SPECIFIED FLOW RATE OPT 52 H2S 106 ng min 80 120 ppb 0 76 lpm OPT 53 SO 421 ng min 300 500 ppb 0 76 Ipm Opt 54 5 53 400 600 ppb 0 76 Ipm OPT 55 SO 842 ng min 600 1000 ppb 0 76 OPT 57 SO 222 ng min 800 1200 ppb 0 56 Ipm Each tube comes with a calibration certificate traceable to a NIST standard specifying its actual effusion rate of that tube to within 5 when immersed in a gas stream moving at the specified flow rate This calibration is performed at a tube temperature of 50 C NOTE The instrument can only be fitted with one type of permeation tube at a time Therefore the IZS option can only be used to calibrate or check the instrument for one gas H2S or 5 but not both 5 4 4 Zero Air Scrubber Maintenance Kit Option 43 This kit includes the following items needed to refurbish the zero air scrubber included with the IZS valve options ME sree DESCRIPTION 005960000 Activated charcoal FL0000001 Sintered filter for span gas inlet fitting FL0000003 Replacement particulate filter ORO0000001 O Ring aty 2 40 05496 Rev A6 87 Instructio
207. as concentration OFFSET e f the reporting range is set for gt 2 001 ppb the instrument will be using the 20 000 ppb physical range Target NORM PMT 0 2 x span gas concentration OFFSET EXAMPLE If the OFFSET IS 33 mV the Reporting Range is 500 ppb the span gas should be 400 ppb and the calculation would be 05496 Rev A6 257 TROUBLESHOOTING amp REPAIR TML87 Instruction Manual 17 18 19 20 21 22 amp WN m 11 12 13 14 Target NORM PMT 2 x 400 33 Target NORM PMT 833mV Set the HVPS coarse adjustment switch to the lowest setting that will give you more than the target NORM PMT signal from Step 16 The coarse adjustment typically increments the NORM signal in 100 300 mV steps Adjust the HVPS fine adjustment such that the NORM PMT value is at or just above the target NORM PMT signal from Step 16 Continue adjusting the both the coarse and fine switches until NORM IS as close to but not below the target NORM PMT signal from Step 16 Adjust gain adjustment potentiometer until the NORM PMT value is 10 mV of the target level from Step 16 Perform span and zero point calibrations see Chapter 7 to normalize the sensor response to its new PMT sensitivity Review the slope and offset values and compare them to the values in Table 7 5 11 6 3 9 PMT Hardware Calibration FIELD CAL Perform a full zero calibration using nitrogen or zer
208. at are also configured in parallel or in series depending on the Type of AC power being supplied A thermocouple imbedded in the heater measures the temperature and feeds a small voltage to the relay board s thermocouple amplifier which in turn transmits the linearized analog voltage to the motherboard This information is sent to the CPU via the instruments buss The CPU returns activate deactivate signals to the appropriate relay also via the l C buss On units with IZS options installed an additional set of AC heaters is attached to the IZS oven Some special TML87 models may have other non standard heating zones installed such as a bypass manifold 10 4 8 2 Valve Control The relay board also hosts two valve driver chips each of which can drive up four valves In its basic configuration the TML87 has a single value the 5 5 mode value However on units with either the zero span or the IZS option installed additional valves are included Manifold valves may also be present in certain special versions of the analyzer 208 05496 Rev A6 TML87 Instruction Manual Theory Of Operation 10 4 9 Status LEDs amp Watch Dog Circuitry IZS Option js ug ge s ri
209. ate the ANALOG I O CONFIGURATION MENU see Section 6 9 1 then press STARTING FROM ANALOG 1 CONFIGURATION MENU DIAG ANALOG I O CONFIGURATION Exit at any time to return to the main NEXT ENTR EXIT DIAG menu Continue pressing SET until DIAG AIO AIN CALIBRATED NO SET SET gt CAL DIAG AIO CALIBRATING A D ZERO Instrument pe calibrates CALIBRATING A D SPAN automatically Exit to return to the ANALOG CONFIGURATION MENU DIAG AlO AIN CALIBRATED YES lt SET SET gt CAL 05496 Rev 6 81 Operating Instructions TML87 Instruction Manual 6 9 5 Optic Test The optic test function tests the response of the PMT sensor by turning on an LED located in the cooling block of the PMT Figure 10 15 The analyzer uses the light emitted from the LED to test its photo electronic subsystem including the PMT and the current to voltage converter on the pre amplifier board To make sure that the analyzer measures only the light coming from the LED the analyzer should be supplied with zero air The optic test should produce a PMT signal of about 2000 1000 mV To activate the electrical test press the following key sequence SAMPLE RANGE 500 0 PPB 25 DIAG SIGNAL I O PREV NEXT JUMP lt 5 5 gt CAL SETUP SAMPLE ENTER SETUP PASS 818 Press NEXT until DIAG OPTIC TEST SETUP XX PRIMARY SETUP MENU PREV NEXT ENTR EXIT CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MQRE D
210. ated values To carry out this adjustment connect an external sufficiently accurate flow meter to the sample inlet see Section 11 5 2 for more details Once the flow meter is attached and is measuring actual gas flow press SAMPLE RANGE 500 0 PPB lt TST 5 gt CAL SAMPLE ENTER SETUP PASS 818 SETUP X X PRIMARY SETUP MENU CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE SETUP X X SECONDARY SETUP MENU COMM VARS DIAG Exit at any time to return to main the SETUP menu SIGNAL I O ENTR EXIT Repeat Pressing NEXT until FLOW CALIBRATION ENTR DIAG FCAL ACTUAL FLOW 607 CC M Adjust these values until the ENTR accepts the displayed flow rate equals the new value flow rate being measured by the EXIT ignores the new independent flow meter value 86 05496 Rev A6 TML87 Instruction Manual Operating Instructions 6 9 10 Test Channel Output When activated output channel A4 can be used to report one of the test functions viewable from the SAMPLE mode display To activate the A4 channel and select a test function follow this key sequence SAMPLE RANGE 500 0 PPB lt TST TST gt CAL XXX X SETUP SAMPLE ENTER SETUP PASS 818 8 1 8 ENTR SETUP X X PRI MARY SETUP MENU CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE EXIT SETUP XX SECONDARY SETUP MENU COMM VARS DIAG EXIT DIAG SIGNAL I O DIAG ANALOG OUTPUT PREV NEXT ENTR EXIT
211. aud rate that is compatible with the modem which needs to operate with an 8 bit word length with one stop bit The first step is to turn on the MODEM ENABLE communication mode Mode 64 Section 6 10 8 Once this is completed the appropriate setup command line for your modem can be entered into the analyzer The default setting for this feature is AT YO amp DO amp HO amp IO 50 2 amp BO amp N6 amp MO EO Q1 amp WO This string can be altered to match your modems initialization and can be up to 100 characters long To change this setting press SAMPLE RANGE 500 0 PPB XXX X lt TST TST gt CAL SETUP SETUP X X COM1 MODE 0 SET gt EDIT EXIT a SETUP X X COM1 BAUD RATE 19200 SAMPLE ENTER SETUP PASS 818 8 1 8 SET SET EDIT EXIT SETUP PRI MARY SETUP MENU CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE EXIT SETUP X X COM1 MODEM INIT AT 2 amp D amp H EXIT returns SET SET EDIT EXIT to the SETUP XX SECONDARY SETUP MENU previous COMM EXIT ENTR accepts the menu new string and returns SETUP X X 1 MODEM INIT A T amp D amp H to the previous menu EXIT ignores the new SETUP X X COMMUNICATIONS MENU CH CH INS DEL A ENTR EXIT returns to Select which e previous menu COM Port is 1 COM2 EXIT tested Press the key repeatedly to cycle through the available character set
212. aws of fluid dynamics By restricting the flow of gas though the orifice a pressure differential is created This pressure differential combined with the action of the analyzer s external pump draws the gas through the orifice As the pressure on the downstream side of the orifice the pump side continues to drop the speed that the gas flows though the orifice continues to rise Once the ratio of upstream pressure to downstream pressure is greater than 2 1 the velocity of the gas through the orifice reaches the speed of sound As long as that ratio stays at least 2 1 the gas flow rate is unaffected by any fluctuations surges or changes in downstream pressure because such variations only travel at the speed of sound themselves and are therefore cancelled out by the sonic shockwave at the downstream exit of the critical flow orifice 05496 Rev A6 195 Theory Of Operation TML87 Instruction Manual CRITICAL FLOW ORIFICE AREA OF AREA OF HIGH LOW PRESSURE PRESSURE Shockwave SPRING O RINGS FILTER Figure 10 8 Typical Flow Control Assembly with Critical Flow Orifice The actual flow rate of gas through the orifice volume of gas per unit of time depends on the size and shape of the aperture in the orifice The larger the hole the more gas molecules moving at the speed of sound pass through the orifice The result is the flow rate of the gas is unaffected by degradations in pump efficiency due to age The critical
213. aximum of 10 meters of 1 4 PTFE tubing Attach the sample line to the sample inlet port Ideally the pressure of the sample gas should be equal to ambient atmospheric pressure Zero air and span gas inlets should supply their respective gases in excess of the 700 cc min demand of the analyzer Supply and vent lines should be of sufficient length and diameter to prevent back diffusion and pressure effects Attach zero air and span gas supply lines as appropriate see Figure 3 1 amp Figure 3 7 For this type of analyzer zero air and span gas are defined as follows SPAN GAS A gas specifically mixed to match the chemical composition of the type of gas being measured at near full scale of the desired measurement range In the case of H2S measurements made with the Teledyne 05496 Rev A6 17 Getting Started TML87 Instruction Manual Instruments TML87 UV Fluorescence H2S Analyzer it is recommended that you use a span gas with H2S concentration equal to 90 of the measurement range for your application EXAMPLE If the application is to measure between 0 ppb and 500 ppb an appropriate span gas concentration would be 450 ppb H5S in Cylinders of calibrated H2S gas traceable to NIST Standard Reference Material specifications also referred to as SRM s or EPA protocol calibration gases are commercially available Table 3 5 lists specific NIST SRM reference numbers for various concentrations of H2S Some ap
214. ber and designated TML repair facility Customer shall return the defective part or parts to the designated TML Customer Service Facility as set forth below freight prepaid by the customer TML will prepay the return freight e TML will notify the customer of TML s decision to repair or replace the defective part and the expected shipment date e Atthe customer s request TML may elect to repair defective product s located in North America on site in which case travel expenses travel time and related expenses incurred by TML personnel excluding repair time shall be paid by the customer Teledyne Monitor Labs Service Response Center 1 800 846 6062 www teledyne ml com 35 Inverness Drive East Englewood Colorado 80112 5189 USA Tel 303 792 3300 Fax 303 799 4853 05496 Rev A6 Specifications approvals TML87 Instruction Manual User Notes 8 05496 Rev A6 TML87 Instruction Manual Getting Started 3 0 GETTING STARTED 3 1 Unpacking and Initial Setup CAUTION To avoid personal injury always use two persons to lift and carry the TML87 Inspect the received packages for external shipping damage If damaged please advise the shipper first then Teledyne Instruments Included with your analyzer is a printed record of the final performance characterization performed on your instrument at the factory This record is an important quality assurance and calibration record for this instrument It
215. bling e Reaction cell thermistor wiring yellow e Reaction cell heater wiring red e UV detector wiring e TEC power cable e PMT wiring connectors J5 amp J6 on the PMT preamplifier PCA 5 Remove the three sensor module mounting screws Mounting Screw Housing Mountin Screw oe crew Figure 11 5 Sensor Module Mounting Screws Follow the above steps in reverse order to reinstall the sensor module 05496 Rev A6 245 TROUBLESHOOTING amp REPAIR TML87 Instruction Manual 11 6 3 2 Cleaning the Sample chamber To clean the sample chamber 1 Remove the sensor module as described in Section 11 6 3 1 2 Remove the sample chamber mounting bracket by unscrewing the four bracket screws Sample Chamber Bracket Standoffs 4th standoff hidden from view Sample Chamber Bracket Screws Sample Chamber Bracket Standoffs Figure 11 6 Sample Chamber Mounting Bracket 3 Unscrew the 4 hexagonal standoffs 4 Gently remove the chamber cover 5 Usinga lint free cloth dampened with distilled water wipe the inside surface of the chamber and the chamber cover 246 05496 Rev A6 TML87 Instruction Manual TROUBLESHOOTING amp REPAIR 6 Drythe chamber surfaces with a 2nd lint free cloth 7 Re assemble the chamber and re install the sensor module 11 6 3 3 Cleaning the PMT Lens amp PMT filter To clean the PMT Lens and filter 1 Remove the sensor module as descr
216. c bags made of plastic impregnated with metal usually silvery in color provide all of the charge equalizing abilities of the pink poly bags but also when properly sealed create a Faraday cage that completely isolates the contents from discharges and the inductive transfer of static charges Storage bins made of plastic impregnated with carbon usually black in color are also excellent at dissipating static charges and isolating their contents from field effects and discharges e Never use ordinary plastic adhesive tape near an ESD sensitive device or to close an anti ESD bag The act of pulling a piece of standard plastic adhesive tape such as Scotch tape from its roll will generate a static charge of several thousand or even tens of thousands of volts on the tape itself and an associated field effect that can discharge through or be induced upon items up to a foot away 12 4 2 Basic anti ESD Procedures for Analyzer Repair and Maintenance 05496 Rev A6 265 A Primer on Electro Static Discharge TML87 Instruction Manual 12 4 2 1 Working at the Instrument Rack When working on the analyzer while it is in the instrument rack and plugged into a properly grounded power supply 1 Attach your anti ESD wrist strap to ground before doing anything else e Use a wrist strap terminated with an alligator clip and attach it to a bare metal portion of the instrument chassis This will safely connect you to the same ground level to which the instru
217. cations and approvals 2 0 SPECIFICATIONS AND APPROVALS 2 1 Specifications Table 2 1 87 Basic Unit Specifications Min Max Range Physical Analog Output In 1 ppb increments from 50 ppb to 20 000 ppb independent ranges or auto ranging Measurement Units ppb ppm ug m3 mg m3 user selectable Zero Noise 0 2 ppb RMS Span Noise 0 2 ppb RMS Lower Detectable Limit 0 4 ppb RMS Zero Drift 24 hours 0 5 ppb Zero Drift 7 days 1 ppb Span Drift 7 Days 0 596 FS Linearity 196 of full scale Precision 0 5 of reading Temperature Coefficient lt 0 1 per C Voltage Coefficient lt 0 05 per V Rise Fall Time 95 in lt 100 sec Sample Flow Rate 600 75 cc min Temperature Range 5 40 C Humidity Range 0 95 RH non condensing Dimensions H x W x D 7 x 17 x 23 5 178 mm x 432 mm x 597 mm Weight Analyzer Basic Configuration 45 Ibs 20 5 kg w internal pump AC Power Rating 100 V 50 60 Hz 1 7 2 3 A surge 115 V 60 Hz 1 5 2 0 A surge 220 240 V 50 60 Hz 0 75 AV 1 0 A surge Environmental Installation category over voltage category II Pollution degree 2 Analog Outputs Three 3 Outputs Analog Output Ranges 100 mV 1 V 5 V 10 V 2 20 or 4 20 mA isolated current loop Ranges with 5 Under Over Range Analog Output Resolution 1 part in 4096 o
218. ccess all functions that could be accessed when standing in front of the instrument Remotely edit system parameters and set points Download view graph and save data for predictive diagnostics or data analysis Retrieve view edit save and upload iDAS configurations Check on system parameters for trouble shooting and quality control sensor e com is very helpful for initial setup data analysis maintenance and trouble shooting Figure 6 16 shows an example of sensor e com being used to remotely configuration the instruments iDAS feature Figure 6 20 shows examples of sensor e com s main interface which emulates the look and functionality of the instruments actual front panel 132 05496 Rev A6 87 Instruction Manual Operating Instructions J ial x File Settings Help Site Connection InstrumentName Staus COM1 Direct Cable COM2 Connected Direct Cable Modem Windows Modem Ethernet TCP IP For Help press F1 NUM 7 1 2 3 4 5 iE i 8 sensor com Download graph save data Figure 6 20 sensor e com Remote Control Program Interface sensor e com is included free of cost with the analyzer and the latest versions can also be downloaded for free at http www teledyne ML com 6 12 3 Additional Communications Documentation Table 6 26 Serial Interface Documents Interface Tool Document Title Part Number Available Onlin
219. ccording to the service interval in Table 9 1 even without obvious signs of dirt Filters with 5 um pore size can clog up while retaining a clean look We recommend handling the filter and the wetted surfaces of the filter housing with gloves 174 05496 Rev A6 TML87 Instruction Manual Instrument Maintenance and tweezers Do not touch any part of the housing filter element PTFE retaining ring glass cover and the O ring with bare hands To change the filter according to the service interval in Table 9 1 1 Turn OFF the analyzer to prevent drawing debris into the sample line Open the TML87 s hinged front panel and unscrew the knurled retaining ring of the filter assembly 01628 Retaining Ring 01629 Window 024310100 O Ring PTFE Notches UP PTFE Membrane Filter Element FL6 5 um OR 58 Viton O Ring 03588 Bracket 03522 Body FT 8 Connector Fitting FT 8 Connector Fitting Figure 9 1 Sample Particulate Filter Assembly Carefully remove the retaining ring glass window PTFE O ring and filter element Replace the filter element carefully centering it in the bottom of the holder Re install the PTFE O ring with the notches facing up the glass cover then screw on the hold down ring and hand tighten the assembly Inspect the visible seal between the edge of the glass window and the O ring to assure proper gas tightness Re start the analyzer 9 3 2 Changing the IZS Permeation Tube 1 off
220. ces of equipment or property e Static Charges can t build up on a conductive surface There are two errors in this statement Conductive devices can build static charges if they are not grounded The charge will be equalized across the entire device but without access to earth ground they are still trapped and can still build to high enough levels to cause damage when they are discharged A charge can be induced onto the conductive surface and or discharge triggered in the presence of a charged field such as a large static charge clinging to the surface of a nylon jacket of someone walking up to a workbench As long as my analyzer is properly installed it is safe from damage caused by static discharges It is true that when properly installed the chassis ground of your analyzer is tied to earth ground and its electronic components are prevented from building static electric charges themselves This does not 05496 Rev A6 263 A Primer on Electro Static Discharge TML87 Instruction Manual prevent discharges from static fields built up on other things like you and your clothing from discharging through the instrument and damaging it 12 4 Basic Principles of Static Control It is impossible to stop the creation of instantaneous static electric charges It is not however difficult to prevent those charges from building to dangerous levels or prevent damage due to electro static discharge from occurring 12 4 1 General Rules On
221. ces receive data on pin 3 and transmit data on pin 2 To allow the analyzer to be used with terminals DTE modems DCE and computers which can be either a Switch mounted below the serial ports on the rear panel allows the user to set the configuration of COM1 for one of these two modes This switch exchanges the receive and the transmit lines on COM1 emulating a cross over or null modem cable The switch has no effect on 2 92 05496 Rev A6 87 Instruction Manual Operating Instructions 6 10 6 Ethernet Card Configuration When equipped with the optional Ethernet interface the analyzer can be connected to any standard 10BaseT Ethernet network via low cost network hubs switches or routers The interface operates as a standard TCP IP device on port 3000 This allows a remote computer to connect through the internet to the analyzer using sensor e com terminal emulators or other programs The firmware on board the Ethernet card automatically sets the communication modes and baud rate 115 200 kBaud for the COM2 port Once the Ethernet option is installed and activated the COM2 submenu is replaced by a new submenu INET This submenu is used to manage and configure the Ethernet interface with your LAN or Internet Server s The card has four LEDs that are visible on the rear panel of the analyzer indicating its current operating status Table 6 15 Ethernet Status Indicators LED FUNCTION LNK g
222. circuitry failure PMT TEMP PMT temperature is Bad PMT thermo electric cooler WARNING lt 2 gt 12 Failed TEC driver circuit Bad PMT preamp board Failed PMT temperature sensor Loose wiring between PMT temperature sensor and PMT Preamp board Malfunction of analog sensor input circuitry on motherboard RCELL TEMP Sample chamber Bad reaction cell heater WARNING temperature is Bad reaction cell temperature sensor lt 45 or 55 Bad relay controlling the reaction cell heater Entire relay board is malfunctioning buss malfunction 05496 Rev 6 223 TROUBLESHOOTING amp REPAIR TML87 Instruction Manual Table 11 1 Warning Messages Indicated Failures cont Relay Board WARNING MESSAGE FAULT CONDITION POSSIBLE CAUSES REAR BOARD NOT Mother Board not detected Warning only appears on serial i o com port s DET on power up Front panel display will be frozen blank or will not respond Massive failure of mother board RELAY BOARD The CPU cannot buss failure WARN communicate with the Failed relay board Loose connectors wiring SAMPLE FLOW WARN Sample flow rate is lt 500 cc min or gt 1000 cc min Failed sample pump Blocked sample inlet gas line Dirty particulate filter Leak downstream of critical flow orifice Failed flow sensor circuitry SAMPLE PRES WARN Sample Pressure is lt 10 in Hg or gt 35 in Hg If sample pressure is lt 10 in hg
223. contacts are closed for at least 5 seconds the instrument switches into zero low span or high span mode and the internal zero span valves will be automatically switched to the appropriate configuration The remote calibration contact closures may be activated in any order It is recommended that contact closures remain closed for at least 10 minutes to establish a reliable reading the instrument will stay in the selected mode for as long as the contacts remain closed If contact closures are used in conjunction with the analyzer s AutoCal Section 7 9 feature and the AutoCal attribute CALIBRATE is enabled the TML87 will not re calibrate the analyzer until the contact is opened At this point the new calibration values will be recorded before the instrument returns to SAMPLE mode If the AutoCal attribute CALIBRATE is disabled the instrument will return to SAMPLE mode leaving the instrument s internal calibration variables unchanged 7 8 Manual Calibration in Multigas Measurement Mode If the analyzer is being operated in multigas measurement mode the methods and setups for performing calibrations are identical to those defined in Sections 7 2 and 7 4 with the two exceptions Some provision must be made for supplying both types of calibrated span gas to the analyzer A typical setup for this might be 154 05496 Rev A6 TML87 Instruction Manual Calibration Procedures No Valve Options Installed Calibrated HS GAS TUS VM MODEL 700
224. converter must be re calibrated and all information collected in step 1 above must be re entered before the instrument will function correctly 11 6 2 Flash Chip Replacement or Upgrade The TML87 CPU board can accommodate up to two EEPROM flash chips The standard configuration is one chip with 64 kb of storage capacity which is used to store a backup of the analyzer configuration as created during final checkout at the factory Replacing this chip will erase that backup configuration which will be replaced with a new copy when restarting the analyzer However if the firmware and or the DOC is changed at the same time all analyzer configuration settings and iDAS data will be lost In this case refer to the previous section on how to back up your settings Adding a second EEPROM chip to the existing chip will double memory but this procedure will require a BIOS configuration Contact the factory for details l Turn off power to the instrument fold down the rear panel by loosening the mounting screws 2 When looking at the electronic circuits from the back of the analyzer locate the EEPROM chip in the left most Socket of the CPU board The chip is square with one corner cut off the socket is shaped accordingly Remove the old chip by using a special tool or gently pry the chip out using a very fine screwdriver Make sure not to bend or destroy any of the contacts of the socket 3 Reinstall the new or additional EEPROM chip making sure the cut
225. ction Manual TROUBLESHOOTING amp REPAIR Several of the control devices are in sockets and can easily be replaced The table below lists the control device associated with a particular function Table 11 6 Relay Board Control Devices FUNCTION CONTROL DEVICE SOCKETED ValveO Valve3 U5 Yes Valve4 Valve U6 Yes All heaters K1 K5 Yes 11 5 8 Motherboard 11 5 8 1 A D functions A basic check of the analog to digital A D converter operation on the motherboard is to use the Signal I O function under the DIAG menu Check the following two A D reference voltages and input signals that can be easily measured with a voltmeter e Using the Signal I O function Section 6 9 2 and Appendix D view the value of REF 4096 MV and REF GND If these signals are within 10 mV and mV respectively of their nominal values 4096 and 0 and are stable to within 0 5 mV the basic A D converter is functioning properly If these values fluctuate largely or are off by more than specified above one or more of the analog circuits may be overloaded or the motherboard may be faulty Choose one parameter in the Signal I O function such as SAMPLE PRESSURE see previous section on how to measure it Compare its actual voltage with the voltage displayed through the SIGNAL I O function If the wiring is intact but there is a difference of more than 10 mV between the measured and displayed voltage the motherboard may be faulty
226. d limits 125 TEMP WARNING On units with IZS options installed The permeation tube temperature is outside of specified limits PMT DET WARNING PMT detector output outside of operational limits PMT TEMP WARNING PMT temperature is outside of specified limits RCELL TEMP WARNING Sample chamber temperature is outside of specified limits REAR BOARD NOT DET The CPU is unable to communicate with the motherboard RELAY BOARD WARN The firmware is unable to communicate with the relay board SAMPLE FLOW WARN The flow rate of the sample gas is outside the specified limits SAMPLE PRESS WARN Sample pressure outside of operational parameters SYSTEM RESET The computer was rebooted UV LAMP WARNING The UV lamp intensity measured by the reference detector reading too low or too high 05496 Rev A6 51 Operating Instructions TML87 Instruction Manual To view and clear warning messages SAMPLE HVPS WARNING H2S 0 00 TEST deactivates warning messages TEST CAL MSG CLR SETUP SAMPLE RANGE 500 000 PPM 5 0 00 MSG activates warning messages lt TST TST gt CAL MSG SETUP STST gt keys replaced with TEST key SAMPLE HVPS WARNING HS 0 00 Press CLR to clear the current TEST CAL MSG SETUP Las NOTE If more than one warning is active the If the warning message persists next message wil
227. d off static charges present at the time once you stop touching the grounded metal new static charges will immediately begin to re build In some conditions a charge large enough to damage a component can rebuild in just a few seconds e Always store sensitive components and assemblies in anti ESD storage bags or bins Even when you are not working on them store all devices and assemblies in a closed anti Static bag or bin This will prevent induced charges from building up on the device or assembly and nearby static fields from discharging through it e Use metallic anti ESD bags for storing and shipping ESD sensitive components and assemblies rather than pink poly bags The famous pink poly bags are made of a plastic that is impregnated with a liquid similar to liquid laundry detergent which very slowly sweats onto the surface of the plastic creating a slightly conductive layer over the surface of the bag While this layer may equalize any charges that occur across the whole bag it does not prevent the build up of static charges If laying on a conductive grounded surface these bags will allow charges to bleed away but the very charges that build up on the surface of the bag itself can be transferred through the bag by induction onto the circuits of your ESD sensitive device Also the liquid impregnating the plastic is eventually used up after which the bag is as useless for preventing damage from ESD as any ordinary plastic bag Anti Stati
228. data from the TML87 See Table 8 3 for a summary of activities Also the QA Handbook should be checked for specific procedures Table 8 3 Activity Matrix FREQUENCY AND CHARACTERISTIC ACCEPTANCE LIMITS METHOD OF E E MET MEASUREMENT Shelter Temperature Mean temperature between 229 Check thermograph Mark strip chart for the and 28 72 and 82 daily chart weekly for affected time period fluctuations not greater than 2 variations greater than 2 C 4 F Repair or adjust temperature control Sample Introduction No moisture foreign material leaks Weekly visual Clean repair or replace as obstructions sample line connected inspection needed to manifold Recorder Adequate ink amp paper Weekly visual Replenish ink and paper Legible ink traces inspection supply Adjust time to agree with Correct chart speed and range notason chart Correct time Analyzer TEST measurements at nominal Weekly visual Adjust or repair as needed Operational Settings values inspection 2 TML87 in SAMPLE mode Analyzer Zero and span within tolerance Level 1 zero span every Find source of error and Operational Check limits as described Subsec 9 1 3 2 weeks Level 2 repair of Sec 2 0 9 Q A Handbook between Level 1 checks at frequency desired analyzer by user Precision Check Assess precision as described in Every 2 weeks Subsec Calc report precision Sec Sec 2 0 8 and Subsec 3 4 3 Ibid 3 4 3
229. de The same method may be used to manually check the calibration of the TML87 analyzers configured for SO measurement by substituting SO span gas for the H2S span gas listed See Section 7 8 for instructions for performing calibration checks on analyzers configured for multigas measurement mode To carry out a calibration check rather than a full calibration follow these steps STEP ONE Connect the sources of zero air and span gas as shown in Figure 7 1 STEP TWO Perform the zero span calibration check procedure ACTION Supply the instrument with zero gas SAMPLE RANGE 500 0 PPB Scroll the display to the H2S STB test function lt TST 5 gt SAMPLE 25 STB XXX X PPB Wait until H2S lt TST TST gt STB is below 0 5 ppb This may take several minutes ACTION H2S XXX X Record the 5 concentration reading SETUP The value of H2S STB may jump significantly Wait until it falls below 0 5 ppb This may take several ACTION Supply span gas to the instrument 4 ACTION minutes SAMPLE H2S XXX X Record theH S concentration reading lt TST TST gt SETUP 05496 Rev 6 147 Calibration Procedures TML87 Instruction Manual 7 4 Manual Calibration with Zero Span Valves Zero and Span calibrations using the Zero Span Valve option are similar to that described in Section 7 2 except that Zero air and span ga
230. dyne Monitor Labs system The following describes the settings that should be entered into the analyzer s COMM sub menus Ethernet Communication The following settings must be entered into the comm menus in order to achieve Ethernet communication Analyzers shipped with systems are setup at the factory ID Analyzer specifc See table below INET DHCP OFF INST IP site specific GATEWAT IP leave as factory default or site specific SUBNET MASK leave as factory default or site specific TCP PORT 3000 ONLINE ON BAUD RATE 115200 Analyzer ID Table SO TRS NOx CO2 MACHINE ID 100 102 200 300 360 GAS ID 150 160 141 130 120 Serial Communication Teledyne Monitor Labs systems communicate to the analyzers via the PLC using serial communication The communication protocol used in the analyzer is the Hessen two protocol When an analyzer is first turned on the Hessen variables do not exist in the non volatile memory order to create these variable the Hessen protocol must be turned on in COM 1 and then the power must be cycled HESN HESSEN VARIATION TYP2 HESSEN RESPONSE MODE BCC HESSEN GAS LIST Any gas to be reported via the serial string needs to be entered here Enter the gas a gas ID and whether it is reported or not Please note that this ID is different form the machine or internet ID stated above For example 502 150 Reported See table below for gas ID s 05492 Rev C A 31
231. e YES Multi drop RS 232 Multi drop Documentation 021790000 YES DAS Manual Detailed description of the iDAS 028370000 These documents can be downloaded at http www teledyne ML com 6 12 4 Using the TML87 with a Hessen Protocol Network 6 12 4 1 General Overview of Hessen Protocol The Hessen protocol is a Multidrop protocol in which several remote instruments are connected via a common communications channel to a host computer The remote instruments are regarded as slaves of the host computer The remote instruments are unaware that they are connected to a Multidrop bus and never initiate Hessen protocol messages They only respond to commands from the host computer and only when they receive a command containing their own unique ID number The Hessen protocol is designed to accomplish two things to obtain the status of remote instruments including the concentrations of all the gases measured and to place remote instruments into zero or span calibration or measure mode ML s implementation supports both of these principal features 05496 Rev A6 133 Operating Instructions TML87 Instruction Manual The Hessen protocol is not well defined therefore while ML s application is completely compatible with the protocol itself it may be different from implementations by other companies The following subsections describe the basics for setting up your instrument to operate over a Hessen Protocol network For more detailed informati
232. e 25 to SO2 converter receives sample gas from which the SO2 has been removed by a scrubber Once the naturally occurring SO is removed from the sample gas the special converter changes the H2S in the sample stream to SO using a high temperature catalytic oxidation The chemical process is 2H S 30 2H 0 2S0 The converter is a heated stainless steel core containing a catalyst across which the sample gas passes just before induction into the reaction cell The temperature of the converter is maintained by a heater controlled by the CPU via the I C bus and the relay card The converter is enclosed in high temperature insulation and encased in a stainless steel housing The converter is most efficient when it operates at 315 C converting 95 of the H2S into SO Converter temperature is viewable via the front panel as the test function CONV TEMP see Section 6 2 1 and can also be reported via the test channel analog output see Section 6 9 10 A warning message CONV TEMP WARNING see Section 6 2 2 will be issued by the CPU if the converter s temperature is below 310 C or above 320 C When the converter is operating at peak efficiency there is a nearly 1 1 relationship between the amount of H2S entering the catalytic converter and the amount of SO leaving it Therefore by measuring the amount of SO in the gas after it leaves the converter the amount of H5S originally present on the sample gas can be directly inferred Thi
233. e 6 16 iDAS Configuration Through a Terminal Emulation Program Both procedures are best started by downloading the default iDAS configuration getting familiar with its command structure and syntax conventions and then altering a copy of the original file offline before uploading the new configuration CAUTION Whereas the editing adding and deleting of iDAS channels and parameters of one channel through the front panel keyboard can be done without affecting the other channels uploading an iDAS configuration script to the analyzer through its communication ports will erase all data parameters and channels by replacing them with the new iDAS configuration Backup of data and the original iDAS configuration is advised before attempting any iDAS changes 05496 Rev A6 123 Operating Instructions TML87 Instruction Manual 6 12 Remote Operation of the Analyzer 6 12 1 Remote Operation Using the External Digital I O 6 12 1 1 Status Outputs The status outputs report analyzer conditions via optically isolated NPN transistors which sink up to 50 mA of DC current These outputs can be used to interface with devices that accept logic level digital inputs such as programmable logic controllers PLCs Each Status bit is an open collector output that can withstand up to 40 VDC All of the emitters of these transistors are tied together and available at D The status outputs are accessed through a 12 pin connector on the analyz
234. e Ethernet Interface properties is a two step process STEP 1 Turn DHCP OFF While DHCP is turned ON the ability to manually set INSTRUMENT IP GATEWAY IP and SUBNET MASK is disabled SETUP X X COMMUNICATIONS MENU SAMPLE RANGE 500 0 PPB lt TST TST gt CAL SAMPLE ENTER SETUP PASS 818 DHCP ON EDIT DHCP ON SETUP PRIMARY SETUP MENU CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE SETUP X X SECONDARY SETUP MENU DHCP ON COMM ENTR accept new settings Continue with editing of Ethernet interface properties see Step 2 below EXIT ignores new settings 96 05496 Rev A6 87 Instruction Manual Operating Instructions STEP 2 Configure the INSTRUMENT IP GATEWAY IP and SUBNET MASK addresses by pressing Internet Configuration Keypad Functions From Step 1 above b FUNCTION Press this key to cycle through the range of numerals and available characters 0 9 4 CH CH Moves the cursor one character left or right DHCP OFF DEL Deletes a character at the cursor location SET ENTR Accepts the new setting and returns to the previous menu EXIT Ignores the new setting and returns to the previous menu INST IP 000 000 000 000 Some keys only appear as needed SET SET EDIT Cursor location is indicated by INST IP 0 00 000 000 brackets CH CH DEL 0 ENTR EXIT GATEWAY IP 000 000 000 000 SET
235. e and the SNGL reporting range mode is selected the AutoCal sequence is programmed as described above If the reporting range of the TML87 is set for either IND or AUTO The gas type and range to be measured must be specified This parameter appears at the end of the programming sequences after the CALIBRATE ON OFF parameter is set For example Follow standard AutoCal programming process to this point then SETUP X X CALIBRATE ON SET SET EDIT SETUP X X RANGE TO CAL LOW HIGH ENT SETUP X X GAS RANGE H2S HIGH SET EDIT SETUP X X RANGE TO CAL HIGH ENTR SETUP GAS RANGE SO2 LOW SETUP X X GAS TO CAL 25 502 SET EXIT SETUP XX SEQ ZERO SPAN 2 00 39 EXIT returns PREV NEXT aa ww Exit tothe SETUP Menu Sequence Delta Time MODE Delta Days SETUP X X Gas TO CAL 502 ENTR 7 10 Calibration Quality After completing one of the calibration procedures described above it is important to evaluate the analyzer s calibration slope and offset parameters These values describe the linear response curve of the analyzer The values for these terms both individually and relative to each other indicate the quality of the calibration To perform this quality evaluation you will need to record the values of both test functions Section 6 2 1 or Appendix A 3 all of which are automatically stored in the
236. e corresponding output signal would also be recorded across only 0 25 of the range of the recording device The TML87 solves this problem by allowing the user to select a scaled reporting range for the analog outputs that only includes that portion of the physical range relevant to the specific application Only the reporting range of the analog outputs is scaled the physical range of the analyzer and the readings displayed on the front panel remain unaltered 6 7 3 Reporting Range Modes The TML87 provides three analog output range modes to choose from The actual signals available on the two analog signal channels depends on whether or not the analyzer includes a SO2 H2S multigas measurement option and if so which measurement mode is selected Single range SNGL mode This mode sets a single maximum range for the analog output If single range is selected see Section 6 7 4 both outputs are slaved together and will represent the same 05496 Rev A6 59 Operating Instructions TML87 Instruction Manual measurement span e g 0 50 ppm however their electronic signal levels may be configured differently e g 0 10 VDC vs 0 1 VDC See Section 6 9 4 1 In SO2 H2S multigas measurement mode although the two inputs are measuring different gases the two measurements scales are identical Independent range IND mode This mode allows the A1 and A2 outputs to be configured with different measurement spans see Section 6 7 5 as well a
237. e fitting of the particle filter Adjust the scrubber cartridge such that it does not protrude above or below the analyzer in case the instrument is mounted in a rack If necessary squeeze the clips for a tighter grip on the cartridge 178 05496 Rev A6 TML87 Instruction Manual Instrument Maintenance 9 3 5 Maintaining the H S gt SO Converter The catalyst contained the H2S gt SO converter of your TML87 must be replaced periodically in order for the analyzer to continue measuring H2S accurately and reliability This material is capable of efficiently converting H2S into SO for up to 6000 ppm hours This means that if the H5S content of the sample gas is typically around 600 ppb the scrubber will function for approximately 10 000 hours a little over 13 months If however the typical ambient H5S level of the sample gas is 1000 ppb the scrubber would only last for approximately 6000 hours or about 8 months 9 3 5 1 Predicting When the Converter Catalyst Should Be Replaced To determine how long the H2S gt SO converter will operate efficiently 1 Measure the amount of H2S in the sample gas Divide 6000 by the H2S concentration in ppm EXAMPLE If the H2S concentration is 750 ppb Operational hours 6000 ppm hr 0 75 ppm Operational hours 8000 hrs 9 3 5 2 Checking the Efficiency of the 5 SO Converter To check to see if your 5 SO converter is operating properly l Setthe analyzer to SO measurement mode
238. e of an input signal or to control the state of an output voltage or control signal The specific parameter will vary depending on the situation Please note that the analyzer will freeze its concentration output while in the diagnostic signal I O menu This is because manually changing outputs can invalidate the instrument reading 05496 Rev A6 225 TROUBLESHOOTING amp REPAIR TML87 Instruction Manual SAMPLE RANGE 500 0 PPB XXX X lt TST TST gt CAL SETUP SAMPLE ENTER SETUP PASS 818 8 1 8 ENTR SETUP X X PRIMARY SETUP MENU CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE EXIT SETUP X X sowas SETUP MENU DIAG EXIT DIAG SIGNAL I O PREV ENTR EXIT DIAG 0 EXT ZERO CAL ON PREV NEXT JUMP PRNT EXIT If parameter is an input signal If parameter is an output signal or control DIAG I O 37 SAMPLE PRESSURE 6000 0 MV DIAG I O 23 ON PREV JUMP PRNT EXIT PREV NEXT JUMP ON PRNT EXIT Toggles parameter ON OFF DIAG 23 OFF PREV NEXT JUMP OFF PRNT EXIT Exit returns to DIAG display amp all values return to software control Figure 11 2 Example of Signal I O Function 11 1 4 Status LEDs Several color coded light emitting diodes LEDs are located inside the instrument to determine if the analyzer s CPU communications bus and relay board are functioning properly 11 1 4 1 Motherboard Status Indicator Watchdog
239. e voltage sent by the PMT preamp board to the PMT s high voltage power supply HVPS It is digitized and sent to the CPU where it is used to calculate the voltage setting of the HVPS and stored in the instrument s memory as the test function HVPS HVPS is viewable as a test function Section 6 2 1 through the analyzer s front panel PMT TEMPERATURE This signal is the output of the thermistor attached to the PMT cold block amplified by the PMT temperature feedback circuit on the PMT preamp board It is digitized and sent to the CPU where it is used to calculate the current temperature of the PMT This measurement is stored in the analyzer s memory as the test function PMT TEMP and is viewable as a test function Section 6 2 1 through the analyzer s front panel 210 05496 Rev A6 87 Instruction Manual Theory Of Operation SAMPLE GAS PRESSURE SENSOR This sensor measures the gas pressure at the exit of the sample chamber SAMPLE FLOW SENSOR This sensor measures the flow rate of the sample gas as it exits the sample chamber 10 4 10 3 Thermistor Interface This circuit provides excitation termination and signal selection for several negative coefficient thermistor temperature sensors located inside the analyzer They are SAMPLE CHAMBER TEMPERATURE SENSOR The source of this signal is a thermistor embedded in the of the sample chamber block It measures the temperature of the sample gas in the chamber This data is used by the
240. ed AZERO WRN XXX X MV The reading taken during the auto zero cycle is outside of specified limits The value XXX X indicates the auto zero reading at the time of the warning BOX TEMP WARNING The temperature inside the TML87 chassis is outside the specified limits CANNOT DYN SPAN Remote span calibration failed while the dynamic span feature was set to active CANNOT DYN ZERO Remote zero calibration failed while the dynamic zero feature was set to active CONFIG INITIALIZED Configuration was reset to factory defaults or was erased DARK CAL WARNING Dark offset above limit specified indicating that too much stray light is present in the sample chamber DATA INITIALIZED iDAS data storage was erased FRONT PANEL WARN Firmware is unable to communicate with the front panel HVPS WARNING High voltage power supply for the PMT is outside of specified limits 125 TEMP WARNING On units with IZS options installed The permeation tube temperature is outside of specified limits PMT DET WARNING PMT detector output outside of operational limits PMT TEMP WARNING PMT temperature is outside of specified limits RCELL PRESS WARN Sample chamber pressure is outside of specified limits RCELL TEMP WARNING Sample chamber temperature is outside of specified limits REAR BOARD NOT DET The CPU is unable to communicate with the motherboard RELAY BOARD WARN
241. ed the Motherboard sssssssssssseee ee 35 Pneumatic Diagram of the TML87 With Z S Option 36 Pneumatic Diagram of the TML87 with IZS Options 000 38 TMES7 Multidrop Card hene oett aee teile edad e ite tut ten 42 TML8 Z Ethernet Card ettet nda dts di d e 42 TML87 Rear Panel with Ethernet Installed 43 Front Panel Display aad edd eed 47 Viewing TMES7 TES T Functions ehe ete ede p D pi buen eee 50 Viewing and Clearing TML87 WARNING 52 Analog Output Connector Key eodera deinen d RE end Pe enti 58 Setup for Calibrating Analog 77 Setup for Calibrating Current nennen enne nnne 79 Back Panel connector Pin Outs for COM1 amp COM2 in RS 232 mode 89 CPU connector Pin Outs for COM1 amp 2 in RS 232 mode sess 90 CPU card Locations of RS 232 485 Switches Connectors and 91 Back Panel connector Pin Outs for COM2 in RS 485 92 CPU connector Pin Outs for COM2 in RS 485 eee 92 Location of JP2 on RS232 Multidrop PC
242. ed shroud next to the cooling fins and directly above the cooling fan If the red LED located on the top edge of this assembly is not glowing the control circuit is not receiving power Check the analyzer s power supply the Relay board s power distribution circuitry and the wiring connecting them to the PMT temperature control PCA TEC Control Test Points Four test points are also located at the top of this assembly They are numbered left to right start with the 1 point immediately to the right of the power status LED These test points provide information regarding the functioning of the control circuit To determine the current running through the control circuit measure the voltage between T1 and T2 Multiply that voltage by 10 To determine the drive voltage being supplied by the control circuit to the TEC measure the voltage between T2 and T3 e If this voltage is zero the TEC circuitry is most likely open Or 240 05496 Rev A6 TML87 Instruction Manual TROUBLESHOOTING amp REPAIR e If the voltage between T2 and 0 VDC and the voltage measured between T1 and 2 0 VDC there is most likely an open circuit or failed op amp on control PCA itself e Ifthe voltage between T2 and 0 VDC and the voltage measured between T1 to T2 is some voltage other than 0 VDC the TEC is most likely shorted T4 is tied directly to ground To determine the absolute voltage on any one of the other test points make a
243. ed with the external flow meter should be 600 cm min 75 cm min If a combined sample ozone air Perma Pure dryer is installed optional equipment the flow will be 740 cm min 10 600 cm min for the sample and 140 cm min for the ozone generator supply air 4 Low flows indicate blockage somewhere in the pneumatic pathway 11 5 3 AC Power Configuration The TML87 can be easily configured for two main power regimes 100 120 V and 220 240 V at either 50 or 60 Hz The analyzer is correctly configured for the AC power voltage in use if it turns on and shows a front panel display after about 30 seconds Internally several LEDs should turn on as soon as the power is supplied If an incorrect power configuration is suspected check for the correct voltage and frequency at the line input on the rear panel 234 05496 Rev A6 TML87 Instruction Manual TROUBLESHOOTING amp REPAIR If the unit is set for 220 240 V and is plugged into 100 120 V the analyzer will not start If the unit is set for 100 120 V and is plugged into 220 240 V the circuit breaker built into the ON OFF Switch on the front panel will trip to the OFF position immediately after power is switched on Note that the analyzer will be severely damaged if 220 240 V is supplied to it when configured for 100 120 V Never bypass the power switch or circuit breaker 11 5 4 DC Power Supply If you have determined that the analyzer s AC main power is working but the unit is sti
244. ent still running carefully remove the analyzer cover Take extra care not to touch any of the inside wiring with the metal cover or your body Do not drop screws or tools into a running analyzer 4 Shine a powerful flashlight or portable incandescent light at the inlet and outlet fitting and at all of the joints of the sample chamber as well as around the PMT housing The PMT value should not respond to the light the PMT signal should remain steady within its tested noise 5 is PMT response to the external light symmetrically tighten the sample chamber mounting screws or replace the 1 4 vacuum tubing with new black PTFE tubing this tubing will fade with time and become transparent Often light leaks are also caused by O rings being left out of the assembly 6 Carefully replace the analyzer cover 7 If tubing or O rings were changed carry out a leak check Section 11 5 1 User Notes 05496 Rev A6 183 Instrument Maintenance TML87 Instruction Manual User Notes 184 05496 Rev A6 87 Instruction Manual Theory Of Operation 10 0 THEORY OF OPERATION The TML87 UV Fluorescence H5S Analyzer is a microprocessor controlled analyzer that determines the concentration of hydrogen sulfide H2S in a sample gas drawn through the instrument It requires that sample and calibration gases be supplied at ambient atmospheric pressure in order to establish a constant gas flow through the sample chamber
245. er s rear panel labeled STATUS see Figure 6 17 The function of each pin is defined in Table 6 22 STATUS y m N w a N SYSTEM CONC VALID HIGH RANGE ZERO CAL SPAN CAL LOW SPAN DIAGNOSTIC MODE Connect to Internal Ground of Monitoring Figure 6 17 Status Output Connector 124 05496 Rev A6 87 Instruction Manual Operating Instructions Table 6 22 Status Output Pin Assignments irn CONDITION ON CONDUCTING E The emitters of the transistors on pins 1 8 are bussed together For Emitter Bus most applications this pin should be connected to the circuit ground of the receiving device 5 VDC source 30 mA maximum combined rating with Control Dc Power Inputs Digital Ground The ground from the analyzer s internal 5 15 VDC power supply 6 12 1 2 Control Inputs Control inputs which allow the user to remotely initiate ZERO and SPAN calibration modes are provided through a 10 pin connector labeled CONTROL IN on the analyzer s rear panel These are opto isolated digital inputs that are activated when a 5 VDC signal from the U pin is connected to the respective input pin 05496 Rev A6 125 Operating Instructions TML87 Instruction Manual Table 6 23 Control Input Pin Assignments INPUT STATUS CONDITION WHEN ENABLED External Zero Cal Zero calibration mode is activated The mode field of the display will read ZERO CAL R Span calibration mode is
246. erate in one of three modes or be disabled 05496 Rev A6 155 Calibration Procedures TML87 Instruction Manual Table 7 2 AutoCal Modes ACTION DISABLED Disables the sequence ZERO Causes the sequence to perform a zero calibration or check ZERO SPAN Causes the sequence to perform a zero and span concentration calibration or check ERAS Causes the sequence to perform a span concentration calibration or check Each mode has seven parameters that control operational details of the sequence Table 7 3 Table 7 3 AutoCal Attribute Setup Parameters Duration Duration ofthe sequence inminutes 0 Calibrate Enable to do dynamic zero span calibration disable to do a cal check only This must be set to OFF for units used in US EPA applications and with IZS option installed 156 05496 Rev 6 TML87 Instruction Manual Calibration Procedures The following example sets Sequence2 to carry out a zero span calibration every other day starting at 01 00 on September 4 2002 lasting 15 minutes This sequence will start 0 5 hours later each day Table 7 4 Example Auto Cal Sequence ZEROSPAN Select Zero and Span Weds TMERENABLE ON f Enae temer CALIBRATE The instrument will re set the slope and offset values for the H2S channel at the end of the AutoCal sequence 05496 Rev A6 157 Calibration Procedures TML87 Instruction Manual SAMPLE RANGE 500 0 PPB XXX X lt TST
247. erence Detector view outside Reference Detectors view similar volume of SO Reference Detector When source UV is focused Reference Detector sees most of the emitted light UV Source 214 nm Lens Filter If source UV is unfocused Reference Detector only sees a small portion of emitted light 330 nm Filter PMT Lens PMT Figure 10 6 Effects of Focusing Source UV in Sample Chamber A lens located between PMT and the sample chamber collects as much of the fluoresced UV created there as possible and focuses it on the most sensitive part of the PMT s photo cathode Another lens located between the excitation UV source lamp and the sample chamber collimates the light emitted by the lamp into a steady circular beam and focuses that beam directly onto the reference detector This allows the reference detector to accurately measure the effective intensity of the excitation UV by 05496 Rev A6 191 Theory Of Operation TML87 Instruction Manual e Eliminating the effect of flickering inherent in the plasma arc that generates the light e Making sure that all of the light emitted by the source lamp passed through the 214 nm filter and not absorbed by the SO reaches the reference detector Conversely this also makes sure that the volume of sample gas affected by the excitation beam is similar to the volume of fluorescing SO being measured by the PMT eliminating a possible source of measurement offset
248. ernal IZS valve option and the H2S span value is continuously trending downward the IZS permeation tube may require replacement 11 3 7 Discrepancy Between Analog Output and Display If the concentration reported through the analog outputs does not agree with the value reported on the front panel you may need to re calibrate the analog outputs This becomes more likely when using a low concentration or low analog output range Analog outputs running at 0 1 V full scale should always be calibrated manually See Section 6 9 4 3 for a detailed description of this procedure 11 4 Other Performance Problems Dynamic problems i e problems which only manifest themselves when the analyzer is monitoring sample gas can be the most difficult and time consuming to isolate and resolve The following section provides an itemized list of the most common dynamic problems with recommended troubleshooting checks and corrective actions 11 4 1 Excessive noise Excessive noise levels under normal operation usually indicate leaks in the sample supply or the analyzer itself Make sure that the sample or span gas supply is leak free and carry out a detailed leak check as described earlier in this chapter Another possibility of excessive signal noise may be the preamplifier board the high voltage power supply and or the PMT detector itself Contact the factory on trouble shooting these components 11 4 2 Slow Response If the analyzer starts responding too slowly
249. es consist of integers hexadecimal integers floating point numbers Boolean expressions and text strings Integer data are used to indicate integral quantities such as a number of records a filter length etc They consist of an optional plus or minus sign followed by one or more digits For example 7 12 123 are all valid integers Hexadecimal integer data are used for the same purposes as integers They consist of the two characters Ox followed by one or more hexadecimal digits 0 9 A F a f which is the C programming language convention No plus or minus sign is permitted For example 0 7 0x12 0x1234abcd are all valid hexadecimal integers Floating point numbers are used to specify continuously variable values such as temperature set points time intervals warning limits voltages etc They consist of an optional plus or minus sign followed by zero or more digits an optional decimal point and zero or more digits At least one digit must appear 128 05496 Rev A6 87 Instruction Manual Operating Instructions before or after the decimal point Scientific notation is not permitted For example 1 0 1234 5678 0 1 1 are all valid floating point numbers e Boolean expressions are used to specify the value of variables or I O signals that may assume only two values They are denoted by the keywords ON and OFF e Text strings are used to represent data that cannot be easily represented by other data
250. es when working with the UV Lamp Assembly 1 Set the analyzer display to show the signal I O function UVLAMP_SIGNAL see Section 11 1 3 UVLAMP_SIGNAL is function 33 function 35 for TML60 2 Slightly loosen the large brass thumbscrew located on the shutter housing see Figure 11 11 so that the lamp can be moved 3 While watching the UVLAMP SIGNAL reading slowly rotate the lamp or move it back and forth vertically until the UVLAMP SIGNAL reading is at its maximum 4 Compare the UVLAMP SIGNAL reading to the information in Table 11 9 and follow the instructions there 05496 Rev A6 251 TROUBLESHOOTING amp REPAIR TML87 Instruction Manual Table 11 9 UV Lamp Signal Levels UVLAMP SIGNAL ACTION TO BE TAKEN 3500mVx200mvV No Action Required Adjust the UV reference detector potentiometer see Figure 11 12 until gt 4900 at any time UVLAMP SIGNAL reads approximately 3600mV before continuing to adjust the lamp position Adjust the UV reference detector potentiometer see Figure 11 12 until UVLAMP SIGNAL reads as close to 3500 as possible 600 Replace the lamp gt 3700 or 3300mV 6 gt 4 UV Reference Detector UV Adjustment Reference Pot Detector PCA Figure 11 12 Location of UV Reference Detector Potentiometer 5 Finger tighten the thumbscrew 11 6 3 6 Replacing the UV Lamp 1 Turn off the analyzer
251. essages will appear MODE FIELD MESSAGE FIELD LOCKI NG SCREW CONCENTRATION FIELD STATUS LED s FASTENER FASTENER e SAMPLE A RANGE 500 0 PPB lt TST TST gt CAL 502 400 0 SETUP TELEDYNE MONITOR LABS UV EFZOURESCENCE H2S ANALYZER MODEL TML87 KEY DEFINITIONS KEYBOARD ON OFF SWITCH Figure 3 10 Front Panel Layout 3 2 3 Warning Messages Because internal temperatures and other conditions may be outside of specified limits during the analyzer s warm up period the software will suppress most warning conditions for 60 minutes after power up 05496 Rev A6 23 Getting Started TML87 Instruction Manual If warning messages persist after 60 minutes investigate their cause using the troubleshooting guidelines in Chapter 11 The following table includes a brief description of the various warning messages that may appear Table 3 7 Possible Warning Messages at Start Up MESSAGE MEANING ANALOG CAL WARNING The instrument s A D circuitry or one of its analog outputs is not calibrat
252. ev A6 TML87 Instruction Manual TROUBLESHOOTING amp REPAIR Technical Assistance If this manual and its trouble shooting repair sections do not solve your problems technical assistance may be obtained from Teledyne Instruments Customer Service 35 Inverness Drive East Englewood CO 80112 Phone 1 800 846 6062 Fax 1 303 799 4853 Email tml support teledyne com Before you contact customer service fill out the problem report form in Appendix C which is also available online for electronic submission at http www teledyne ml com 05496 Rev A6 259 TROUBLESHOOTING amp REPAIR TML87 Instruction Manual User Notes 260 05496 Rev A6 87 Instruction Manual A Primer on Electro Static Discharge 12 0 A PRIMER ON ELECTRO STATIC DISCHARGE Teledyne Instruments considers the prevention of damage caused by the discharge of static electricity to be extremely important part of making sure that your analyzer continues to provide reliable service for a long time This section describes how static electricity occurs why it is so dangerous to electronic components and assemblies as well as how to prevent that damage from occurring 12 1 How Static Charges are Created Modern electronic devices such as the types used in the various electronic assemblies of your analyzer are very small require very little power and operate very quickly Unfortunately the same characteristics that allow them to do these things also makes
253. everal seconds 3 Place the item in the container 4 Sealthe container If using a bag fold the end over and fasten it with anti ESD tape Folding the open end over isolates the component s inside from the effects of static fields Leaving the bag open or simply stapling it shut without folding it closed prevents the bag from forming a complete protective envelope around the device User Notes 268 05496 Rev A6 TML87 Instruction Manual APPENDIX A Version Specific Software Documentation APPENDIX A Version Specific Software Documentation APPENDIX A 1 TML87 Software Menu Trees APPENDIX 2 TML87 Setup Variables for Serial 1 APPENDIX A 3 TML87 Warnings and Test Functions APPENDIX A 4 TML87 Signal I O Definitions APPENDIX A 5 TML87 iDAS Functions APPENDIX A 6 Terminal Command Designators APPENDIX A 7 Setting up Communications 05492 Rev C A 1 TML87 Instruction Manual APPENDI X A 1 TML87 Software Menu Trees Revision A 3A APPENDIX 1 TML87 Software Menu Trees Revision A 3A SAMPLE TEST CAL Only appear if reporting range TST TST is set for LOW HI GH AUTO range mode ZERO SPAN CONC UV LAMP LAMP RATIO STR LGT DARK PMT DARK LAMP SLOPE OFFSET aves TEST FUNCTIONS RCELL TEMP Viewable by user while BOX TEMP instrument is in PMT TEMP SAMPLE Mode 125 TEMP see Section 6 2 1 CONV TEMP TIME Figure 1 TEST
254. f selected full scale voltage Status Outputs 8 Status outputs from opto isolators Control Inputs 6 Control Inputs 3 defined 3 spare Serial 1 One 1 RS 232 One 1 RS 485 2 connecters in parallel Baud Rate 300 115200 Optional Ethernet Interface Certifications EN61326 1997 w A1 98 Class A FCC Part 15 Subpart B Section 15 107 Class A ICES 003 Class A ANSI C63 4 1992 amp AS NZS 3548 w A1 amp A2 97 Class A IEC 61010 1 90 A1 92 A2 95 For indoor use at altitudes s 2000m only 1 As defined by the USEPA Defined as twice the zero noise level by the USEPA 05496 Rev A6 Specifications and approvals TML87 Instruction Manual 2 2 EPA Equivalency Designation The TML87 Analyzer is designated as Reference Method Number EQOA XXXX XXX as per 40 CFR Part 53 when operated under the following conditions e Range Any range from 50 parts per billion ppb to 10 parts per million ppm Ambient temperature range of 5 to 40 e Line voltage range of 105 125 VAC or 220 240 VAC at 50 or 60 Hz e Sample filter Equipped with PTFE filter element in the internal filter assembly e Sample flow of 600 75 cc min e Vacuum pump internal or external capable of 14 Hg absolute pressure 1 or better e Software settings Dynamic span Dynamic zero Dilution factor AutoCal IND range Auto range Temp Pressure compensation OFF OFF
255. f the PMT used in the TML87 is usually set between 450 V and 800 V This parameter is viewable through the front panel as test function HVPS Section 6 2 1 For information on when and how to set this voltage see Section 11 6 3 The PMT is housed inside the PMT module assembly Figure 10 14 This assembly also includes the high voltage power supply required to drive the PMT an LED used by the instrument s optical test function a thermistor that measures the temperature of the PMT and various components of the PMT cooling system including the thermo electric cooler TEC 10 4 5 PMT Cooling System The performance of the analyzer s PMT is significantly affected by temperature Variations in PMT temperature are directly reflected in the signal output of the PMT The signal to noise ratio of the PMT output is radically influenced by temperature as well The warmer the PMT is the noisier its signal becomes until the noise renders the concentration signal useless To alleviate this problem a special cooling system exists that maintains the PMT temperature at a stable low level 10 4 5 1 Thermoelectric Cooler TEC The core of the TML87 PMT cooling system is a solid state heat pump called a thermoelectric cooler TEC Thermoelectric coolers transfer heat from a one side of a special set of semiconductor junctions to the other when a DC current is applied The heat is pumped at a rate proportional to the amount of current applied In the TML87 the TE
256. for troubleshooting tips Press ENTR to change the OFFSET amp SLOPE values for the H5S measurements M P CA RANGE 500 0 PPB 25 TST TST ENTR SPAN CONC EXIT g Pace previous menu M P CA RANGE 500 0 PPB H2S X XXX EXIT retums to the main EXIT SAMPLE display lt TST TST CONC Check the value of the SLOPE AND OFFSET test functions see Section 6 2 1 to verify that they are within the limits listed in Table 6 2 The TML87 analyzer is now ready for operation 28 05496 Rev A6 87 Instruction Manual Getting Started 3 3 2 Interferences for HAS MEASUREMENTS It should be noted that the fluorescence method for detecting H2S is subject to interference from a number of sources Since the TML87 converts H2S into SO and measures the UV fluorescence of the SO the most common source of interference is from other gases that fluoresce in a similar fashion to SO when exposed to UV Light such as poly nuclear aromatics PNA of which certain hydrocarbons such as meta xylene and naphthalene are the most pervasive The TML87 has been successfully tested for its ability to reject interference from most of these sources For a more detailed discussion of this topic see Section 10 2 7 User Notes 05496 Rev A6 29 Getting Started TML87 Instruction Manual User Notes 30 05496 Rev A6 87 Instr
257. g Range Modes If the analyzer is being operated in IND or AUTO Range mode then the High and Low ranges must be independently checked When the analyzer is in either Independent or Auto Range modes the user must run a separate calibration procedure for each range After pressing the CAL CALZ or CALS keys the user is prompted for the range that is to be calibrated as seen in the CALZ example below 05496 Rev A6 153 Calibration Procedures TML87 Instruction Manual SAMPLE 25 STB XXX X PPB XXX X lt TST TST gt CAL CALZ CALS SETUP SAMPLE RANGE TO CAL LOW LOW HIGH ENTR SETUP SAMPLE RANGE TO CAL HIGH LOW HIGH ENTR SETUP Wait until H2S STB falls below 0 5 ppb This may take several minutes Analyzer enters ZERO CAL Mode ZERO CALM H2S STB XXX XX PPB XXX X See Table 5 1 for Z S v Valve lt TST TST gt ZERO CONC EXIT this operating mode Continue Calibration as per Standard Procedure Once this selection is made the calibration procedure continues as previously described in Sections 7 2 through 7 6 The other range may be calibrated by starting over from the main SAMPLE display 7 7 1 Calibration With Remote Contact Closures Contact closures for controlling calibration and calibration checks are located on the rear panel CONTROL IN connector Instructions for setup and use of these contacts can be found in Section 6 12 2 When the appropriate
258. g from the RS 232 interface SERIAL NUMBER i Unique serial number for instrument the allowed Enclose value in double quotes character set Up when setting from the RS 232 to 100 interface characters long 12 RESET ENABLE OFF ON 12 bus automatic reset enable 05492 Rev C A 17 APPENDI X A 2 Setup Variables For Serial O Revision A 3A TML87 Instruction Manual CLOCK FORMAT S Any character in the allowed character set Up to 100 characters long Time of day clock format flags Enclose value in double quotes when setting from the RS 232 interface 96a Abbreviated weekday name 96b Abbreviated month name 96d Day of month as decimal number 01 31 96 H Hour in 24 hour format 00 23 1 Hour in 12 hour format 01 12 96j Day of year as decimal number 001 366 96 m Month as decimal number 01 12 96 M Minute as decimal number 00 59 965p A M P M indicator for 12 hour clock 96 S Second as decimal number 00 59 96w Weekday as decimal number 0 6 Sunday is O 96 y Year without century as decimal number 00 99 95 Y Year with century as decimal number 9596 Percent sign A 18 05492 Rev C TML87 Instruction Manual APPENDI X A 2 Setup Variables For Serial O Revision FACTORY OPT BitFlag 0 65535 Factory option flags Add value
259. ged are those of the concentration readings according to the SETUP RANGE settings Note that the iDAS does not keep track of the unit of each concentration value and iDAS data files may contain concentrations in multiple units if the unit was changed during data acquisition Each data parameter has user configurable functions that define how the data are recorded Table 6 21 05496 Rev A6 107 Operating Instructions TML87 Instruction Manual Table 6 21 iDAS Data Parameter Functions FUNCTION EFFECT PARAMETER Instrument specific parameter name SAMPLE MODE INST Records instantaneous reading Records average reading during reporting interval MIN Records minimum instantaneous reading during reporting interval MAX Records maximum instantaneous reading during reporting interval PRECISION Decimal precision of parameter value 0 4 STORE NUM OFF stores only the average default SAMPLES ON stores the average and the number of samples in each average for a parameter This property is only useful when the AVG sample mode is used Note that the number of samples is the same for all parameters in one channel and needs to be specified only for one of the parameters in that channel Users can specify up to 50 parameters per data channel the TML87 provides about 30 parameters However the number of parameters and channels is ultimately limited by available memory 6 11 1 3 iDAS Triggering Events Triggering eve
260. grams The iDAS is designed to be flexible Users have full control over the type length and reporting time of the data The iDAS permits users to access stored data through the instrument s front panel or its communication ports Using sensor e com data can even be retrieved automatically to a remote computer for further processing The principal use of the iDAS is logging data for trend analysis and predictive diagnostics which can assist in identifying possible problems before they affect the functionality of the analyzer The secondary use is for data analysis documentation and archival in electronic format To support the iDAS functionality Teledyne Instruments offers sensor e com a program that provides a visual interface for remote or local setup configuration and data retrieval of the iDAS Section 6 11 The sensor e com manual which is included with the program contains a more detailed description of the iDAS structure and configuration which is briefly described in this section 05496 Rev 6 105 Operating Instructions TML87 Instruction Manual The TML87 is configured with a basic iDAS configuration which is enabled by default New data channels are also enabled by default but each channel may be turned off for later or occasional use Note that iDAS operation is suspended while its configuration is edited through the front panel To prevent such data loss it is recommended to use the sensor e com graphical user in
261. gt data from the flash chip M200E NOX ANALYZER The instrument is L loading the analyzer BOOT PROGRESS XXXXX 50959 firmware The revision level of the firmware installed in your BOOT PROGRESS XXXXXXXX 80 analyzer is briefly displayed SOFTWARE REVISION 2 ree SAMPLE SYSTEM RESET SO2 X XXX Firmware TEST CAL T SETUP fully booted Press CLR to clear initial warming messages see Section 3 2 3 The analyzer should automatically switch to SAMPLE mode after completing the boot up sequence and start monitoring H2S gas 22 05496 Rev A6 TML87 Instruction Manual Getting Started 3 2 2 Warm Up The TML87 requires about 60 minutes warm up time before reliable H2S measurements can be taken During that time various portions of the instrument s front panel will behave as described in Table 3 6 below Table 3 6 Front Panel Display During System Warm Up NAME COLOR BEHAVIOR SIGNIFICANCE Concentration Displays current Field compensated H2S Concentration Mode Field N A Displays blinking Instrument is in sample mode but is still in the process of SAMPLE warming up STATUS LED S Sample Green On Unit is operating in sample mode front panel display is being updated Yelow Of The instruments calibration is not enabled Blinking The analyzer is warming up and hence out of specification for a fault free reading various warning m
262. h a default ID code of 101 To change this code see Section 6 10 1 User Notes 140 05496 Rev A6 TML87 Instruction Manual Calibration Procedures 7 0 CALIBRATION PROCEDURES This chapter describes the calibration procedures for the TML87 All of the methods described in this section can be initiated and controlled through the COM ports 7 1 Calibration Preparations The calibration procedures in this section assume that the analog output reporting range and units of measure reporting range mode and reporting range span have already been selected for the analyzer If this has not been done please do so before continuing Section 6 7 for instructions Also unless otherwise stated the procedures in this Chapter are written with the assumption that the TML87 is being used in its default configuration as an H2S analyzer The same methods and setups can be followed when the instrument is configured for SO measurement by substituting SO span gas for the H2S span gas listed in the procedure For analyzers configured H2S gt SO multigas mode see Section 7 8 7 1 1 Required Equipment Supplies and Expendables Calibration of the TML87 analyzer requires a certain amount of equipment and supplies These include but are not limited to the following e Zero air source e Hydrogen sulfide span gas source e Gas lines all gas line materials should be Teflon type or glass A recording device such as a strip char
263. hain don t forget to remove JP2 pins 21 lt gt 22 the Multidrop PCA on the analyzer that was previously the last instrument in the chain Close the instrument Using straight through DB9 male DB9 Female cables interconnect the host and the analyzers as shown in Figure 6 13 100 05496 Rev A6 87 Instruction Manual Operating Instructions KEY vy Female DB9 Male DB9 Host RS 232 port Analyzer Analyzer Analyzer Last Analyzer COM2 COM2 COM2 Make Sure Jumper between JP2 pins 21 lt gt 22 is installed Figure 6 13 RS232 Multidrop PCA Host Analyzer Interconnect Diagram 6 10 8 COM Port Communication Modes Each of the analyzer s serial ports can be configured to operate in a number of different modes which are listed in Table 6 18 and which can be combined by adding the Mode ID numbers For example quiet mode computer mode and internet enabled mode would carry a combined mode ID of 1 the standard configuration on the TML87 2 port Note that each COM port needs to be configured independently 05496 Rev A6 101 Operating Instructions TML87 Instruction Manual Table 6 18 COMM Port Communication modes MODE ID DESCRIPTION QUIET Quiet mode suppresses any feedback from the analyzer iDAS reports and warning 1 messages to the remote device and is typically used when the port is communicating with a computer program s
264. he analyzer to continue measuring H5S accurately and reliability This material is capable of efficiently scrubbing SO for up to 1000 ppm hours This means that if the SO content of the sample gas is typically around 100 ppb the scrubber will function for approximately 10 000 hours a little over 13 months If however the typical ambient SO level of the sample gas is 250 ppb the scrubber would only last for approximately 4000 hours or about 5 months 9 3 3 1 Predicting When the SO Scrubber Should Be Replaced To determine how long the SO scrubber will operate efficiently Measure the amount of SO in the sample gas If your TML87 has the multigas measurement options activated this can be done by following instructions found in Section 6 8 1 and selecting MEASURE MODE SO e Let the analyzer operate for 30 minutes then note the SO concentration Divide 1 000 by the SO concentration in ppm EXAMPLE If the SO concentration is 125 ppb Operational hours 1000 ppm hr 0 125 ppm Operational hours 8000 hrs 176 05496 Rev A6 TML87 Instruction Manual Instrument Maintenance 9 3 3 2 Checking the Function of the SO Scrubber To check to see if your SO scrubber is operating properly 1 With the analyzer set to HS measurement mode introduce gas mixture into the sample gas stream that includes SO at a concentration of at least 20 of the reporting range currently selected see Section 6 7 3 For example if the analy
265. he light emitted by the excitation UV lamp passes through a bandpass filter that screens out photons with wavelengths outside the spectrum required to excite SO into 50 Figure 10 4 10 2 5 2 PMT Optical Filter The PMT used in the TML87 reacts to a wide spectrum of light which includes much of the visible spectrum and most of the UV spectrum Even though the 214 nm light used to excite the SO is focused away from the PMT some of it scatters in the direction of the PMT as it interacts with the sample gas A second optical bandpass filter placed between the sample chamber see Figure 10 2 and the PMT strips away light outside of the fluorescence spectrum of decaying SO see Figure 10 5 including reflected UV form the source lamp and other stray light 190 05496 Rev A6 87 Instruction Manual Theory Of Operation PMT OPTICAL FILTER BANDWI DTH 10 WES o m M 10 wu 1l wl 1L E 10 1 1 _1__ E LN 23 EZ 3 85 2 107 4 se at d 10 _ O OOO 50 FLUORESCENT SPECTRUM 100 200 300 400 500 WAVELENGTH nm Figure 10 5 PMT Optical Filter Bandwidth 10 2 6 Optical Lenses Two optical lenses are used to focus and optimize the path of light through the sample chamber If source UV is unfocused PMT When source UV is focused PMT receives fluorescence from area and Ref
266. he vacuum manifold Disconnect the pneumatic line Unscrew the NPT fitting i A Gas Line fitting X D g TT Ed lt j Spring lt Sintered Filter ed O Ring lt Critical Flow Orifice lt _ O Ring lt Vacuum Manifold Figure 9 4 Critical Flow Orifice Assembly Take out the components of the assembly a spring a sintered filter two O rings and the orifice e You may need to use a scribe or pressure from the vacuum port to get the parts out of the manifold Discard the two O rings and the sintered filter Replace the critical flow orifice Let the part dry Re assemble the parts as shown in Figure 9 4 using a new filter and o rings Reinstall the NPT fitting and connect all tubing Power up the analyzer and allow it to warm up for 60 minutes Perform a leak check See Section 11 5 1 182 05496 Rev A6 TML87 Instruction Manual Instrument Maintenance 9 3 8 Checking for Light Leaks When re assembled or operated improperly the TML87 can develop small leaks around the PMT which let stray light from the analyzer surrounding into the PMT housing To find such light leaks follow the procedures below CAUTION This procedure can only be carried out with the analyzer running and its cover removed This procedure should only be carried out by qualified personnel 1 Scrollthe TEST functions to PMT 2 Supply zero gas to the analyzer 3 With the instrum
267. her the electronic communication channels are operating properly Verify that the DC power supplies are operating properly by checking the voltage test points on the relay board Note that the analyzer s DC power wiring is color coded and these colors match the color of the corresponding test points on the relay board e Suspect a leak first Customer service data indicate that half of all problems are eventually traced to leaks in the pneumatic system of the analyzer including the external pump the source of zero air or span 05496 Rev A6 221 TROUBLESHOOTING amp REPAIR TML87 Instruction Manual gases or the sample gas delivery system Check for gas flow problems such as clogged or blocked internal external gas lines damaged seals punctured gas lines a damaged pump diaphragm etc e Follow the procedures defined in Section 11 5 for confirming that the analyzer s basic components working power supplies CPU relay board keyboard PMT cooler etc See Figure 3 8 for general layout of components and sub assemblies in the analyzer See the wiring interconnect drawing and interconnect list see Appendix D 11 1 1 Fault Diagnosis with Warning Messages The most common and or serious instrument failures will result in a warning message displayed on the front panel Table 11 1 contains a list of warning messages along with a list of possible faults that might be responsible for the warning condition It should be noted that if
268. ibed in Section 11 6 3 1 Hex Screws Bottom two hidden from view Figure 11 7 Hex Screw Between Lens Housing and Sample chamber 2 Remove the sample chamber from the PMT lens and filter housing by unscrewing the 4 hex screws that fasten the chamber to the housing 3 Remove the four lens cover screws 05496 Rev A6 247 TROUBLESHOOTING amp REPAIR TML87 Instruction Manual Lens Cover Screws Figure 11 8 UV Lens Housing Filter Housing Remove the lens filter cover Carefully remove the PMT lens and set it aside on soft lint free cloth Remove the 3 piece lens filter spacer B sm Carefully remove the PMT filter and set it aside on soft lint free cloth Housing Hex Screws uL Ath hidden from view A A Housing A Hex Screws PMT Lens PMT Filter UV Lens Filter Housing 3 Lens Filter Spacer Te 3 pieces fv Lens Filter Cover Cover Screws Figure 11 9 PMT UV Filter Housing Disassembled 8 Using a lint free cloth dampened with distilled water clean the lens the filter and all of the housing assembly mechanical parts 9 Dry everything with a 2nd lint free cloth 10 Reassemble the lens filter housing see Figure 11 9 248 05496 Rev A6 TML87 Instruction Manual TROUBLESHOOTING amp REPAIR 11 Reattach the lens filter housing to the sample chamber 12 Reattach the sample chamber to the PMT housing 13 Reinstall the se
269. ications where the quality of gas in a smoke stack is being tested and the sampling method used to remove the gas from the stack dilutes the gas Once the degree of dilution is known this feature allows the user to add an appropriate scaling factor to the analyzer s SO concentration calculation so that the measurement range and concentration values displayed on the instrument s front panel display and reported via the analog and serial outputs reflect the undiluted values Contact Teledyne Instruments Customer Service personnel for information on activating this feature Instructions for using the dilution ratio option can be found in Section 6 7 8 44 05496 Rev A6 TML87 Instruction Manual Optional Hardware and Software 5 10 Extended Warranty Options 92 amp 93 Two options are available for extending the standard manufacturer s warranty Both options have to be specified upon ordering the analyzer Option Number Description Extends warranty to cover a two 2 year period from the date of OPT 92 purchase Extends warranty to cover a five 5 year period from the date of OPT 93 purchase User Notes 05496 Rev A6 45 Optional Hardware and Software TML87 Instruction Manual User Notes 46 05496 Rev A6 TML87 Instruction Manual Operating Instructions 6 0 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS To assist in navigating the analyzer s software a series of menu trees can be found in Ap
270. ify add or delete a parameter follow the instruction shown in section 6 11 2 2 then press YES will delete all data in that entire channel Moves the display between available Parameters Inserts a new Parameter before the currently displayed Parameter From the DATA ACQUISITION menu Edit Data Channel Menu SETUP X X 0 2 4032 R z Exits to the main Data Acquisition PRNT EXIT menu PREV NEXT INS DEL EDIT SETUP X X NAME CONC SET SET EDIT PRINT Press SET gt key until SETUP X X PARAMETERS 2 SET SET EDIT PRINT NO returns to the previous menu and retains all data SETUP EDIT PARAMS DELETE DATA YES NO Edit Data Parameter Menu SETUP X X 0 PARAM S2SCN1 MODE AVG Exits to the main Data Acquisition INS DEL EDIT EXIT menu PREV NEXT Use to configure the functions for this Parameter Deletes the Parameter currently displayed 114 05496 Rev A6 87 Instruction Manual Operating Instructions To configure the parameters for a specific data parameter press FROM THE EDIT DATA PARAMETER MENU see previous section SETUP 0 PARAM S2SCN1 MODE AVG PREV NEXT INS DEL EDIT EXIT SETUP PARAMETERS S2SCN1 SET EDIT EXIT SETUP PARAMETERS S2SCN1 PREV NEXT ENTR EXIT Cycle through list of available Parameters SET SET EDIT EXIT SETUP SAMPLE MODE INST
271. ify gas streams These sensors are located on a printed circuit assembly called the pneumatic pressure flow sensor board 10 3 7 1 Sample Pressure Sensor An absolute pressure transducer plumbed to the input of the analyzer s sample chamber is used to measure the pressure of the sample gas before it enters the chamber This upstream pressure is used to validate the critical flow condition 2 1 pressure ratio through the instrument s critical flow orifice Section 10 3 3 1 Also if the temperature pressure compensation TPC feature is turned on Section 10 7 3 the output of this sensor is also used to supply pressure data for that calculation 05496 Rev A6 197 Theory Of Operation TML87 Instruction Manual The actual pressure measurement is viewable through the analyzer s front panel display as the test function PRESS 10 3 7 2 Sample Flow Sensor A thermal mass flow sensor is used to measure the sample flow through the analyzer This sensor is also mounted on the pneumatic pressure flow sensor board upstream of the sample chamber The flow rate is monitored by the CRT which issues a warning message SAMP FLOW WARN if the flow rate is too high or too low The flow rate of the sample gas is viewable via the front panel as the SAMP FL test function 198 05496 Rev A6 87 Instruction Manual Theory Of Operation 10 4 Electronic Operation I ETHERNET
272. in 1 of full scale Common causes for non linearity are e Leaks in the pneumatic system Leaks can add a constant volume of ambient air zero air or span gas to the current sample gas stream which may be changing in concentration as the linearity test is performed Check for leaks as described in Section 11 5 1 e The calibration device is in error Check flow rates and concentrations particularly when using low concentrations If a mass flow calibrator is used and the flow is less than 10 of the full scale flow on either flow controller you may need to purchase lower concentration standards e The standard gases may be mislabeled as to type or concentration Labeled concentrations may be outside the certified tolerance The sample delivery system may be contaminated Check for dirt in the sample lines or sample chamber Calibration gas source be contaminated e Dilution air contains sample or span gas e Sample inlet may be contaminated with H5S exhaust from this or other analyzers Verify proper venting of the pump exhaust e Span gas overflow is not properly vented and creates a back pressure on the sample inlet port Also if the span gas is not vented at all and does not supply enough sample gas the analyzer may be evacuating the sample line Make sure to create and properly vent excess span gas 05496 Rev A6 231 TROUBLESHOOTING amp REPAIR TML87 Instruction Manual e If the instrument is equipped with an int
273. ing TML87 TEST Functions The most common instrument failures will be reported as a warning on the analyzer s front panel and through the COM ports Section 11 1 1 explains how to use these messages to troubleshoot problems Section 3 2 3 shows how to view and clear warning messages Table 6 3 lists all warning messages for the current version of software 50 05496 Rev A6 TML87 Instruction Manual Operating Instructions Table 6 3 List of Warning Messages MESSAGE MEANING ANALOG CAL WARNING The instrument s A D circuitry or one of its analog outputs is not calibrated BOX TEMP WARNING The temperature inside the TML87 chassis is outside the specified limits CANNOT DYN SPAN Remote span calibration failed while the dynamic span feature was set to turned on CANNOT DYN ZERO Remote zero calibration failed while the dynamic zero feature was set to turned on CONFIG INITIALIZED Configuration was reset to factory defaults or was erased CONV TEMP WARNING The temperature of the H2S gt SO catalytic converter is outside its optimal operating range DARK CAL WARNING Dark offset above limit specified indicating that too much stray light is present in the sample chamber DATA INITIALIZED iDAS data storage was erased FRONT PANEL WARN Firmware is unable to communicate with the front panel HVPS WARNING High voltage power supply for the PMT is outside of specifie
274. ions egarding this setting PREV NEXT JUMP EDIT PRNT EXIT Lx SETUP X X 50 0 DegC PREV NEXT JUMP PRNT EXIT SETUP X X 50 0 DegC PREV NEXT JUMP PRNT EXIT SETUP X X 5 DYN ZERO ON PREV NEXT JUMP EDIT PRNT EXIT SETUP X X 6 DYN SPAN ON PREV NEXT JUMP EDIT PRNT EXIT SETUP X X 7 CONC PRECUISION 1 PREV NEXT JUMP EDIT PRNT EXIT SETUP X X 8 CLOCK_ADJ 0 Sec Day PREV NEXT JUMP EDIT PRNT EXIT SSS N SETUP X X 1 DAS_HOLD_OFF 15 0 Minutes NEXT JUMP EDIT PRNT EXIT c SETUP X X 1 TPC_ENABLE ON e SETUP X X DAS_HOLD_OFF 15 0 Minutes ENTR EXIT Toggle these keys to change setting SETUP X X TPC ENABLE ON ON ENTR EXIT Toggle these keys to change setting DO NOT change theses set points unless specifically instructed to by TML Customer Service SETUP X X DYN_ZERO ON ON ENTR EXIT Toggle this key to change setting SETUP X X DYN SPAN ON ON ENTR EXIT Toggle this key to change setting e SETUP X X CONC PRECUISION 3 AUTO 0 2 3 ENTR EXIT Toggle these keys to change setting SETUP X X CLOCK ADJ 0 Sec Day ENTR EXIT Toggle these keys to change setting 05496 Rev A6 67 Operating Instructions TML87 Instruction Manual 6 8 1 Setting the Gas Measurement Mode If the 87 is equipped with
275. isition PREV NEXT INS DEL EDIT PRNT EXIT Menu Exports the configuration of all data channels to RS 232 interface Deletes The Data Channel currently being displayed SETUP X X Exits returns to the previous Menu SET SET EDIT PRNT q Allows to edit the channel name see next key sequence J Reports the configuration of current data channels to the RS 232 ports When editing the data channels the top line of the display indicates some of the configuration parameters For example the display line 0 CONC ATIMER 4 800 translates to the following configuration Channel No 0 NAME CONC TRIGGER EVENT ATIMER 05496 Rev A6 111 Operating Instructions TML87 Instruction Manual PARAMETERS Four parameters are included in this channel EVENT This channel is set up to record 800 data points To edit the name of a data channel follow the above key sequence and then press FROM THE PREVIOUS KEY SEQUENCE SETUP X X SET SET EDIT PRINT SETUP ENTR accepts the new string and returns to the previous menu EXIT ignores the new string and returns to the previous menu Press each key repeatedly to cycle through the available character set 0 9 A Z space amp _ 9 lt gt 1 112 05496 6 TML87 Instruction Manual Operati
276. it may not be duplicated without proper authorization A Teledyne Technologies Company APPROVALS DATE DRAWN Sch Bursting UV Lamp Drv Used for PCA 04692 5 1 03 CHECKED DRAWING NO REVISION 04693 APPROVED LAST MOD aa 2 2004 2 3 5 6 D10 VDRIVE D lt VDRIVE gt DIODE C20 R47 19 R42 1000 uF ACOMP 2 100K N I 25 5K R23 R46 51K A 50K Ol VREF gt 5uH PN3645 PNP 51K LAMP FDBACK DOR FB Ik pA R37 VCOMP l Q Z 27 171268 2k en C15 068 uF 12V R44 C10 n 0 1 uF 0 1 uF Title Sch Bursting UV Lamp Drv TML50 60 87 Size Number Revision 04693 B Date 2 Jun 2004 Sheet ofZ File NAPCBMGR RELEASED 04691CC source D S diidb 2 3 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 15 15 15 15 F 15 15 D1 R34 2 00K AA R3 c12 R22 C14 15 C4 R12 RI7 R4 1 16 CIT 02 0 1uF 49 9 22uF 22uF 0 1uF gt 49 9 R7 L00K a UN 1 00K R5 100 C2 0 1uF R31 100 um 0 luF 0 R29 1 00K 2 R24 1 00K MTB30P6V 604K LMC6464BIM Los MTB30P6V LMC6464BIM UMP Open for TML41 1 ER Closed for M100A R13 20 0K r 1 15 R26 20 0K R25 20 0K CB gl TP4 1 olur 20 0K R15 2 00K 35 0 2
277. itch that places the instrument in maintenance mode When present the switch is accessed by opening the hinged front panel and is located on the rearward facing side of the display keyboard driver PCA on the left side near the particulate filter When in maintenance mode the instrument ignores all commands received via the COMM ports that alter the operation state of the instrument This includes all calibration commands diagnostic menu commands and the reset instrument command The instrument continues to measure concentration and send data when requested This feature is of particular use for instruments connected to Multidrop or Hessen protocol networks 5 9 2 Second Language Switch Teledyne Instruments analyzers are equipped with a switch that activates an alternate set of display messages in a language other than the instrument s default language This switch is accessed by opening the hinged front panel and is located on the rearward facing side of the display keyboard driver PCA on the right side To activate this feature the instrument must also have a specially programmed Disk on Chip containing the second language Contact Teledyne Instruments Customer Service personnel for more information 5 9 3 Dilution Ratio Option The dilution ratio feature is a software option that is designed for applications where the sample gas is diluted before being analyzed by the TML87 Typically this occurs in continuous emission monitoring CEM appl
278. k on Chip as well as transmitted via the analyzer s communication ports The REPORT PERIOD may be set from the front panel If the INST sample mode is selected the instrument stores and reports an instantaneous reading of the selected parameter at the end of the chosen REPORT PERIOD In AVG MIN or MAX sample modes the settings for the SAMPLE PERIOD and the REPORT PERIOD determine the number of data points used each time the average minimum or maximum is calculated stored and reported to the COMM ports The actual sample readings are not stored past the end of the of the chosen REPORT PERIOD Also the SAMPLE PERIOD and REPORT PERIOD intervals are synchronized to the beginning and end of the appropriate interval of the instruments internal clock If SAMPLE PERIOD were set for one minute the first reading would occur at the beginning of the next full minute according to the instrument s internal clock e f the REPORT PERIOD were set for of one hour the first report activity would occur at the beginning of the next full hour according to the instrument s internal clock EXAMPLE Given the above settings if iDAS were activated at 7 57 35 the first sample would occur at 7 58 and the first report would be calculated at 8 00 consisting of data points for 7 58 7 59 and 8 00 During the next hour from 8 01 to 9 00 the instrument will take a sample reading every minute and include 60 sample readings When the STORE NUM SAMPLES feature is t
279. l take its place after several attempts to clear it d Once the last warning has been the message may indicate a d th real problem and not an artifact Make sure warning messages are cleared the analyzer returns to of the warm up period not due to real problems SAMPLE mode Figure 6 3 Viewing and Clearing TML87 WARNING Messages 6 3 Calibration Mode Pressing the CAL key switches the TML87 into multi point calibration mode In this mode the user can calibrate the instrument or check the instrument s calibration with the use of calibrated zero or span gases If the instrument includes either the zero span valve option or IZS option the display will also include CALZ and CALS keys Pressing either of these keys also puts the instrument into multipoint calibration mode e The CALZ key is used to initiate a calibration of the zero point e The CALS key is used to calibrate the span point of the analyzer It is recommended that this span calibration is performed at 90 of full scale of the analyzer s currently selected reporting range Because of their critical importance and complexity calibration operations are described in detail in Chapter 7 of this manual For more information concerning the zero span zero span shutoff and IZS valve options see Section 5 4 6 3 1 SETUP PASS Calibration Password Security The TML87 calibration functions may be password protected to prevent inadvertent adjustments When
280. led away by the workstation s grounded protective mat Do not pick up tools that may be carrying static charges while also touching or holding an ESD Sensitive Device e Only lay tools or ESD sensitive devices and assemblies on the conductive surface of your workstation Never lay them down on any non ESD preventative surfaces Place any static sensitive devices or assemblies in anti static storage bags or bins and close the bag or bin before unplugging your wrist strap Disconnecting your wrist strap is always the last action taken before leaving the workbench 266 05496 Rev A6 87 Instruction Manual A Primer on Electro Static Discharge 12 4 2 3 Transferring Components from Rack To Bench and Back When transferring a sensitive device from an installed Teledyne Instruments analyzer to a Anti ESD workbench or back l Follow the instructions listed above for working at the instrument rack and work station 2 Never carry the component or assembly without placing it in a anti ESD bag or bin 3 Before using the bag or container allow any surface charges on it to dissipate f you are at the instrument rack hold the bag in one hand while your wrist strap is connected to a ground point f you are at a anti ESD workbench lay the container down on the conductive work surface e In either case wait several seconds 4 Place the item in the container 5 Sealthe container If using a bag fold the end over and faste
281. lem being investigated 11 5 1 Detailed Pressure Leak Check Obtain a leak checker similar to Teledyne Instruments part number 01960 which contains a small pump shut off valve and pressure gauge to create both over pressure and vacuum Alternatively a tank of pressurized gas with the two stage regulator adjusted to x 15 psi a shutoff valve and pressure gauge may be used CAUTION Once tube fittings have been wetted with soap solution under a pressurized system do not apply or re apply vacuum as this will cause soap solution to be sucked into the instrument contaminating inside surfaces Do not exceed 15 PSI when pressurizing the system 1 Turn OFF power to the instrument and remove the instrument cover 05496 Rev A6 233 TROUBLESHOOTING amp REPAIR TML87 Instruction Manual 2 Install a leak checker or a tank of gas compressed oil free air or nitrogen as described above on the sample inlet at the rear panel 3 Pressurize the instrument with the leak checker or tank gas allowing enough time to fully pressurize the instrument through the critical flow orifice Check each tube connection fittings hose clamps with soap bubble solution looking for fine bubbles Once the fittings have been wetted with soap solution do not re apply vacuum as it will draw soap solution into the instrument and contaminate it Do not exceed 15 psi pressure 4 lf the instrument has the zero and span valve option the normally c
282. light la is la I 1 ax SO yj Equation 9 3 Where lo Intensity of the excitation UV light a The absorption coefficient of SO a constant 50 Concentration of SO the sample chamber X The distance between the UV source and the SO molecule s being affected path length 186 05496 Rev A6 87 Instruction Manual Theory Of Operation The second stage of this reaction occurs after the SO reaches its excited state SO2 Because the system will seek the lowest available stable energy state the 5 molecule quickly returns to its ground state Equation 10 3 by giving off the excess energy in the form of a photon hv The wavelength of this fluoresced light is also in the ultraviolet band but at a longer lower energy wavelength centered at 330nm SO gt SO Equation 9 4 The amount of detectable UV given off by the decay of the SO is affected by the rate at which this reaction occurs k F k SO Equation 9 5 Where F the amount of fluorescent light given off k The rate at which the SO decays into SO SO Amount of excited SO in the sample chamber So F k SO o SO Equation9 6 Finally the function K is affected by the temperature of the gas The warmer the gas the faster the individual molecules decay back into their ground state and the more photons of UV light are given off per unit of time In
283. ll not operating properly there may be a problem with one of the instrument s switching power supplies which convert AC power to 5 and 15 V PS1 as well as 12 V DC power PS2 The supplies can either have no DC output at all or a noisy output fluctuating To assist tracing DC Power Supply problems the wiring used to connect the various printed circuit assemblies and DC powered components and the associated test points on the relay board follow a standard color coding scheme as defined in Table 11 4 Table 11 4 DC Power Test Point and Wiring Color Code NAME TEST POINT COLOR DEFINITION DGND 1 Black Digital ground 5V 2 Red AGND 3 Green Analog ground 15V 4 Blue 15V 5 Yellow 12V 6 Purple 12R 7 Orange 12 V return ground line A voltmeter should be used to verify that the DC voltages are correct as listed in Table 11 5 An oscilloscope in AC mode and with band limiting turned on can be used to evaluate if the supplies are excessively noisy gt 100 mV peak to peak Table 11 5 DC Power Supply Acceptable Levels CHECK RELAY BOARD TEST POINTS VOLTAGE From Test Point To Test Point MIN V MAX V Name Name PS1 5 DGND 1 5 2 4 80 5 25 PS1 15 AGND 3 15 4 13 5 16 0 PS1 15 AGND 3 15V 5 14 0 16 0 PS1 AGND AGND 3 DGND 1 0 05 0 05 PS1 Chassis DGND 1 Chassis N A 0 05 0 05 PS2 12 12V Ret 6 12V 7 11 8 12 5 PS2 DGND 12V Ret 6 DGND 1 0 0
284. ll return from high range back to low range once the H2S concentration falls below 75 of the low range span When set up to measure a single gas H2S or SO in AUTO Range mode the instrument reports the same data in the same range on both the A1 and A2 outputs and automatically switches both outputs between ranges as described above To select auto range mode and set the upper span limits for the high and low ranges press the following keystroke sequence lt TST TST CAL SAMPLE RANGE 500 0 PPB H2S XXX X m SETUP SAMPLE ENTER SETUP PASS 818 SETUP X X PRI MARY SETUP MENU CFG DAS 55 MODE SET UNIT SETUP X X RANGE CONTROL MENU SETUP X X SNGL IND AUTO RANGE MODE SNGL ENTR EXIT Y RANGE MODE AUTO SETUP X X ENTR EXIT SNGL IND AUTO RANGE CONTROL MENU EXIT x 2 returns to the main MODE SET UNIT SAMPLE display LOW RANGE 500 0 Conc SETUP X X Toggle the numeral ENTR EXIT keys to set the LOW and HIGH range value ENTR accepts the new setting EXIT ignores the new setting 0 HIGH RANGE 500 0 Conc 0 0 5 0 0 0 ENTR EXIT 05496 Rev A6 63 Operating Instructions TML87 Instruction Manual 6 7 7 Range Units The TML87 can display concentrations in parts per billion 10 mols per mol PPB parts per million 10 mols
285. lled by a proportional temperature controller located on the preamplifier board Voltages applied to the cooler element vary from 0 1 to 12 VDC The temperature set point hard wired into the preamplifier board will vary by about 1 C due to component tolerances The actual temperature will be maintained to within 0 19 C around that set point On power up of the analyzer the front panel enables the user to watch that temperature drop from about ambient temperature down to its set point of 6 8 C If the temperature fails to drop after 20 minutes there is a problem in the cooler circuit If the control circuit on the preamplifier board is faulty a temperature of 1 C is reported 11 6 Repair Procedures This section contains some procedures that may need to be performed when a major component of the analyzer requires repair or replacement Note that replacement procedures that are discussed in detail in Chapter 9 Maintenance are not listed here Servicing of circuit components requires electrostatic discharge protection i e ESD grounding straps mats and containers Failure to use ESD protection when working with electronic assemblies will void the instrument warranty 11 6 1 Disk on Chip Replacement Replacing the Disk on Chip DOC will cause all of the instrument configuration parameters to be lost unless the replacement chip carries the exact same firmware version If the analyzer is equipped with at least one EEPROM flash chip the
286. losed ports on each valve should also be separately checked Connect the leak checker to the normally closed ports and check with soap bubble solution 5 Ifthe analyzer is equipped with IZS Option connect the leak checker to the Dry Air inlet and check with soap bubble solution 6 Once the leak has been located and repaired the leak down rate of the indicated pressure should be less than 1 in Hg A 0 4 psi in 5 minutes after the pressure is turned off 7 Clean soap solution from all surfaces re connect the sample and exhaust lines and replace the instrument cover Restart the analyzer 11 5 2 Performing a Sample Flow Check CAUTION Use a separate calibrated flow meter capable of measuring flows between 0 and 1000 cm min to measure the gas flow rate though the analyzer Do not use the built in flow measurement viewable from the front panel of the instrument Sample flow checks are useful for monitoring the actual flow of the instrument to monitor drift of the internal flow measurement A decreasing actual sample flow may point to slowly clogging pneumatic paths most likely critical flow orifices or sintered filters To perform a sample flow check l Disconnect the sample inlet tubing from the rear panel SAMPLE port shown in Figure 3 2 2 Attach the outlet port of a flow meter to the sample inlet port on the rear panel Ensure that the inlet to the flow meter is at atmospheric pressure 3 The sample flow measur
287. ly handle or work on all electronic assemblies at a properly set up ESD station Setting up an ESD safe workstation need not be complicated A protective mat properly tied to ground and a wrist strap are all that is needed to create a basic anti ESD workstation see Figure 12 2 Protective Mat Wrist Strap Ground Point Figure 12 2 Basic anti ESD Work Station 264 05496 Rev A6 87 Instruction Manual A Primer on Electro Static Discharge For technicians who work in the field special lightweight and portable anti ESD kits are available from most suppliers of ESD protection gear These include everything needed to create a temporary anti ESD work area anywhere e Always wear an Anti ESD wrist strap when working on the electronic assemblies of your analyzer An anti ESD wrist strap keeps the person wearing it at or near the same potential as other grounded objects in the work area and allows static charges to dissipate before they can build to dangerous levels Anti ESD wrist straps terminated with alligator clips are available for use in work areas where there is no available grounded plug Also anti ESD wrist straps include a current limiting resistor usually around one meg ohm that protects you should you accidentally short yourself to the instrument s power supply Simply touching a grounded piece of metal is insufficient While this may temporarily blee
288. mended Standards for Establishing 163 8 1 4 EPA Calibration Using Permeation 163 8 1 5 Calibration Frequehcy iii oi erc ete d eine qe EMT Pri Pee te e HER RD 163 81 6 Record Keeping 163 05496 6 TML87 Instruction Manual Table of Contents 8 1 7 Summary of Quality Assurance nennen enne enne enne nennen nennen nennen 164 8 2 Level 1 Calibrations versus Level 2 nennen nnne 164 98 9 ZERO and SPAN Checks rede RA rrt RR ESPERE 165 8 3 1 Zero opan Check Procedures eei eerie ee tee lubes eee ee 166 8 4 Precisions Calibration Procedures and 166 8 4 1 Precision Calibration 8 4 2 Precision Check nero Rei D ein ND 8 5 Dynamic Multipoint Span Calibration 167 8 6 Special Calibration Requirements for Independent Range or Auto 168 8 7 MM EE 168 9 0 INSTRUMENT MAINTENANCE ane ritiro ine eran Inn iae rea sna Ennis in ch ca sanie ea 171 9 1 Maintenance Schedule n se
289. ment and all of its components are connected 2 Pause for a second or two to allow any static charges to bleed away 3 Openthe casing of the analyzer and begin work Up to this point the closed metal casing of your analyzer has isolated the components and assemblies inside from any conducted or induces static charges 4 If you must remove a component from the instrument do not lay it down on a non ESD preventative surface where static charges may lie in wait 5 Only disconnect your wrist strap after you have finished work and closed the case of the analyzer 12 4 2 2 Working at a Anti ESD Workbench When working on an electronic assembly of an instrument while it is resting on an anti ESD workbench 1 Plug your anti ESD wrist strap into the grounded receptacle of the workstation before touching any items on the workstation and while standing at least a foot or so away This will allow any charges you are carrying to bleed away through the ground connection of the workstation and prevent discharges due to field effects and induction from occurring Pause for a second or two to allow any static charges to bleed away Only open any anti ESD storage bins or bags containing sensitive devices or assemblies after you have plugged your wrist strap into the workstation e Lay the bag or bin on the workbench surface e Before opening the container wait several seconds for any static charges on the outside surface of the container to be b
290. ment and are useful during troubleshooting Section 11 1 2 They can also be recorded in one of the iDAS channels Section 6 11 for data analysis To view the test functions press one of the lt TST TST gt keys repeatedly in either direction 48 05496 Rev A6 TML87 Instruction Manual Operating Instructions Table 6 2 Test Functions Defined DISPLAY PARAMETER UNITS DESCRIPTION RANGE Range PPB PPM The full scale limit at which the reporting range of the analyzers ANALOG zE UGM amp MGM OUTPUTS are currently set THIS IS NOT the physical range of the instrument Range1 If IND or AUTO Range modes have been selected two RANGE functions Range2 will appear one for each range H2S STB Stability mV Standard deviation of O4 Concentration readings Data points are recorded every ten seconds The calculation uses the last 25 data points The current pressure of the sample gas as it enters the sample chamber PRES Sample Pressure in Hg A measured between the 5 and Auto Zero valves The flow rate of the sample gas through the sample chamber This value is 3 SAMP FL Sample Flow cm min cc m not measured but calculated from the sample pressure PMT PMT Signal mV The raw output voltage of the PMT NORM NORMALIZED PMT mV The output voltage of the PMT after normalization for auto zero offset and PMT Signal temperature pressure compensation if activated UV LAMP HV
291. menu This test sends a string of 256 w characters to the selected COM port While the test is running the red LED on the rear panel of the analyzer should flicker To initiate the test press the following key sequence SAMPEE RANGE 515000 FRB VIMUS SETUP X X COMMUNICATIONS MENU Select which COM port to Toles GAL SETUP ID COM2 EXIT EXE LA SAMPLE ENTER SETUP PASS 818 BET P XX COMI MODE 8 1 8 ENTR SET EDIT EXIT SETUPX X PRIMARY SETUP MENU SETUPXX COM1 BAUD RATE 19200 CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE EXIT SET SET EDIT EXIT SETUP X X SECONDARY SETUP MENU E SETUPXX COM1 TEST PORT COMM VARS DIAG EXIT EXIT returns to COMM menu SETUP X X TRANSMITTING TO COM1 Test runs automatically lt SET TEST EXIT 6 11 Using the Data Acquisition System iDAS The TML87 analyzer contains a flexible and powerful internal data acquisition system iDAS that enables the analyzer to store concentration and calibration data as well as a host of diagnostic parameters The iDAS of the TML87 can store up to about one million data points which can depending on individual configurations cover days weeks or months of valuable measurements The data are stored in non volatile memory and are retained even when the instrument is powered off Data are stored in plain text format for easy retrieval and use in common data analysis programs such as spreadsheet type pro
292. more than two or three warning messages occur at the same time it is often an indication that some fundamental analyzer sub system power supply relay board motherboard has failed rather than an indication of the specific failures referenced by the warnings In this case a combined error analysis needs to be performed The analyzer will alert the user that a warning is active by displaying the keypad labels MSG and CLR on the front panel and a text message in the top center line of the display as shown in this example SAMPLE AZERO WARNING NOX 123 4 lt TST 5 gt CAL MSG CLR SETUP The analyzer will also issue a message to the serial port and cause the red FAULT LED on the front panel to blink To view or clear a warning message press SAMPLE SYSTEM RESET XXX X WARNING mode lt 5 5 gt keys replaced with TEST key Pressing TEST switches to SAMPLE mode and hides warning messages until new warning s are activated TEST CAL MSG CLR SETUP MSG indicates that one or more warning message are active but hidden Pressing MSG cycles through warnings SAMPLE RANGE 500 PPB NOX XXX X SAMPLE mode all warning messages are hidden but MSG lt TST TST gt CAL MSG SETUP 725 SAMPLE SYSTEM RESET XXX X Press CLR to clear the current If warning messages re appear lt TST TST gt CAL MSG CLR SETUP warning mes
293. mp at the back of a narrow tube shaped light trap places it directly in the path of the excitation UV light A window transparent to UV light provides an air proof seal that prevents ambient gas from contaminating the sample chamber The shape of the light trap and the fact that the detector is blind to wavelengths other than UV means no extra optical filtering is needed 10 2 3 The PMT The amount of fluoresced UV produced in the sample chamber is much less than the intensity of the excitation UV source lamp see Figure 10 4 Therefore a much more sensitive device is needed to detect this light with enough resolution to be meaningful The TML87 uses a Photo Multiplier Tube or PMT for this purpose see 10 4 4 for more details regarding the electronic operation of the PMT 10 2 4 UV Lamp Shutter amp PMT Offset Inherent in the operation of both the reference detector and the PMT are minor electronic offsets The degree of offset differs from detector to detector and from PMT to PMT and can change over time as these components age To account for these offsets the TML87 includes a shutter located between the UV Lamp and the source filter which periodically cuts off the UV light from the sample chamber This happens every 30 minutes The analyzer records the outputs of both the reference detector and the PMT during this dark period and factors them into the SO concentration calculation e The reference detector offset is stored as and viewable
294. n Hg A on average the pump head needs to be rebuilt Q Do need a strip chart recorder or external data logger No the 87 is equipped with a very powerful internal data acquisition system See Section 6 11 4 2 Glossary ASSY acronym for Assembly DAS acronym for data acquisition system the old acronym of iDAS DIAG acronym for diagnostics the diagnostic settings of the analyzer DHCP acronym for dynamic host configuration protocol A protocol used by LAN or Internet servers to automatically set up the interface protocols between themselves and any other addressable device connected to the network DOC Disk On Chip the analyzer s central storage area for analyzer firmware configuration settings and data This is a solid state device without mechanically moving parts that acts as a computer hard disk drive under DOS with disk label C DOC chips come with 2 Mb in the E series analyzer standard configuration but are available in larger sizes DOS Disk Operating System The E series analyzers use DR DOS EEPROM also referred to as a FLASH chip FLASH flash memory is non volatile solid state memory GFC Acronym for Gas Filter Correlation lC bus a clocked bi directional serial bus for communication between individual analyzer components iDAS acronym for internal data acquisition system IP acronym for internet protocol LAN acronym for local area network LED acronym for light emitting diode PCA acronym for
295. n Manual Optional Hardware and Software 5 5 Multigas Measurement Option option 82 When installed and operating the multigas measurement option allows the instrument to be configured so that it can measure either H2S or SO or both A valve directs the sample gas stream through alternate gas paths that allow the analyzer to measure either H2S or ambient SO When the multigas option is activated the instrument may be used in one of three gas measurement modes Table 5 3 H2S SO Switching Valve Operating States GAS MODE DESCRIPTION The sample gas stream is stripped of any ambient SO by a special chemical H2S scrubber then passed through a catalytic converter that changes the H2S present into SO2 which is then measured using the UV Fluorescence method The sample gas stream bypasses the SO Scrubber and catalytic converter 80 allowing the only ambient SO to be measured The switching valve alternates the gas stream between the two paths at regular H2S S02 intervals allowing the instrument to measure both gases See Sections 6 8 1 and 10 3 2 for more information 5 6 Communication Options 5 6 1 RS232 Modem Cable Option 60 This option consists of a cable to connect the analyzer s COM1 port to a computer a code activated switch any other communications device that is equipped with a DB 9 male connector The cable is terminated with two DB 9 female connectors one of which fits the analyzer
296. n Status Bit Assignments In Span Calibration Mode 0800 UNITS OF MEASURE FLAGS 0000 4000 6000 138 05496 Rev A6 TML87 Instruction Manual Operating Instructions To assign or reset the status flag bit assignments press The CH and CH keys move the cursor left and right along the bit string SAMPLE RANGE 500 0 PPB XXX X lt TST TST gt CAL SETUP SAMPLE ENTER SETUP PASS 818 8 1 8 ENTR SETUP PRIMARY SETUP MENU CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE EXIT SETUP XX SECONDARY SETUP MENU SETUP X X COMMUNICATIONS MENU ID HESN COM2 Repeat pressing SET until SETUP X HESSEN STATUS FLAGS SET EDIT SETUP X PMT DET WARNING 0002 PREV NEXT EDIT EXIT Repeat pressing NEXT or PREV until the desired message flag is displayed See Table 6 27 ENTR key accepts the For example SETUP X SYSTEM RESET 0000 PREV NEXT EDIT EXIT SETUP X SYSTEM RESET 0 000 new settings CH CH 0 ENTR EXI EXIT key ignores the new settings Press the key repeatedly to cycle through the available character set 0 9 Note Values of A F can also be set but are meaningless 05496 Rev A6 139 Operating Instructions TML87 Instruction Manual 6 12 4 8 Instrument ID Code Each instrument on a Hessen Protocol network must have a unique ID code The TML87 is programmed wit
297. n before 10 6 Communications Interface The analyzer has several ways to communicate with the outside world see Figure 10 19 Users can enter data and receive information directly through the front panel keypad and display Direct two way communication with the CPU is also available by way of the analyzer s RS232 amp RS485 ports see Section 6 10 and 6 12 Alternatively an Ethernet communication option can be substituted for one of the COMM ports The analyzer can also send status information and data via the eight digital status output lines see Section 6 12 1 and the three analog outputs see Section 6 7 located on the rear panel as well as receive commands by way of the six digital control inputs also located on the rear panel see Section 6 12 2 05496 Rev A6 213 Theory Of Operation TML87 Instruction Manual COMM A Mae RS 232 ONLY RS 232 or RS 485 COMM B d Female ne ana Control Inputs ETHERNET ete OPTION 1 Status Outputs qug Mother Board PC 104 BUS m amp I ICBUS DISPLAY RELAY BOARD Figure 10 20 Interface Block Diagram 10 6 1 Front Panel Interface MODE FIELD MESSAGE FIELD LOCKING SCREW CONCENTRATION FIELD STATUS LED s FASTENER FASTENER e SAMPL SAMPLE A RANGE 500 0 PPB SO2 400 0 lt TST TS
298. n each applicable range Calibration documentation should be maintained with each analyzer and also in a central backup file 05496 Rev A6 161 EPA Protocol Calibration TML87 Instruction Manual EQUIPMENT SUPPLIES ACCEPTANCE LIMITS Recorder Calibration Equipment Working Standard 502 Cylinder Gas Or SO Permeation Tube Zero Air Table 8 1 Meets guidelines of reference 1 and Section 2 3 2 Q A Handbook Traceable to NIST SRM meets limits in traceability protocol for accuracy and stability Section 2 0 7 Q A Handbook Clean dry ambient air free of contaminants that cause detectable response with the SO analyzer FREQUENCY AND METHOD OF MEASUREMENT Compatible with output signal of Check upon receipt analyzer min chart width of 150 mm 6 in is recommended Sample Line And Manifold Constructed of PTFE or glass Check upon receipt Return equipment to supplier See Section 2 3 9 Q A Handbook Analyzed against NIST SRM see protocol in Section 2 0 7 Q A Handbook See Section 2 9 2 Q A Handbook Activity Matrix for Calibration Equipment amp Supplies ACTION IF REQUIREMENTS ARE NOT MET Return equipment to supplier Return equipment supplies to supplier or take corrective action Obtain new working standard and check for traceability Obtain air from another Source or regenerate Develop standard forms Revise forms as appropriate Audit Equipment Must not be the s
299. n it with anti ESD tape Never use standard plastic adhesive tape as a sealer Folding the open end over isolates the component s inside from the effects of static fields Leaving the bag open or simply stapling it shut without folding it closed prevents the bag from forming complete protective envelope around the device 6 Once you have arrived at your destination allow any surface charges that may have built up on the bag or bin during travel to dissipate Connect your wrist strap to ground f you are at the instrument rack hold the bag in one hand while your wrist strap is connected to a ground point f you are at an anti ESD workbench lay the container down on the conductive work surface either case wait several seconds 7 Openthe container 12 4 2 4 Opening Shipments from Teledyne Instruments Customer Service Packing materials such as bubble pack and Styrofoam pellets are extremely efficient generators of static electric charges To prevent damage from ESD Teledyne Instruments ships all electronic components and assemblies in properly sealed anti ESD containers Static charges will build up on the outer surface of the anti ESD container during shipping as the packing materials vibrate and rub against each other To prevent these static charges from damaging the components or assemblies being shipped make sure that you always unpack shipments from Teledyne Instruments Customer Service by 05496
300. nce around them 2 AC Neutral 3 Traces between J7 J12 should be top and bottom and at least 140 mils 4 6 Traces to the test points can be as small as 10 mils RELAYO a RELAYI RNI RI R2 330 2 2K 2 2K RELAYO RELAYI RELAY2 JP2 K2 K3 Heater Config Jumper J216 PIN 1 t2 Do x2 Ll RELAY2 COMMONO 1 O71 eee Sas OADO 2 DC 0 5 RELAYO RELAYU 3 J 4 3 4 3 4 4 TSO OMMON 2 9 RELAYI RELAYE 22 OMMON n 5 OAD 12 AC Neutral 13 RELAY2 RELAY2 KELAY 4 15 4 16 C eR 9 104 T U2A 0 0 ooo l1 1 ES OIO 53 1521011 SN74HC04 pig L 17 1012 P15 8 1013 U2B 19 1014 VCC 20 1015 3 4 42V J4 1 a T 16 _ N4 2 VALVEO O IN 3 K 3 VALVE ENABLE OUT 3 4 C IN2 OUT 2 MED ES lt 5 VBATT RESET Nanna 6 5 4 VOUT RESET OUT 1 7 VCC WDO gt 135 g VALVE3 GND CD IN m DN2540B 16 lt 7 ONCD OUT 45x 9 8 8 PIN S LOWLINE WDI C e OSCIN PFO S OSC SEL PFI U2E ri D179 11 o 10 RLS4148 E HEADER 1X2 0 00
301. ner ener nenne reme 181 Critical Flow Orifice Assembly serro roari sa E PENA CRRE GRE 182 UV Absorption in the TML87 Reaction 186 UV Light Path 188 Source UV Lamp Construction 2 189 Excitation Lamp UV Spectrum Before After 1 190 PMT Optical Filter 191 Effects of Focusing Source UV in Sample 191 TML87 Gas Flow and Location of Critical Flow 194 viii 05496 Rev A6 87 Instruction Manual List of Figures Figure 10 8 Typical Flow Control Assembly with Critical Flow Orifice 196 Figure 10 9 TML87 Hydrocarbon Scrubber Kicker sse nnns 197 Figure 10 10 TML87 Electronic Block 199 Figure 10 11 TML67 CPU Board tir ree rtr e beoe ode i 201 Figure 10 122 TMES87 Sensor Module et t er dH RE 202 Figure 10 13 TML87 Sample 203 Figure 10 14 PMT Assembly soci sss tnde tended RE et det Hu tetas eee 204 Figure 10 15 Basic PMT DesSigh tre d ee LP cedes d gu 205 Figure 10 16 Cooling System eterne datnr etn od fen ho Rd ena nn AR
302. ng Instructions 6 11 2 3 Trigger Events To edit the list of data parameters associated with a specific data channel press From the DATA ACQUISITION menu see Section 6 11 2 2 Edit Data Channel Menu SETUP X X 0 ATIMER 2 4032 R Exits to the Main PREV NEXT INS DEL EDIT PRNT EXIT Data Acquisition menu SETUP lt SET SET gt EDIT PRINT EXIT SETUP X X lt SET SET gt EDIT PRINT EXIT E SETUP EVENT ATIMER ENTR accepts the new string and returns to the previous menu EXIT ignores the new string and returns to the previous menu PREV NEXT ENTR EXIT Press each key repeatedly to cycle through the list of available trigger events 6 11 2 4 Editing iDAS Parameters Data channels can be edited individually from the front panel without affecting other data channels However when editing a data channel such as during adding deleting or editing parameters all data for that particular channel will be lost because the iDAS can store only data of one format number of parameter columns etc for any given channel In addition an iDAS configuration can only be uploaded remotely as an entire set of channels Hence remote update of the iDAS will always delete all current channels and stored data 05496 Rev A6 113 Operating Instructions TML87 Instruction Manual To mod
303. ng specifications If the flows are more than 1596 higher than normal we recommend that the technician re calibrate the flow electronically using the procedure in Section 6 9 9 followed by a thorough and regular monitoring of these flows to see if the new setting is retained properly 11 3 Calibration Problems 11 3 1 Negative Concentrations Negative concentration values can be caused by several things A slight negative signal is normal when the analyzer is operating under zero gas and the signal is drifting around the zero calibration point This is caused by the analyzer s zero noise and may cause reported concentrations to be negative for a few seconds at a time down to 20 ppb but should alternate with similarly high positive values Mis calibration is the most likely explanation for negative concentration values If the zero air contained some H5S gas contaminated zero air or a worn out zero air scrubber and the analyzer was calibrated to that concentration as zero the analyzer may report negative values when measuring air that contains little or no H2S The same problem occurs if the analyzer was zero calibrated using ambient air or span gas If the response offset test function for H2S H2S OFFS are greater than 150 mV a failed PMT or high voltage supply or sample chamber contamination could be the cause Clean the sample chamber according to Section 11 6 3 05496 Rev A6 229 TROUBLESHOOTING amp REPAIR TM
304. ng walls The optical filters discussed in section 10 2 4 remove UV with wavelengths extraneous to the excitation and decay of SO SO During instrument calibration when the analyzer is sampling zero air calibration gas devoid of H2S a measurement of the background light that is still present in the sample chamber is recorded and used to offset the value of the PMT output used to calculate the H2S concentration 10 3 Pneumatic Operation CAUTION It is important that the sample airflow system is leak tight and not pressurized over ambient pressure Regular leak checks should be performed on the analyzer as described in the maintenance schedule Table 9 1 Procedures for correctly performing leak checks can be found in Section 11 5 1 05496 Rev A6 193 Theory Of Operation TML87 Instruction Manual 10 3 1 Sample Gas Flow The Flow of gas through the TML87 UV Fluorescence H2S Analyzer is created by a small internal pump that pulls air though the instrument INSTRUMENT CHASSIS KICKER EXHAUST TO PUMP a MOLYBDENUM CONVERTER SAMPLE GAS Scrubber INLET L L Gas Flow when multigas version of EXHAUST GAS M101E analyzer is measuring SO2 OUTLET EXHAUST TO OUTER H2S SO2 LAYER OF MODE VALVI KICKER SAMPLE L E c CHAMBER
305. nge spans as well EXAMPLE A1 OUTPUT Output Signal 0 5 VDC representing 0 1000 ppb concentration values A2 OUTPUT Output Signal 0 10 VDC representing 0 500 ppb concentration values 58 05496 Rev A6 87 Instruction Manual Operating Instructions The output labeled A4 is special It can be set by the user see Section 6 9 10 to transmit many of the parameters accessible through the lt TST TST gt keys of the units Sample Display Output A3 is not available on the TML87 Analyzer 6 7 2 Physical Range versus Analog Output Reporting Ranges The TML87 UV Fluorescence H2S Analyzer has two hardware physical ranges that cover H2S concentrations between 0 and 20 000 ppb The low range is 0 to 2 000 ppb while the high range is 0 to 20 000 ppb The proper physical range is determined by the software to include the maximum measurement concentration selected by the user Once properly calibrated the analyzer s front panel will accurately report concentrations along the entire span of its 0 and 20 000 ppb physical range Because most applications use only a small part of the analyzer s two physical ranges the width of the TML87 s physical range can create data resolution problems for most analog recording devices For example in an application where the expected concentration of SO is typically less than 500 ppb the full scale of expected values is only 0 25 of the instrument s 20 000 ppb physical range Unmodified th
306. nnels transmit a signal that is proportional to the H2S concentration of the sample gas 1 and A2 outputs can be slaved together or set up to operated independently A variety of scaling factors are available See Section 6 7 for information on setting the reporting range type and scaling factors for these output channels Test Output The third analog output labeled A4 is special It can be set by the user see Section 6 9 10 to carry the current signal level of any one of the parameters accessible through the TEST menu of the unit s software In its standard configuration the analyzer comes with all three of these channels set up for a DC voltage However 4 20mA current loop drivers can be purchased for the first two of these outputs A1 and A2 Output Loop back All three of the functioning analog outputs are connected back to the A D converter through a Loop back circuit This permits the voltage outputs to be calibrated by the CPU without need for any additional tools or fixtures 10 4 12 External Digital This External Digital I O performs two functions 05496 Rev A6 211 Theory Of Operation TML87 Instruction Manual STATUS OUTPUTS Logic Level voltages are transmitted through an optically isolated 8 pin connector located on the rear panel of the analyzer These outputs convey good bad and on off information about certain analyzer conditions They can be used to interface with certain types of programmable devices
307. nnen nennen 37 5 4 3 125 Permeation Tubes Options 53 55 amp 57 40 5 4 4 Zero Air Scrubber Maintenance Kit Option 43 40 5 5 Multigas Measurement Option option 82 41 5 6 Communication Options credite rete E end Tee teo ce depu te e t weet Eres 41 5 6 1 RS232 Modem Cable Option 60 reed reete et Luder ead eet e quce de dd eee eed cocer ee va dad rens 41 5 6 2 RS 232 Multidrop Option 62 1t trt ite tereti teet hebreo renale zi be odo IRR 41 5 6 3 Ethernet 63 oi tetro ic tele e pe EUR Ep e Leid t einen it ee eoi otic Uma te ue dt 42 5 7 Additonal Man alS inisesin E M 43 55721 Printed Manuals Option 70 e irr E A ia elie 43 52f22 Manuall ON GD periei a a etek Sen dea a aa a evden EA encased a da adara 43 5 8 Extended Warranty OptionS 92 amp 93 ciiin ckan tnana a aaaea tiaara a annida i 44 5 9 Special Software Features x ER er 44 5 9 1 Maintenance Mode Switch siisi d 44 5 9 2 Second Language Swithin kanane a a
308. ns to the main SAMPLE for troubleshooting tips display lt TST TST gt SPAN CONC 150 05496 Rev A6 TML87 Instruction Manual Calibration Procedures 7 5 Manual Calibration with IZS Option The following section describes the basic method for manually calibrating the TML87 analyzer in H2S measurement mode using the IZS option The same method may be used to calibrate the TML87 analyzers configured for SO measurement but requires that an SO permeation tube be installed in the instrument instead of the standard H S tube See Section 7 8 for instructions on calibrating analyzers configured for multigas measurement mode Under the best conditions the accuracy of the H5S effusion rate of the IZS option s permeation tube is about 596 This be subject to significant amounts of drift as the tube ages and the amount of H5S contained in the tube is depleted Whereas this may be sufficient for calibrating instrument configured for H2S measurement and for informal calibration checks of instruments measuring SO it is not adequate for formal SO calibrations and is not approved for use by the US EPA as a calibration source for calibrating SO monitoring equipment For applications where more stringent calibration requirements are specified for an instrument with an IZS option installed the following provisions must be followed l Zero air and span gas must be supplied to the analyzer through the sample gas inlet as depicted in
309. nsor module into the TML87 14 Close the instrument 15 Turn the TML87 on and let it warm up for 60 minutes 16 Perform a leak check See Section 11 5 1 17 Calibrate the analyzer see Chapter 7 11 6 3 4 Replacing the UV filter lens 1 Turn off the instrument s power and remove the power cord from the instrument 2 Unplug J4 connector from the motherboard to allow tool access e Alternatively remove the sensor module as described in Section 11 6 3 1 3 Remove 4 screws from the shutter cover see Figure 11 10 and remove the cover 4 Remove 4 screws from the UV filter retainer 05496 Rev A6 249 TROUBLESHOOTING amp REPAIR TML87 Instruction Manual Reaction Cell UV Filter Retainer amp Lens Housing Filter Retainer Screws Shutter Housing ES uus Cover oa E Figure 11 10 Disassembling the Shutter Assembly Filter Retaine Screws Shutter Cover__ Screws Carefully remove the UV filter Install the UV filter e Handle carefully and never touch the filter s surface e UV filter s wider ring side should be facing out Install UV filter retainer and tighten screws Install the shutter cover and minifit connector Tighten 4 shutter cover screws Reinstall the sensor module and Plug J4 connector into the motherboard 11 6 3 5 Adjusting the UV Lamp Peaking the Lamp There are three ways in which ambient conditions can affect the UV Lamp output and therefore the accuracy of the
310. nstruction Manual TROUBLESHOOTING amp REPAIR 11 0 TROUBLESHOOTING amp REPAIR This section contains a variety of methods for identifying and solving performance problems with the analyzer CAUTION The operations outlined in this chapter must be performed by qualified maintenance personnel only CAUTION Risk of electrical shock Some operations need to be carried out with the analyzer open and running Exercise caution to avoid electrical shocks and electrostatic or mechanical damage to the analyzer Do not drop tools into the analyzer or leave those after your procedures Do not shorten or touch electric connections with metallic tools while operating inside the analyzer Use common sense when operating inside a running analyzer 11 1 General Troubleshooting The analyzer has been designed so that problems can be rapidly detected evaluated and repaired During operation the analyzer continuously performs diagnostic tests and provides the ability to evaluate its key operating parameters without disturbing monitoring operations A systematic approach to troubleshooting will generally consist of the following five steps Note any warning messages and take corrective action as necessary e Examine the values of all TEST functions and compare them to factory values Note any major deviations from the factory values and take corrective action e Use the internal electronic status LED s to determine whet
311. nt Air Figure 10 9 TML87 Hydrocarbon Scrubber Kicker In the TML87 some of the cleaned air from the inner tube is returned to be used as the purge gas in the outer tube Figure 10 9 This means that when the analyzer is first started the concentration gradient between the inner and outer tubes is not very large and the scrubber s efficiency is relatively low When the instrument is turned on after having been off for more than 30 minutes it takes a certain amount of time for the gradient to become large enough for the scrubber to adequately remove hydrocarbons from the sample air 10 3 6 SO Scrubber In order to ensure that no ambient SO interferes with the analyzer s H2S measurement the sample gas stream is passed through a chemical scrubber that removes SO from the sample stream before it is passed though the catalytic converter see Figure 10 7 The SO scrubber is a Teflon encased stand alone unit containing a room temperature catalyst tube mounted in the front right side of the analyzer case see Figure 3 8 near the instrument s on off switch The SO scrubber material is consumed as it removes SO If the expected concentrations of SO are very high the lifetime of the scrubber will be short The expected life of the scrubber is approximately 1000 ppm hours See Section 9 3 3 for information on when and how to replace the SO scrubber material 10 3 7 Pneumatic Sensors The TML87 uses two pneumatic sensors to ver
312. ntration defined in the CONC sub menu e If the physical low level calibration has drifted changed PMT response or was accidentally altered by the user a low level calibration may be necessary to get the analyzer back into its proper range of expected values One possible indicator of this scenario is a slope or offset value that is outside of its allowed range 0 7 1 3 for slope 20 to 150 for offsets See Section 11 6 3 on how to carry out a low level hardware calibration 11 3 5 Inability to Zero No ZERO Key In general the TML87 will not display certain keyboard choices whenever the actual value of a parameter is outside of the expected range for that parameter If the calibration menu does not show a ZERO key when carrying out a zero calibration the actual gas concentration must be significantly different from the actual zero point as per last calibration which can have several reasons Confirm that there is a good source of zero air If the 175 option is installed compare the zero reading from the IZS zero air source to an external zero air source using H2S and SO free air Check the zero air Scrubber for performance It may need to be replaced Section 9 3 3 Check to make sure that there is no ambient air leaking into the zero air line Check for leaks in the pneumatic systems as described in Section 11 5 1 11 3 6 Non Linear Response The TML87 was factory calibrated to a high level of H2S and should be linear to with
313. nts define when and how the iDAS records a measurement of any given data channel Triggering events are firmware specific and are listed in Appendix A 5 The most common triggering events are Sampling at regular intervals specified by an automatic timer Most trending information is usually stored at such regular intervals which can be instantaneous or averaged EXITZR EXITSP SLPCHG exit zero exit span slope change Sampling at the end of irregularly occurring calibrations or when the response slope changes These triggering events create instantaneous data points e g for the new slope and offset concentration response values at the end of a calibration Zero and slope values are valuable to monitor response drift and to document when the instrument was calibrated WARNINGS Some data may be useful when stored if one of several warning messages appears This is helpful for trouble shooting by monitoring when a particular warning occurred 6 11 2 Default iDAS Channels A set of default Data Channels has been included in the analyzer s software for logging H2S concentration and certain predictive diagnostic data These default channels include but are not limited to CONC Samples H5S concentration at one minute intervals and stores an average every hour with a time and date stamp Readings during calibration and calibration hold off are not included in the data By default the last 800 hourly averages are stored
314. nts the output of the V F during a specified time period and sends the result of that count in the form of a binary number to the CPU The A D can be configured for several different input modes and ranges but in the TML87 is used in uni polar mode with a 5 full scale The converter includes a 1 over and under range This allows signals from 0 05V to 5 05V to be fully converted For A to D calibration purposes two reference voltages are supplied to the A D converter Reference ground and 4 096 VDC During calibration the device measures these two voltages and sends their digital equivalent to the CPU The CPU uses these values to compute the A to D converter s offset and slope not the same offset and slope recorded during zero span calibration and uses these factors for subsequent conversions See Section 6 9 4 6 for instructions on performing this calibration 10 4 10 2 Sensor Inputs The key analog sensor signals are coupled to the A D through the master multiplexer from two connectors on the motherboard 100K terminating resistors on each of the inputs prevent cross talk from appearing on the sensor signals PMT DETECTOR OUTPUT This signal output of the PMT preamp PCA is used in the computation of the H2S and SO concentrations displayed at the top right hand corner of the front panel display and transmitted through the instruments analog outputs and COMM ports PMT HIGH VOLTAGE POWER SUPPLY LEVEL This input is based on the driv
315. nual Theory Of Operation SAMPLE RANGE 500 0 PPB H2S XXX X lt TST TST gt CAL SETUP SAMPLE RCELL TEMP 0 0C H2S XXX X lt TST TST gt CAL SETUP SAMPLE TIME HH MM SS H2S XXX X lt TST TST CAL SETUP SAMPLE 5 553 VOLTS 25 XXX X TST gt CAL SETUP SAMPLE PMT 0 0 H2S XXX X lt TST TST gt CAL SETUP SAMPLE H2S OFFSEXX XMV 25 XXX X lt TST TST gt CAL SETUP SAMPLE BOX TEMP 0 0C H2S XXX X lt TST TST gt CAL SETUP SAMPLE H2S SLOPE XXX H2S XXX X lt TST TST gt CAL SETUP 10 7 3 Temperature and Pressure Compensation TPC Feature As explained previously changes in temperature can significantly effect the amount of fluoresced UV light generated in the instrument s sample chamber To negate this effect the TML87 maintains the sample gas at a stable raised temperature Pressure changes can also have a noticeable if more subtle effect on the H2S concentration calculation To account for this the TML87 software includes a feature which allows the instrument to include a compensation factor in the H2S calculations that is based on changes in ambient pressure When the TPC feature is enabled the analyzer s H2S concentration is divided by a factor called PRESSCO which is based on the ratio between the ambient pressure of the sample gas and standard atmospheric pressure Equation 10 5 As ambient pressure increases the compensated 5 concentration is decrea
316. ny years but at times is difficult to configure Teledyne Instruments conforms to the standard pin assignments in the implementation of RS 232 Problems with RS 232 connections usually center around 4 general areas Incorrect cabling and connectors This is the most common problem See Figure 6 8 for connector and pin out information and Section 6 10 3 e The communications baud rate and protocol parameters are incorrectly configured See Section 6 10 6 on how to set the baud rate e The COM port communications mode is set incorrectly Section 6 10 8 e f a modem is used additional configuration and wiring rules must be observed See Section 6 12 2 6 Incorrect setting of the DTE Switch See Section 6 10 5 11 5 10 2 Modem or Terminal Operation These are the general steps for troubleshooting problems with a modem connected to a Teledyne Instruments analyzer e Check cables for proper connection to the modem terminal or computer e Check the correct position of the DTE DCE switch as described in Section 6 10 5 Check the correct setup command Section 6 12 2 6 e Verify that the Ready to Send RTS signal is at logic high The TML87 sets pin 7 RTS to greater than 3 volts to enable modem transmission 05496 Rev A6 239 TROUBLESHOOTING amp REPAIR TML87 Instruction Manual e Make sure the baud rate word length and stop bit settings between modem and analyzer match see Section 6 12 2 6 and Section
317. o air Flow span gas to the analyzer and wait until the STABIL value is 0 5 or less In the SETUP VARS menu scroll to and manually set the SO or NOx SLOPE value to 1 000 Turn the gain adjustment pot on the PMT preamp board R29 fully clockwise Set the HVPS fine adjustment switch S1 to its highest setting While observing the gas concentration on the analyzer s display set the HVPS coarse adjustment switch S1 to the lowest setting that is just above the span gas value Set the HVPS fine adjustment switch S1 to the lowest setting that is just above the span gas value Using the gain adjustment pot R29 set the analyzer to read the exact span gas value This value may fluctuate a bit Perform a software span calibration so that the analyzer may set its slope and offset values Review the slope and offset values The slopes should be 1 000 0 3 and the offset values should be 0 0 20mV 20 to 150mV is allowed Flow zero gas to the analyzer gas and wait until the STABIL value is 0 5 or less Initiate an optic test OTEST from the SETUP DIAG menu Scroll to the NORM_PMT value on the analyzer s main display Set the OTEST adjustment pot R28 to obtain a NORM value of approximately 2000mV Initiate an electric test ETEST from the SETUP DIAG menu Scroll to the NORM PMT value on the analyzer s main display Set the ETEST adjustment pot R19 to obtain a NORM PMT value of approximately 2000mV 258 05496 R
318. o measure both SO and H2S in multigas measurement mode 05496 Rev A6 61 Operating Instructions TML87 Instruction Manual LOW range RANGF1 Range value for output A1 0 1500 ppm 50 e HIGH range RANGE2 Range value for output A2 20 1000 ppm H S To select the independent reporting range mode and set the upper measurement limits for the two outputs press SAMPLE RANGE 500 0 PPB 25 XXX X SETUP RANGE MODE DUAL lt TST TST CAL SETUP SNGL IND AUTO ENTR EXIT SAMPLE ENTER SETUP PASS 818 SETUP X X RANGE CONTROL MENU son g ENTR EXIT MODE SET UNIT EXIT SETUP j PRI MARY SETUP MENU SETUP X X LOW RANGE 500 0 Conc CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE EXIT dod 0 04 ENTR Toggle the Numeral Keys to set the upper limit of each SETUP X X RANGE CONTROL MENU SETUP X X HIGH RANGE 500 0 Conc range MODE SET UNIT 0 0 5 0 ENTR EXT SETUP X X RANGE MODE SNGL RANGE GANTROL MENU EXIT Returns SNGL IND AUTO ENTR EXIT to the Main MODE SET UNIT SAMPLE Display 62 05496 Rev A6 TML87 Instruction Manual Operating Instructions 6 7 6 Auto Range Mode AUTO In AUTO range mode the analyzer automatically switches the reporting range between two user defined ranges low and high The unit will switch from low range to high range when the H2S concentration exceeds 98 of the low range span The unit wi
319. ocumentation 1 0 TML87 DOCUMENTATION Thank you for purchasing the TML87 UV Fluorescence H2S Analyzer The documentation for this instrument is available in several different formats e Printed format or e Electronic format on a CD ROM The electronic manual is in Adobe Systems Inc Portable Document Format The Adobe Acrobat Reader software which is necessary to view these files can be downloaded for free from the internet at http www adobe com The electronic version of the manual has many advantages e Keyword and phrase search feature e Figures tables and internet addresses are linked so that clicking on the item will display the associated feature or open the website e A list of chapters and sections as well as thumbnails of each page is displayed to the left of the text e Entries in the table of contents are linked to the corresponding locations in the manual e Ability to print sections or all of the manual Additional documentation for the TML87 UV Fluorescence H2S Analyzer is available from Teledyne Instruments website at http www teledyne ML com e sensor e com software manual part number 039450000 e iDAS Manual part number 028370000 1 1 Using This Manual This manual has the following data structures 1 0 Table of Contents Outlines the contents of the manual in the order the information is presented This is a good overview of the topics covered in the manual There is also a list of table
320. ol tire eret toe E out ede pecu pon sats ose dete 208 10 4 8 2 Valve Cornitrol ode tere t ioc ere d dr Res 208 10 4 9 Status LEDs amp Watch Dog 209 10 4 10 x 210 10 4 1051 Conversion rede eie xb ex a EL 210 10 4 10 2 Sensor Inputs rennen ttr Ere er Er n P RR E PRETEREA AEER 210 10 4 10 3 Thermistor Interface ite Ee ee cene ee HE ie AG e an eH PERI e pet reet 211 10 4 11 Analog Outputs 2 2 rei erect oe ct d eed ooo re oe etc odas 211 10 442 External Digital l O 5 iere mee Re ede di ona ettet eicere ere citt eres dicen 211 annn meo edu t Midi ont Gua 212 10 414 Power up GIrCUIE s eorr RS RR PREND rtr Rete RUE 212 10 5 Power Supply Circuit Breaker three eee pede at exe Met 212 10 6 Communications Interfaca 2 c i d adeo ce Ree ce Lender bao Deu 213 10 6 T Eront Panel Interface eren teen pire tg edere Lane roto eina a eto De tute 214 10 6 1 1 AnalyzercStatus EE D S 5 5 eerie
321. om the check procedure is used to assess the precision of the monitoring data see 40 CFR 58 for procedures for calculating and reporting precision 8 5 Dynamic Multipoint Span Calibration Dynamic calibration involves introducing gas samples of known concentrations to an instrument in order to record the instrument s performance at a predetermined sensitivity and to derive a calibration relationship A minimum of three reference points and one zero point uniformly spaced covering 0 to 90 percent of the operating range are recommended to define this relationship The analyzer s recorded response is compared with the known concentration to derive the calibration relationship To perform a precision check the instrument set up sources of zero air and sample gas should conform to those described in Section 7 1 Follow the procedures described in section 7 2 for calibrating the zero points For each mid point 05496 Rev A6 167 EPA Protocol Calibration TML87 Instruction Manual SAMPLE RANGE 500 000 PPB 502 X XXX Set the Display to show the SO2 STB test function This function calculates the lt TST TST gt SETUP stability of the SO measurement SAMPLE SO2 STB 502 X XXX lt TST 5 gt SETUP ACTION Allow calibration gas diluted to proper concentration for Midpoint N to enter the sample port SAMPLE 502 STB X 502 X XXX lt TST TST gt C
322. on Manual TROUBLESHOOTING amp REPAIR e There is no activity from the primary RS 232 port COM1 on the rear panel even if lt ret gt is pressed Note that the RS 232 port has programmable baud rates from 200 to 115200 baud Since the CPU board remembers the programmed baud rate even when power is off this means that there is no default baud rate for the port when the instrument boots up the rate will be whatever it was last programmed to be In some cases configuration memory might be corrupted and the baud rate could be a random unrelated value For these reasons it is best to test all possible baud rates when performing this test See the RS 2323 Communication section below for more details regarding port configuration In some rare circumstances this failure may be caused by a bad IC on the motherboard specifically U57 the large 44 pin device on the lower right hand side of the board If this is true removing U57 from its socket will allow the instrument to start up but the measurements will be invalid e If the analyzer stops during initialization the vacuum fluorescent display shows some text it is likely that the DOC the firmware or the configuration and data files have been corrupted 11 5 10 RS 232 Communication 11 5 10 1 General RS 232 Troubleshooting Teledyne Instruments analyzers use the RS 232 protocol as the standard serial communications protocol RS 232 is a versatile standard which has been used for ma
323. on as well as a list of host computer commands and examples of command and response message syntax download the Manual Addendum for Hessen Protocol from the Teledyne Instruments web site http www teledyne ML com 6 12 4 2 Hessen COMM Port Configuration Hessen protocol requires the communication parameters of the TML87 s COMM ports to be set differently than the standard configuration as shown in the table below Table 6 27 RS 232 Communication Parameters for Hessen Protocol mmy Ee To change the rest of the COMM port parameters and modes see Section 6 10 8 To change the baud rate of the TML87 s COMM ports see Section 6 10 9 6 12 4 3 Activating Hessen Protocol The first step in configuring the TML87 to operate over a Hessen protocol network is to activate the Hessen mode for COMM ports and configure the communication parameters for the port s appropriately Press 134 05496 Rev A6 TML87 Instruction Manual Operating Instructions Repeat the entire process to set up the COM2 port Select which COMM sum of the mode modes is displayed here eee port to configure 71 ID COM1 COM2 SETUP X X 105 of the selected ETOP gt SAMPLE RANGE 500 0 PPB XXX X lt TST TST gt CAL ETUP SAMPLE ENTER SETUP PASS 818 8 1 8 ENTR SETUP X X PRIMARY SETUP MENU CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE EXIT SETUP SECONDARY SETUP MEN
324. on program such as HyperTerminal Figure 6 16 However all configuration commands must be created following a strict syntax or be pasted in from a text file which was edited offline and then uploaded through a specific transfer procedure 122 05496 Rev A6 87 Instruction Manual Operating Instructions at CAS HyperTerminal __ lol x File Edit View Transfer Help SETUP PROPERTIES FOR ENGDAT NAME ENGDAT EVENT ATIMER REPORT PERIOD 000 00 02 NUMBER OF RECORDS 2000 RS 232 REPORT ON CHANNEL ENABLED ON CAL HOLD OFF OFF PARAMETERS 14 PARAMETER RCTEMP MODE RVG PRECISION 4 STORE SRMPLES OFF PARAMETER CNVTMP MODE RVG PRECISION 4 STORE SRMPLES OFF PARAMETER PMTTMP MODE RVG PRECISION 4 STORE SRMPLES OFF PARAMETER BOXTMP MODE RVG PRECISION 4 STORE SRMPLES OFF PARAMETER O3FLOW MODE RVG PRECISION 4 STORE SRMPLES OFF PRRRMETER SMPFLW MODE RVG PRECISION 4 STORE SRMPLES OFF PRRRMETER SMPPRS MODE RVG PRECISION 4 STORE SRMPLES OFF PARAMETER RCPRES MODE RVG PRECISION 4 STORE SRMPLES OFF PARAMETER AZERO MODE RVG PRECISION 4 STORE SRMPLES OFF PRRRMETER HVPS MODE RVG PRECISION 4 STORE SRMPLES OFF PARAMETER PMTDET MODE AVG PRECISION 4 STORE SRMPLES 0FF PARAMETER RF4096 MODE AVG PRECISION 4 STORE SRMPLES OFF PARAMETER REFGND MODE RVG PRECISION 4 STORE SRMPLES OFF Connected 00 01 32 Auto detect TCP IP caes Capture Print echo Figur
325. ons calibrate the analyzer at the time of installation and re calibrate it e No later than three months after the most recent calibration or performance audit which indicated that the analyzer calibration was acceptable Aninterruption of more than a few days in analyzer operation e Anyrepairs which might affect its calibration e Physical relocation of the analyzer e other indication including excessive zero or span drift of possible significant inaccuracy of the analyzer Following any of the activities listed above the zero and span should be checked to determine if a calibration is necessary If the analyzer zero and span drifts exceed locally established calibration units or the calibration limits in Section 2 0 9 Subsection 9 1 3 Q A Handbook a calibration should be performed 8 1 6 Record Keeping Record keeping is a critical part of all quality assurance programs Standard forms similar to those that appear in this manual should be developed for individual programs Three things to consider in the development of record forms are e Does the form serve a necessary function e 5 the documentation complete 05496 Rev 6 163 EPA Protocol Calibration TML87 Instruction Manual e Will the forms be filed in such a manner that they can easily be retrieved when needed 8 1 7 Summary of Quality Assurance Checks The following items should be checked on a regularly scheduled basis to assure high quality
326. onverter Catalyst Material The H2S gt SO converter is located in the center of the instrument see Figure 3 9 for location and Figure 9 3 for the assembly The converter is designed for replacement of the cartridge only the heater with built in thermocouple can be reused e Turn off the analyzer power remove the cover and allow the converter to cool e Remove the top lid of the converter as well as the top layers of the insulation until the converter cartridge can be seen CAUTION The converter operates at 315 C Severe burns can result if the assembly is not allowed to cool Do not handle the assembly until it is at room temperature This may take several hours e Remove the tube fittings from the converter e Disconnect the power and the thermocouple of the converter Unscrew the grounding clamp of the power leads with a Phillips head screw driver e Remove the converter assembly cartridge and band heater from the can Make a note of the orientation of the tubes relative to the heater cartridge e Unscrew the band heater and loosen it take out the old converter cartridge 180 05496 Rev 6 TML87 Instruction Manual Instrument Maintenance Converter Assembly Cover Band Heater KY Power LEads Band Heater and T C Assembly 5 gt SO converter Converter Assembly Housing Figure 9 3 H2S SO Converter Assembly e Wrap the band heater around the new replacement cartridge and tigh
327. operating UV light can case eye damage Always use safety glasses plastic glasses will not do If you are unfamiliar with the TML87 theory of operation we recommend that you read Chapter 10 before proceeding For information on navigating the analyzer s software menus see the menu trees described in Appendix A 1 3 2 1 Startup After electrical and pneumatic connections are made turn on the instrument and pump power The exhaust and PMT cooler fans should start The display should immediately display a single horizontal dash in the upper left corner of the display This will last approximately 30 seconds while the CPU loads the operating system Once the CPU has completed this activity it will begin loading the analyzer firmware and configuration data During this process string of messages will appear on the analyzer s front panel display 05496 Rev A6 21 Getting Started TML87 Instruction Manual SELECT START OR REMOTE 3 System waits 3 seconds then automatically begins START gt its initialization routine No action required FLASH STATUS POI System is checking the format of the instrument s flash memory chip If at this point STARTI NG INSTRUMENT CODE ES FLASH FORMAT INVALI D appears contact TML customer service STARTING INSTRUMENT W FLASH 1 The instrument is loading configuration and calibration
328. ore the IZS option can only be used to calibrate or check the instrument for one gas H2S or SO but not both 05496 Rev A6 37 Optional Hardware and Software TML87 Instruction Manual INSTRUMENT CHASSIS KICKER EXHAUST TO PUMP MOLYBDENUM I CONVERTER SAMPLE GAS PUMP SO H S O INLET 50 Scrubber L Gas Flow when multigas version of TM101E analyzer is measuring SO OUTLET gt EXHAUST OUTER HS 180 V LAYER OF KICKER MODE VALVE SPAN GAS INLET i 1 SAMPLE pe CHAMBER Ie ZERO AIR INLET 2 ZERO AIR SCRUBBER 125 Permeation Tube 5 Source I Vett p l dE Vus 1 2 amp I z 5 HYDROCARBON ela SAMPLE SCRUBBER 1 El e PRESSURE KICKER SENSOR _ E l ZERO SPAN BAMPLE CAL a 4 FLOW PRESSURE 1 SENSOR SENSOR PCA Figure 5 3 Pneumatic Diagram of the 87 with IZS Options Installed The following table describes the state of each valve during the analyzer s various operational modes Table 5 2 175 Valve Operating States MODE VALVE CONDITION VALVE PORT CONNECTIONS Sample Cal Open to SAMPLE inlet 322 SAMPLE 2
329. p Control C Pauses the listing of commands Control P Restarts the listing of commands 05496 Rev A6 127 Operating Instructions TML87 Instruction Manual 6 12 2 3 Command Syntax Commands are not case sensitive and all arguments within one command i e ID numbers keywords data values etc must be separated with a space character All Commands follow the syntax Where X ID COMMAND CR X is the command type one letter that defines the type of command Allowed designators are listed in Table 6 25 and Appendix A 6 ID is the analyzer identification number Section 6 10 1 Example the Command 200 followed by a carriage return would print the list of available commands for the revision of software currently installed in the instrument assigned ID Number 200 COMMAND is the command designator This string is the name of the command being issued LIST ABORT NAME EXIT etc Some commands may have additional arguments that define how the command is to be executed Press lt CR gt or refer to Appendix A 6 for a list of available command designators CR is a carriage return All commands must be terminated by a carriage return usually achieved by pressing the ENTER key on a computer Table 6 25 Command Types COMMAND COMMAND TYPE Calibration Diagnostic Logon Test measurement Variable lt Warning 6 12 2 4 Data Types Data typ
330. p chart recorder and or data logger to the appropriate contacts of the analog output connecter on the rear panel of the analyzer ANALOG OUT A1 A2 A3 A4 Figure 3 3 Analog Output Connector The A1 and A2 channels transmit a signal that is proportional to the H2S concentration of the sample gas The output labeled A4 is special It can be set by the user Section 6 9 10 to output any one of the parameters accessible through the lt TST 5 gt keys of the units sample display 12 05496 Rev A6 TML87 Instruction Manual Getting Started Pin outs for the Analog Output connector at the rear panel of the instrument are Table 3 1 Analog output Pin Outs ew ANALOG OUTPUT VOLTAGE OUTPUT CURRENT LOOP OPTION zu Wo i 0 ee O EE Wm e The default analog output voltage setting of the TML87 UV Fluorescence H5S Analyzer is 0 5 VDC with a range of 0 500 ppb e To change these settings see Sections 6 9 4 and 6 7 respectively An optional Current Loop output is available for each See Section 5 2 3 1 1 2 Connecting the Status Outputs The analyzer s status outputs are accessed through a 12 pin connector on the analyzer s rear panel labeled STATUS They are used to interface with a device that accepts closed contact digital inputs such as programmable logic controllers PLCs STATUS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 D ty af wi af sio
331. pendix A 1 of this manual 6 1 Overview of Operating modes The TML87 software has a variety of operating modes Most commonly the analyzer will be operating in SAMPLE mode In this mode a continuous read out of the H2S concentration is displayed on the front panel and sent as an analog voltage to rear panel terminals calibrations can be performed and TEST functions and WARNING messages can be examined The second most important operating mode is SETUP mode This mode is used for performing certain configuration operations such as for the iDAS system the reporting ranges or the serial RS 232 RS 485 Ethernet communication channels The SET UP mode is also used for performing various diagnostic tests during troubleshooting Mode Field e SAMPLE A RANGE 500 0 PPB H2S 400 0 lt TST TST gt CAL SETUP Figure 6 1 Front Panel Display The mode field of the front panel display indicates to the user which operating mode the unit is currently running 05496 Rev A6 47 Operating Instructions TML87 Instruction Manual Besides SAMPLE and SETUP other modes the analyzer can be operated in are Table 6 1 Analyzer Operating Modes EXPLANATION One of the analyzer s diagnostic modes is active Section 6 9 M P CAL This is the basic calibration mode of the instrument and is activated by pressing the CAL key SAMPLE Sampling normally flashing text indicates adaptive filter is on S
332. plications such as EPA monitoring require a multipoint calibration procedure where span gases of different concentrations are needed We recommend using a bottle of calibrated H2S gas of higher concentration in conjunction with a gas dilution calibrator such as a Teledyne Instruments Model 700 This type of calibrator precisely mixes a high concentration gas from zero air both supplied externally to accurately produce span gas of the correct concentration Linearity profiles can be automated with this model and run unattended over night Table 3 5 NIST SRM s Available for Traceability of H2S amp SO Calibration Gases 4 NOMINAL NISUSRM 2730 Hydrogen sulfide in N2 5000 ppb 2731 Hydrogen sulfide in 20 ppm 1693a Sulfur dioxide in N2 50 ppm 1694a Sulfur dioxide in N2 100 ppm 1661a Sulfur dioxide in N2 500 ppm ZERO AIR A gas that is similar in chemical composition to the earth s atmosphere but without the gas being measured by the analyzer in this case H2S If your analyzer is equipped with IZS or external zero air scrubber option it is capable of creating zero air For analyzers without these options a zero air generator such as the Teledyne Instruments Model 701 can be used Once the appropriate pneumatic connections have been made check all pneumatic fittings for leaks using a procedure similar to that defined in Section 11 5 1 3 1 2 1 Connections with Internal
333. previous display 05496 Rev A6 27 Getting Started TML87 Instruction Manual STEP THREE Perform the zero span calibration procedure SAMPLE RANGE 500 0 PPB 25 Set the Display to show the H2S STB test function lt TST 5 gt SETUP This function calculates the stability of the 5 measurement SAMPLE H2S STB X XXX PPB H2S X XXX lt TST TST gt SETUP ACTION Allow zero gas to enter the sample port at the rear of the instrument Wait until H2S STB falls below 0 5 ppb This may take several minutes H2S STB X XXX PPB lt TST TST gt M P CAL H2S STB X XXX PPB 502 X XXX lt TST TST gt ZERO CONC EXIT E E Press ENTR to change the OFFSET M P CAL H2S STB X XXX PPB 502 X XXX amp SLOPE values for the SO measurements lt 5 TST gt ENTR CONC EXIT Press EXIT to leave the calibration unchanged and return to the previous menu ACTION Allow span gas to enter the sample port at the rear of the instrument The value of H2S STB may jump significantly Wait until it falls back below 0 5 ppb The SPAN key now appears during the transition from zero to span This may take several minutes M P CAL H2S STB X XXX PPB H2S X XXX lt TST TST gt SP EXIT You may see both keys If either the ZERO or SPAN buttons fail to appear see Section 11
334. printed circuit assembly the gt PCB with electronic components ready to use PCB acronym for printed circuit board the bare board without electronic components RS 232 a type of serial communications port 32 05496 Rev A6 TML87 Instruction Manual Frequently Asked Questions amp Glossary RS 485 a type of serial communications port sensor e com Name of a remote control program offered by Teledyne ML to its customers TCP IP acronym for transfer control protocol internet protocol the standard communications protocol for Ethernet devices VARS acronym for variables the variables settings of the analyzer User Notes 05496 Rev A6 33 Frequently Asked Questions amp Glossary TML87 Instruction Manual User Notes 34 05496 Rev A6 TML87 Instruction Manual Optional Hardware and Software 5 0 OPTIONAL HARDWARE AND SOFTWARE This section includes descriptions of the hardware and software options available for the TML87 UV Fluorescence H2S Analyzer For assistance with ordering these options please contact the sales department of Teledyne Monitor Labs Inc at TOLL FREE SUPPORT 800 846 6062 FAX 303 799 4853 TEL 303 792 3300 E MAIL tml_support teledyne com 5 1 Rack Mount Kits Options 20a 20b amp 21 There are several options for mounting the analyzer in standard 19 racks OPTION NUMBER DESCRIPTION OPT 20A Rack mount brackets with 26 in chassis slides
335. r chip notices the change of state of the associated signal latches and holds the state of all eight lines in effect creating an 8 bit data word alerts the key depress detect circuit a flip flop IC translates the 8 bit word into serial data and sends this to the l C interface chip Key Depress Detect Circuit This circuit flips the state of one of the inputs to the interface chip causing it to send an interrupt signal to the CPU 216 05496 Rev A6 87 Instruction Manual Theory Of Operation C Interface Chip e This IC performs several functions e Using a dedicated digital status bit it sends an interrupt signal alerting the CPU that new data from the keyboard is ready to send e Upon acknowledgement by the CPU that it has received the new keyboard data the interface chip resets the key depress detect flip flop n response to commands from the CPU it turns the front panel status LEDs on and off and activates the beeper Informs the CPU when the optional maintenance and second language switches have been opened or closed see Chapter 5 for information on these options Display Data Decoder This decoder translates the serial data sent by the CPU in TTY format into a bitmapped image which is sent over a parallel data bus to the display Display Controller This circuit manages the interactions between the display data decoder and the display itself It generates a clock pulse that keeps the
336. r has two available RS 232 Com ports accessible via 2 DB 9 connectors on the back panel of the instrument The COM1 connector is a male DB 9 connector and the COM2 is a female DB9 connector Male DB 9 RS 232 Female DB 9 COM2 As seen from outside analyzer As seen from outside analyzer GND GND DTE mode GND DCE mode Figure 6 7 Back Panel connector Pin Outs for COM1 amp 2 RS 232 mode The signals from these two connectors are routed from the motherboard via a wiring harness to two 10 pin connectors on the CPU card CN3 COM1 and 4 2 05496 Rev A6 89 Operating Instructions TML87 Instruction Manual CN3 amp CN4 Located on CPU card CTS GND As seen from inside analyzer Figure 6 8 CPU connector Pin Outs for COM1 amp 2 in RS 232 mode Teledyne Instruments offers two mating cables one of which should be applicable for your use e Part number 000077 a DB 9 female to DB 9 female cable 6 feet long Allows connection of COM1 with the serial port of most personal computers Also available as Option 60 Section 5 6 1 e Part number WRO000024 a DB 9 female to DB 25 male cable Allows connection to the most common styles of modems e g Hayes compatible and code activated switches Both cables are configured with straight through wiring and should require no additional adapters To assist in properly connecting the serial ports to either a computer or a
337. r packets of 1 to 3 numbers each e g 192 168 76 55 is the address of the analyzer itself GATEWAY IP ADDRESS Configured by DHCP EDIT key disabled when DHCP is ON A string of numbers very similar to the Instrument IP address e g 192 168 76 1 that is the address of the computer used by your LAN to access the Internet SUBNET MASK Configured by DHCP EDIT key disabled when DHCP is ON Also a string of four packets of 1 to 3 numbers each e g 255 255 252 0 that defines the LAN the device is connected to All addressable devices and computers on a LAN must have the same subnet mask Any transmissions sent to devices with different subnet masks are assumed to be outside of the LAN and are routed through the gateway computer onto the Internet TCP PORT 3000 Editable This number defines the terminal control port by which the instrument is addressed by terminal emulation software such as Internet or Teledyne Instruments sensor e com HOST NAME TML87 Editable The name by which your analyzer will appear when addressed from other computers on the LAN or via the Internet While the default setting for all Teledyne Instruments TML87 analyzers is TML87 the host name may be changed to fit customer needs Do not change the setting for this property unless instructed to by Teledyne Instruments Customer Service personnel 94 05496 Rev A6 87
338. rd communication I C bus relay burnt out CONV TEMP Malfunctioning heater or temperature sensor relay board communication bus relay burnt out PRESS RX CELL Leak malfunctioning valve malfunctioning pump clogged flow orifices sample inlet PRESSURE overpressure H2S SLOPE Calibration error span gas concentration incorrect leaks low lamp output H2S OFFS Incorrect span gas concentration contaminated zero air leak low level calibration off TIME OF DAY Internal clock drifting move across time zones daylight savings time 1 Shown as they appear when analyzer is in 5 mode In SO mode appear as SO2 STB 502 OFFS amp 502 SLOPE In multigas mode both versions appear 11 1 3 Using the Diagnostic Signal Function The signal parameters found under the diagnostics DIAG menu combined with a thorough understanding of the instrument s theory of operation Chapter 10 are useful for troubleshooting in three ways e The technician can view the raw unprocessed signal level of the analyzer s critical inputs and outputs e All of the components and functions that are normally under instrument control can be manually changed Analog and digital output signals can be manually controlled This allows the user to systematically observe the effect of these functions on the operation of the analyzer Figure 11 2 shows an example of how to use the signal menu to view the raw voltag
339. re of the Bad converter heater WARNING H2S gt SO catalytic Bad converter temperature sensor converter is outside its Bad relay controlling the converter heater optimal operating range Entire relay board is malfunctioning 2 buss malfunction DARK CAL The Dark Cal signal is Light leak in reaction cell WARNING higher than 1 000 mV Shutter solenoid is not functioning Failed relay board bus failure Loose connector wiring PMT preamp board bad or out of cal DATA INITIALIZED Data Storage in iDAS was erased Failed disk on chip User cleared data FRONT PANEL WARN The CPU is unable to Communicate with the Front Panel Display Keyboard Warning only appears on serial I O com port s Front panel display will be frozen blank or will not respond Failed keyboard buss failure Loose connector wiring HVPS WARNING High voltage power supply output is lt 400 V or gt 900 V High voltage power supply is bad High voltage power supply is out of cal A D converter circuitry is bad 125 TEMP On units with IZS options Bad IZS heater WARNING installed The permeation Bad 125 temperature sensor tube temperature is Bad relay controlling the IZS heater lt 45 C or gt 55 C Entire relay board is malfunctioning buss malfunction Failure of thermistor interface circuitry on motherboard PMT DET PMT detector output is gt Failed PMT WARNING 4995 mV Malfunctioning PMR preamp board A D converter
340. red in the CPU s memory and in most cases can be viewed through the front panel display The CPU communicates with the user and the outside world in a variety of ways Through the analyzer s keyboard and vacuum fluorescent display over a clocked digital serial I O bus using the protocol pronounced I squared C e RS 232 amp RS485 serial channels e Various analog voltage and current outputs and e Several digital I O channels Finally the CPU issues commands also over the lC bus to a series of relays and switches located on separate printed circuit assembly the relay board located in the rear of the chassis on its own mounting bracket to control the function of key electromechanical devices such as heaters that keep the sample chamber at a steady temperature and when installed the zero span and internal zero span valve sets and heaters 10 4 1 CPU The CPU is a low power 5 VDC 0 8A max high performance 386 based microcomputer running the DR DOS operating system Its operation and assembly conform to the PC 104 specification version 2 3 for embedded PC and PC AT applications It has 2 MB of DRAM memory on board and operates at 40 MHz clock rate over an internal 32 bit data and address bus Chip to chip data handling is performed by two 4 channel direct memory access DMA devices over data busses of either 8 bit or 16 bit bandwidth The CPU supports both RS 232 and RS 485 serial protocols Figure 10 11 shows
341. red to the most recent reference improves the quality of the monitoring data by helping to response to determine if a change in response has occurred keep the calibration relationship more closely matched to For automatic Level 2 zero and span checks the first the reference response It should be kept in mind that any Level 2 check that involves only part of the analyzer s system cannot provide information about the portions of the system not checked and therefore cannot be used as a verification of the overall analyzer calibration Level 2 zero and span checks are not to be used as a basis for analyzer zero or span adjustments calibration updates or adjustment of ambient data They are intended as quick convenient checks to be used between zero and span calibrations to check for possible analyzer malfunction or calibration drift Whenever a Level 2 zero or span check indicates a possible calibration problem a Level 1 zero and span or multipoint calibration should be carried out before any corrective action is taken 8 3 ZERO and SPAN Checks A system of Level 1 and Level 2 zero span checks see Table 8 4 is recommended These checks must be conducted in accordance with the specific guidance given in Subsection 9 1 of Section 2 0 9 Q A Handbook It is recommended Level 1 zero and span checks be conducted every two weeks Level 2 checks should be conducted in between the Level 1 checks at a frequency desired by the user Span concen
342. reen ON when connection to the LAN is valid ACT yellow Flickers on any activity on the LAN TxD green Flickers when the RS 232 port is transmitting data RxD yellow Flickers when the RS 232 port is receiving data 6 10 6 1 Ethernet Card COM2 Communication Modes and Baud Rate The firmware on board the Ethernet card automatically sets the communication modes for the COM2 port The baud rate is also automatically set at 115 200 kBaud 6 10 6 2 Configuring the Ethernet Interface Option using DHCP The Ethernet option for your TML87 uses Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol DHCP to automatically configure its interface with your LAN This requires your network servers also be running DHCP The analyzer will do this the first time you turn the instrument on after it has been physically connected to your network Once the instrument is connected and turned on it will appear as an active device on your network without any extra set up steps or lengthy procedures Should you need to the following Ethernet configuration properties are viewable via the analyzer s front panel 05496 Rev A6 93 Operating Instructions TML87 Instruction Manual Table 6 16 LAN Internet Configuration Properties PROPERTY DEFAULT STATE DESCRIPTION DHCP STATUS On Editable This displays whether the DHCP is turned ON or OFF INSTRUMENT IP ADDRESS Configured by DHCP EDIT key disabled when DHCP is ON This string of fou
343. rence from these gasses A special scrubber kicker mechanism removes any PNA chemicals present in the sample gas before it the reaches the sample chamber e exact wavelength of light needed to excite a specific 5 fluorescing gas is removed by the source UV optical filter e light given off by Nitrogen Oxide and many of the other fluorescing gases is outside of the bandwidth passed by the PMT optical filter 10 2 7 2 UV Absorption by Ozone Because ozone absorbs UV Light over a relatively broad spectrum it could cause a measurement offset by absorbing some of the UV given off by the decaying SO in the sample chamber The TML87 prevents this from occurring by having a very short light path between the area where the SO fluorescence occurs and the PMT detector Because the light path is so short the amount of needed to cause a noticeable effect would be much higher than could be reasonably expected in any application for which this instrument is intended 10 2 7 3 Dilution Certain gases with higher viscosities can lower the flow rate though the critical flow orifice that controls the movement of sample gas though the analyzer reducing the amount of sample gas in the sample chamber and thus the amount of SO available to react with the to the UV light While this can be a significant problem for some 192 05496 Rev A6 87 Instruction Manual Theory Of Operation analyzers the design of the TM
344. rn out zero air scrubber or a change in the span gas concentration due to zero air or ambient air leaking into the span gas line Once the instrument passes a leak check do a flow check Section11 5 2 to make sure that the instrument is supplied with adequate sample gas e Confirm the UV lamp sample pressure and sample temperature readings are correct and steady e Verify that the sample filter element is clean and does not need to be replaced 11 3 4 Inability to Span No SPAN Key In general the TML87 will not display certain keyboard choices whenever the actual value of a parameter is outside of the expected range for that parameter If the calibration menu does not show a SPAN key when carrying out a span calibration the actual concentration must be outside of the range of the expected span gas concentration which can have several reasons e Verify that the expected concentration is set properly to the actual span gas concentration in the CONC sub menu Confirm that the H2S span gas source is accurate This can be done by comparing the source with another calibrated analyzer or by having the H2S source verified by an independent traceable photometer 230 05496 Rev A6 TML87 Instruction Manual TROUBLESHOOTING amp REPAIR e Check for leaks in the pneumatic systems as described in Section 11 5 1 Leaks can dilute the span gas and hence the concentration that the analyzer measures may fall short of the expected conce
345. ront panel AC line power is stepped down and converted to DC power by two DC power supplies One supplies 12 VDC for various valves and valve options while a second supply provides 5 VDC and 15 VDC for logic and analog circuitry as well as the TEC cooler All AC and DC Voltages are distributed through the Relay Board 212 05496 Rev A6 TML87 Instruction Manual Theory Of Operation ON OFF AC POWER ENTRANCE AC POWER DC POWER PUMP H2S gt SO Converter Heaters Sample Chamber Heaters SWITCH Chassis PMT TEC Display Cooling Cooling Control PMT Fan Fan PCA Preamp Keypad CPU RELAY PS 1 5 VDC 15 VDC Mother BOARD Board Temperature sensors PS 2 12 VDC PMT High Voltage Supply b Pressure Sensor Gas Flow Y Sensor 7 Sample Cal d H S gt SO UV Source UV Source UV Source IzS Option 1 I forZ Sand 2 Lamp Lamp Lam 1 Permeation I 125 Valve 1 Shutter Power GRUB Tube Options i Heater Figure 10 19 Power Distribution Block Diagram A 6 75 ampere circuit breaker is built into the ON OFF switch In case of a wiring fault or incorrect supply power the circuit breaker will automatically turn off the analyzer CAUTION turning the analyzer back on Should the power circuit breaker trip correct the condition causing this situatio
346. rop configuration allowing up to eight analyzers to be connected to the same port of the host computer Because both of the DB9 connectors on the analyzer s back panel are needed to construct the Multidrop chain 2 is no longer available for separate RS 232 or RS 485 operation however with the addition of an Ethernet Option option 63 see Sections 5 6 3 and 6 10 6 the COM2 port is available for communication over a 10BaseT LAN JP2 Rear Panel CPU Card as seen from inside Cable to Ethernet Card ee Multidrop PCA Cable to Motherboard Figure 6 12 Location of JP2 on RS232 Multidrop PCA option 62 Each analyzer in the Multidrop chain must have 05496 Rev A6 99 Operating Instructions TML87 Instruction Manual One Teledyne Instruments option 62 installed One 6 straight through DB9 male DB9 Female cable Teledyne Instruments P N WR0000101 is required for each analyzer To set up the network for each analyzer 1 Turn the analyzer on and change its ID code see Section 6 10 1 to a unique 4 digit number Remove the top cover see Section 3 1 of the analyzer and locate JP2 on the Multidrop PCA see Figure 6 12 Make sure that the jumpers are in place connecting pins 9 10 and 11 lt 12 If the analyzer is to be the last instrument on the chain make sure a jumper is in place connecting pins 21 lt gt 22 If you are adding an analyzer to the end of an already existing c
347. s a list of figures and a list of appendices In the electronic version of the manual clicking on any of these table entries automatically views that section 05496 Rev 6 1 TML87 Documentation TML87 Instruction Manual 2 0 Specifications and Warranty Procedure This section contains a list of the analyzer s performance specifications a description of the conditions and configuration under which EPA equivalency was approved 3 0 Getting Started A concise set of instructions for setting up installing and running your analyzer for the first time 4 0 FAQ Answers to the most frequently asked questions about operating the analyzer 5 0 Optional Hardware amp Software A description of optional equipment to add functionality to your analyzer 6 0 Operation Instructions This section includes step by step instructions for operating the analyzer and using its various features and functions 7 0 Calibration Procedures General information and step by step instructions for calibrating your analyzer 8 0 EPA Protocol Calibration Specific information regarding calibration requirements for analyzers used in EPA regulated monitoring applications 9 0 Instrument Maintenance Description of certain preventative maintenance procedures that should be regularly performed on your instrument to keep it in good operating condition This section also includes information on using the iDAS to record diagnostic functions useful in predicting pos
348. s COM1 port Some older computers or code activated switches with a DB 25 serial connector will need a different cable or an appropriate adapter 5 6 2 RS 232 Multidrop Option 62 The Multidrop option is used with any of the RS 232 serial ports to enable communications of up to eight analyzers with the host computer over a chain of RS 232 cables via the instrument s COM1 Port It is subject to the distance limitations of the RS 232 standard The option consists of a small printed circuit assembly which is plugs into to the analyzer s CPU card see Figure 5 4 and is connected to the RS 232 and COM2 DB9 connectors on the instrument s back panel via a cable to the motherboard One option 62 is required for each analyzer along with one 6 straight through DB9 male DB9 Female cable P N 0000101 This option can be installed in conjunction with the Ethernet option Option 63 allowing the instrument to communicate on both types of networks simultaneously For more information on using and setting up this option see Section 6 10 7 05496 Rev A6 41 Optional Hardware and Software TML87 Instruction Manual Rear Panel CPU Card as seen from inside Multidrop Card Figure 5 4 TML87 Multidrop Card 5 6 3 Ethernet Option 63 The Ethernet option allows the analyzer to be connected to any Ethernet local area network LAN running TCP IP The local area network must have routers capable of operating at 10BaseT If Internet
349. s as shown below MODEL 700 Source of Gas Dilution Calibrator SAMPLE Gas with Os generator option Zero Span Valves Option 50 VENT if input is pressurized External Zero Air Scrubber MODEL 701 Calibrated Zero Air H2S gas Generator Athigh concentration Internal Zero Span Option 1ZS Option 51 VENT if input is pressurized Source of SAMPLE Gas Ambient Air Figure 7 3 Setup for Manual Calibration Check with Z S Valve or IZS Option 152 05496 Rev A6 TML87 Instruction Manual Calibration Procedures STEP TWO Perform the zero span check Scroll to the H2S STB test function Wait until H2S STB falls below lt TST TST gt CAL CALZ CALS 0 5 ppb This may SAMPLE RANGE 500 0 PPB H2S XXX X lt TST TST gt CALZ SETUP SAMPLE H2S STB XXX X PPB ACTION take several minutes 25 readings ZERO CAL M presented in the upper right corner of TST 5 gt ZERO the display SAMPLE ACTION Record the H2S readings presented in the upper right corner of the display The value of H2S STB may jump significantly Wait until H2S STB falls below 0 5 ppb This may take several minutes lt TST 5 gt CAL SPAN CAL M 25 EXIT returns to the main SAMPLE display lt 5 5 gt 7 7 Manual Calibration INDEPENDENT or AUTO Reportin
350. s called the effusion rate The concentration of the span gas is determined by three factors Size of the membrane The larger the area of the membrane the more permeation occurs Temperature of the H5S Increasing the temperature increases the pressure inside the tube and therefore increases the effusion rate Flow rate of the zero air If the previous two variables are constant the permeation rate of the calibration gas into the zero air stream will be constant Therefore a lower flow rate of zero air produces higher concentrations of H2S The TML87 usually has a constant flow rate and a constant permeation rate hence variations in concentration can be achieved by changing the IZS temperature Permeation Tube Heater In order to keep the permeation rate constant the 175 enclosure is heated to a constant 50 C 10 above the maximum operating temperature of the instrument The IZS heater is controlled by a precise PID Proportional Integral Derivative temperature control loop A thermistor measures the actual temperature and reports it to the CPU for control feedback 05496 Rev A6 39 Optional Hardware and Software TML87 Instruction Manual CAUTION Gas flow must be maintained at all time for units with a permeation tube installed Insufficient gas flow allows gas to build up to levels that will contaminate the instrument 5 4 3 IZS Permeation Tubes Options 53 55 amp 57 Several replacement permeation tubes
351. s for Out Of Range 2 225 Table 11 3 Relay Board Status EEDS erede rn a ee te ER e TR eee URP I es 228 Table 11 4 DC Power Test Point and Wiring Color 235 Table 11 5 DC Power Supply Acceptable 235 Table 11 6 Relay Board Control nennen nennen nnns 237 Table 11 7 Analog Output Test Function Nominal 237 Table 11 8 Status Outputs Check Pin 238 Table 11 9 Lamp Signal Levels a cesses tori D BU rte ir Re er RR p Rei E Ee ERRARE 252 Table 12 1 Static Generation Voltages for Typical mem 262 Table 12 2 Sensitivity of Electronic Devices to Damage by 262 05496 Rev A6 xi List of Appendices TML87 Instruction Manual LIST OF APPENDICES APPENDIX A VERSION SPECIFIC SOFTWARE DOCUMENTATION APPENDIX A 1 TML87 Software Menu Trees APPENDIX 2 TML87 Setup Variables for Serial I O APPENDIX A 3 TML87 Warnings and Test Functions APPENDIX 4 TML87 Signal I O Definitions APPENDIX A 5 TML87 iDAS Parameters APPENDIX A 6 Terminal Command Designators APPENDIX A 7 Setting up Communications APPENDIX B TML87 SPARE PARTS LIST APPENDIX C REPAIR QUESTIONNAIRE TML87 APPENDIX D ELECTRONIC SCHEMATICS xii 05496 Rev A6 TML87 Instruction Manual TML87 D
352. s is accomplished by measuring the ultraviolet fluorescence of the SO in the sample chamber 05496 Rev A6 185 Theory Operation TML87 Instruction Manual 10 1 2 SO Ultraviolet Fluorescence The physical principle upon which the TML87 s measurement method is based is the fluorescence that occurs when sulfur dioxide SO is excited by ultraviolet light with wavelengths in the range of 190 nm 230 nm This reaction is a two step process The first stage Equation 9 2 occurs when SO molecules are struck by photons of the appropriate ultraviolet wavelength In the case of the Model TML60 a band pass filter between the source of the UV light and the affected gas limits the wavelength of the light to approximately 214 nm The SO molecules absorbs some of energy from the UV light causing one of the electrons of each of the affected molecules to move to a higher energy orbital state la SO 502 Equation 9 2 The amount of SO converted to excited SO the sample chamber is dependent on the average intensity of the UV light a and not its peak intensity because the intensity of UV light is not constant in every part of the sample chamber Some of the photons are absorbed by the SO as the light travels through the sample gas Darkened 214nm REACTION CELL Filter filled with SO M Figure 10 1 UV Absorption in the 87 Reaction Cell The equation for defining the average intensity of the UV
353. s is supplied to the analyzer through the zero gas and span gas inlets rather than through the sample inlet The zero and cal operations are initiated directly and independently with dedicated keys CALZ amp CALS STEP ONE Connect the sources of zero air and span gas to the respective ports on the rear panel Figure 3 2 as shown below MODEL 700 Source of Gas Dilution Calibrator SAMPLE Gas with generator option VENT if input is pressurized Sample Exhaust Span External Zero MODEL 701 Air Scrubber Zero Air Calibrated Zero Air H2S gas Generator At high concentration Figure 7 2 Setup for Manual Calibration with Z S Valve Option Installed 148 05496 Rev A6 TML87 Instruction Manual Calibration Procedures Step Two Set the expected H2S span gas value SAMPLE RANGE 500 0 PPB XXX X lt TST TST gt CAL SETUP This sequence causes the analyzer to prompt for the expected H2S span The H2S span concentration concentration values automatically default to 450 0 Conc M P CAL RANGE 500 00p PPB To change this value to the actual concentration of the span gas enter the number by pressing the key under each digit until the expected value appears lt 5 TST ZERO EXIT ignores the new setting The span gas concentration M P CAL H2S SPAN CONC 450 0 Conc and returns to the previous should always be 90 of the display selected reporting range 0 0 0 4 5 0
354. s separate electronic signal levels see Section 6 9 4 1 and if the instrument is equipped with the SO2 H2S multigas measurement option different gas measurements e Auto range AUTO mode As in single range mode both outputs are slaved together and will represent the same measurement span however this mode gives the analyzer the ability to automatically switch between the two user selected ranges High and Low This switching occurs dynamically as the concentration value fluctuates High low range status is available via the External Digital I O Status Bits see Section 6 12 1 1 To select the Analog Output Range Type press SAMPLE RANGE 500 0 PPB lt TST TST CAL SAMPLE ENTER SETUP PASS 818 SETUP X X RANGE CONTROL MENU SETUP X X MODE SET UNIT EXIT CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE SETUP X X RANGE MODE SNGL EXIT Returns to the Main SNGL IND AUTO ENTR EXIT SAMPLE Display Only one of the range modes may be active at any time Go To Section 6 7 4 6 7 4 Single Range mode SNGL The default range mode for the analyzer is single range in which all analog concentration outputs are set to the same reporting range This reporting range can be set to any value between 5 0 ppb and 20 000 ppb While the two outputs always have the same reporting range the span and scaling of their electronic signals may also be configured for differently e g A1 0 10 V A2 0 0 1 V 60 05496 Rev A6
355. s the current produced by the current loop option Similar to the voltage calibration the software allows this current adjustment to be made in 100 10 or 1 count increments Since the exact current increment per voltage count varies from output to output and from instrument to instrument you will need to measure the change in the current with a current meter placed in series with the output circuit Figure 6 6 See Table 3 2 for pin assignments of the Analog Out connector on the rear panel Recording Analyzer Device Figure 6 6 Setup for Calibrating Current Outputs 05496 Rev A6 79 Operating Instructions TML87 Instruction Manual To adjust the zero and span values of the current outputs activate the ANALOG I O CONFIGURATION MENU see Section 6 9 1 then press C FROM ANALOG CONFIGURATION MENU DIAG ANALOG I CONFIGURATION PREV NEXT ENTR EXIT DIAG AIN CALI BRATED NO SET EDIT EXIT Press SET to select the analog output channel to be configured DIAG AIO CONC OUT 2 CURR NO CAL lt SET SET EDIT EXIT DIAG AIO CONC OUT 2 RANGE CURR SET SET EDIT EXIT DIAG AIO CONC OUT 2 CALIBRATED NO SET CAL EXIT The instrument attempt to automatically calibrate the channel then beep DIAG AIO AUTO CALIBRATING CONC OUT 2 DIAG AIO CONC OUT 2 CURR Z 0 0100 UP10
356. s to combine flags enable dilution factor zero span valves installed IZS installed implies zero span valves installed 16 display units in concentration field 32 enable software controlled maintenance mode 128 enable switch controlled maintenance mode 2048 enable Internet option instances of 25 in TML87 are changed to TRS in 60 TML87 60 Must power cycle instrument for these options to fully take effect 05492 Rev C A 19 APPENDI X A 3 Warnings and Test Functions Revision TML87 Instruction Manual APPENDIX A 3 Warnings and Test Functions Revision A 3A Table 2 TML87 Warning Messages Revision A 3A 7 MESSAGE TEXT DESCRI PTI ON WSYSRES SYSTEM RESET Instrument was power cycled or the CPU was reset WDATAINIT DATA INITIALIZED Data storage was erased WCONFIGINIT CONFIG INITIALIZED Configuration storage was reset to factory configuration or erased WPMT PMT DET WARNING PMT detector outside of warning limits specified by DETECTOR_LIMIT variable WUVLAMP UV LAMP WARNING UV lamp reading outside of warning limits specified by DETECTOR_LIMIT variable SAMPLE FLOW WARN Sample flow outside of warning limits specified by SAMP_FLOW_SET variable WSAMPPRESS SAMPLE PRESS WARN Sample pressure outside of warning limits specified by SAMP_PRESS_ SET variable WCONVTEMP CONV TEMP WARNING Converter temperature outside of warning limits specified
357. sage the cause needs to be found Do If more than one warning is not repeatedly clear warnings active the next message will take its place without corrective action p Once the last warning has been cleared the analyzer returns to SAMPLE Mode Figure 11 1 Viewing and Clearing warning messages 222 05496 Rev A6 TML87 Instruction Manual TROUBLESHOOTING amp REPAIR Table 11 1 Warning Messages Indicated Failures WARNING MESSAGE FAULT CONDITION POSSIBLE CAUSES ANALOG CAL The instrument s A D A parameter for one of the analog outputs has been changed and the calibration WARNING circuitry or one of its routine was not re run analog outputs is not AID circuitry failure on motherboard calibrated Other motherboard electronic failure BOX TEMP Box Temp is lt 5 C or gt 48 NOTE Box temperature typically runs 7 C warmer than ambient temperature WARNING C Poor blocked ventilation to the analyzer Stopped exhaust fan Ambient temperature outside of specified range CANNOT DYN Dynamic Span operation Measured concentration value is too high or low SPAN failed Concentration slope value to high or too low CANNOT DYN Dynamic Zero operation Measured concentration value is too high ZERO failed Concentration offset value to high CONFIG Configuration and Failed disk on chip INITIALIZED Calibration data reset to User erased data original Factory state CONV TEMP The temperatu
358. sed SAMPLE PRESSURE HG A x SAMP PRESS SLOPE PRESSCO 29 92 HG A Equation 10 5 SAMPLE PRESSURE The ambient pressure of the sample gas as measured by the instrument s sample pressure sensor see Figure 10 7 in Hg A SAMP_PRESS_SLOPE Sample pressure slope correction factor The default value is 1 Section 6 8 describes the method for enabling disabling the TPC feature 05496 Rev 6 219 Theory Operation TML87 Instruction Manual 10 7 4 Internal Data Acquisition System iDAS The iDAS is designed to implement predictive diagnostics that store trending data for users to anticipate when an instrument will require service Large amounts of data can be stored in non volatile memory and retrieved in plain text format for further processing with common data analysis programs The iDAS has a consistent user interface in all Teledyne Instruments New data parameters and triggering events can be added to the instrument as needed Depending on the sampling frequency and the number of data parameters the iDAS can store several months of data which are retained even when the instrument is powered off or a new firmware is installed The iDAS permits users to access the data through the instrument s front panel or the remote interface The latter can automatically download stored data for further processing For information on using the iDAS refer to Section 6 11 User Notes 220 05496 Rev A6 TML87 I
359. shaking is commonly used with modems or terminal emulation protocols as well as by Teledyne Instrument s sensor e com software HARDWARE Improves data transfer rate when on of the COMM ports FIFO 512 COMMAND 4096 Enables a command prompt when in terminal mode PROMPT 1 Modes are listed in the order in which they appear in the SETUP gt MORE gt COMM gt CON 1 OR 2 gt MODE menu The default sting for this feature is ON Do not disable unless instructed to by Teledyne Instruments Customer Service personnel 102 05496 Rev A6 TML87 Instruction Manual Operating Instructions Press the following keys to select a communication mode for a one of the COMM Ports such as the following example where HESSEN PROTOCOL mode is enabled SAMPLE RANGE 500 0 PPB TST 5 gt CAL SAMPLE ENTER SETUP PASS 818 SETUP X X PRI MARY SETUP MENU CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE SETUP X X SECONDARY SETUP MENU COMM Select which COM SETUP X X COMMUNICATIONS MENU port to configure ID COM1 COM2 The sum of the mode IDs of the selected COM1 MODE 0 modes is displayed here SET EDIT SETUP X X COM1 QUIET MODE OFF NEXT ENTR EXIT Continue pressing next until SETUP COM1 HESSEN PROTOCOL OFF Use PREV and NEXT keys to move between available modes PREV NEXT OF ENTR EXIT A mode is enabled by toggling the ON OFF key SETUP X X COM1 HESSEN PR
360. should be placed in the quality records file for this instrument Carefully remove the top cover of the analyzer and check for internal shipping damage e Remove the set screw located in the top center of the rear panel e Remove the screws fastening the top cover to the unit four per side e cover straight up CAUTION Never disconnect electronic circuit boards wiring harnesses or electronic subassemblies while the unit is under power Inspect the interior of the instrument to make sure all circuit boards and other components are in good shape and properly seated Check the connectors of the various internal wiring harnesses and pneumatic hoses to make sure they are firmly and properly seated Verify that all of the optional hardware ordered with the unit has been installed These are checked on the paperwork Form 04551 accompanying the analyzer 05496 Rev A6 9 Getting Started TML87 Instruction Manual Once you have determined that no shipping damage exists and the unit includes all expected hardware options remove five RED colored shipping screws from the bottom of the chassis shown in Figure 3 1 There are e Three locking down the sample chamber sensor housing assembly e Two locking down the internal pump visible from bottom of instrument Sensor Housing Shipping Screws Remove from inside of instrument Pump Shipping Screws Remove from outside bottom of instrument Figure 3
361. sible component failures before they happen 10 0 Theory of Operation An in depth look at the various principals by which your analyzer operates as well as a description of how the various electronic mechanical and pneumatic components of the instrument work and interact with each other A close reading of this section is invaluable for understanding the instrument s operation 11 0 Troubleshooting Section This section includes pointers and instructions for diagnosing problems with the instrument such as excessive noise or drift as well as instructions on performing repairs of the instrument s major subsystems 12 0 Electro static Discharge Primer This section describes how static electricity occurs why it is a significant concern and how to avoid it and avoid allowing ESD to affect the reliable and accurate operation of your analyzer 2 05496 Rev A6 TML87 Instruction Manual TML87 Documentation Appendices For easier access and better updating some information has been separated out of the manual and placed in a series of appendices at the end of this manual These include software menu trees warning messages definitions of iDAS amp serial variables spare parts list repair questionnaire interconnect listing and drawings and electronic schematics User Notes 05496 Rev A6 3 TML87 Documentation TML87 Instruction Manual User Notes 4 05496 Rev A6 TML87 Instruction Manual Specifi
362. ssurance program centered on this aspect and including attention to the built in warning features of the TML87 periodic inspection regular zero span checks and routine maintenance is paramount to achieving this In order to have a better understanding of the factors involved in assuring continuous and reliable information from the TML87 it is strongly recommended that Publication No PB 273 518 Quality Assurance Handbook for Air Pollution Measurement Systems abbreviated Q A Handbook be purchased from the NTIS phone 703 605 6000 Special attention should be paid to Section 2 9 which deals with fluorescence based SO analyzers and upon which most of this section is based Specific regulations regarding the use and operation of ambient hydrogen sulfide analyzers can be found in 40 CFR 50 and 40 CFR 58 Both publications are available from the U S Government Printing Office phone 202 512 0327 8 1 1 Calibration of Equipment In general calibration is the process of adjusting the gain and offset of the TML87 against some recognized standard The reliability and usefulness of all data derived from any analyzer depends primarily upon its state of calibration In this section the term dynamic calibration is used to express a multipoint check against known standards and involves introducing gas samples of known concentration into the instrument in order to adjust the instrument to a predetermined sensitivity and to produce a calibration relationship
363. summary given that the absorption rate of SO a is constant the amount of fluorescence F is a result of The amount of exited SO created which is affected by the variable factors from equation 10 2 above concentration of SO intensity of UV light fo path length of the UV light X and e The amount of fluorescent light created which is affected by the variable factors from equation 10 5 the amount of SO present and the rate of decay which changes based on the temperature of the gas So when the intensity of the light lo is known path length of excited light is short X the temperature of the gas is known and compensated for so that the rate of SO2 decay is constant k and no interfering conditions are present such as interfering gases or stray light the amount of fluorescent light emitted F is directly related to the concentration of the SO in the Sample Chamber The Model 100 E UV Fluorescence SO Analyzer is specifically designed to create these circumstances The light path is very short X A reference detector measures the intensity of the available excitation UV light and is used to remove effects of lamp drift fo e The temperature of the sample gas is measured and controlled via heaters attached to the sample chamber so that the rate of decay K is constant A special hydrocarbon scrubber removes the most common interfering gases from the sample gas And finally the design of the s
364. supplied to the motherboard for further signal processing All sensors are linearized in the firmware and can be span calibrated from the front panel See section 6 9 8 for instructions on performing this test 10 4 8 Relay Board The relay board is the central switching unit of the analyzer It contains power relays status LEDs for all heated zones and valves as well as valve drivers thermocouple amplifiers power distribution connectors and the two switching power supplies of the analyzer The relay board communicates with the motherboard over the 2 bus and is the main board for trouble shooting power problems of any kind 10 4 8 1 Heater Control The TML87 uses a variety of heaters for its individual components All heaters are AC powered and can be configured for 100 120 VAC or 220 230VAC at 50 60 Hz The two sample chamber heaters are electronically connected in parallel for analyzers at 100 120 VAC line power and in series for units configured for 220 230 VAC One configuration plug on the relay board determines the power configuration for the entire analyzer On units with IZS options installed an additional set of AC heaters is attached to the IZS permeation tube Some special TML87 models may have other non standard heating zones installed such as a dilution manifold In order to operate efficiently the 5 SO converter must be heated to 315 C An AC band heater wrapped around the converter cartridge contains two heater coils th
365. t Current Loop Range RANGE MINIMUM OUTPUT MAXIMUM OUTPUT 0 20 mA 0 mA 20 mA These are the physical limits of the current loop modules typical applications use 2 20 or 4 20 mA for the lower and upper limits Please specify desired range when ordering this option The default offset for all ranges is 0 mA Pin assignments for the output connector at the rear panel of the instrument are shown in Table 6 11 ANALOG OUT A1 4 2 Table 6 11 Analog Output Pin Assignments PIN ANALOG VOLTAGE CURRENT OUTPUT SIGNAL SIGNAL M V Out Out Ground Out V Out Out A2 Ground Out A3 Not Used Not Used M V Out not available Ground not available See Figure 3 2 for the location of the analog output connector on the instrument s rear panel 05496 Rev A6 73 Operating Instructions TML87 Instruction Manual 6 9 4 1 Analog Output Signal Type and Range Span Selection To select an output signal type DC Voltage or current and level for one output channel activate the ANALOG CONFIGURATION MENU see Section 6 9 1 then press FROM ANALOG I O CONFIGURATION MENU DIAG ANALOG CONFIGURATION PREV NEXT ENTR EXIT DIAG AIO AOUTS CALIBRATED NO SET SET gt CAL Press SET gt to select the analog output channel to be configured Press EDIT to continue DIAG AIO CONC OUT 2 5V CAL SET SET EDIT DIAG AIO CONC OUT 2 RANGE 5V
366. t at the factory were also listed in the Final Test and Validation Data Sheet which was shipped with the instrument Values outside the acceptable ranges indicate a failure of one or more of the analyzer s subsystems Functions with values that are within the acceptable range but have significantly changed from the measurements recorded on the factory data sheet may also indicate a failure or a maintenance item A problem report worksheet has been provided in Appendix C to assist in recording the value of these test functions The following table Table 11 2 contains some of the more common causes for these values to be out of range 224 05496 Rev A6 TML87 Instruction Manual TROUBLESHOOTING amp REPAIR Table 11 2 Test Functions Possible Causes for Out Of Range Values TEST FUNCTION INDICATED FAILURE S H2S STB Unstable concentrations leaks SAMPLE FL Leaks clogged critical flow orifice PMT Calibration error HVPS problem PMT problem No flow leaks NORM PMT Calibration error HVPS problem PMT problem AZERO Leaks malfunctioning AutoZero valve HVPS HVPS broken preamp board circuit problems RCELL TEMP Malfunctioning heater relay board communication C bus relay burnt out BOX TEMP Environment out of temperature operating range broken thermistor runaway heater PMT TEMP TEC cooling circuit broken High chassis temperature 12V power supply IZS TEMP OPTION Malfunctioning heater relay boa
367. t filter remains engaged for a fixed time period to prevent chattering Two conditions must be simultaneously met to switch to the short filter First the instantaneous concentration must exceed the average in the long filter by a fixed amount Second the instantaneous concentration must exceed the average in the long filter by a portion or percentage of the average in the long filter If necessary the filter lengths of these two modes may be changed to any value between 1 and 1000 samples Long sample lengths provide better signal to noise rejection but poor response times Conversely shorter filter lengths result in poor signal to noise rejection but quicker response times 10 7 2 Calibration Slope and Offset Calibration of the analyzer is performed exclusively in software During instrument calibration Chapters 7 and 8 the user enters expected values for zero and span through the front panel keypad and commands the instrument to make readings of sample gases with known concentrations of H2S The readings taken are adjusted linearized and compared to the expected values as input With this information the software computes values for both instrument slope and offset and stores these values in memory for use in calculating the H2S concentration of the sample gas Instrument slope and offset values recorded during the last calibration can be viewed by pressing the following keystroke sequence 218 05496 Rev A6 TML87 Instruction Ma
368. t iDAS configuration RECORDS name Print number of iDAS records REPORT name RECORDS number FROM 2 start date TO2 end date VERBOSE COMPACT HEX Print DAS Print iDAS records records date format MM DD YYYY or YY HH MM SS CANCEL Halt printing iDAS records LIST Print setup variables name value warn low warn high Modify variable V ID name value Modify enumerated variable CONFIG Print instrument configuration MAINT ON OFF Enter exit maintenance mode MODE Print current instrument mode DASBEGIN lt data channel definitions gt DASEND Upload iDAS configuration CHANNELBEGIN propertylist CHANNELEND Upload single iDAS channel CHANNELDELETE name Delete iDAS channels 05492 Rev C A 29 APPENDIX A 6 Terminal Command Designators Revision TML87 Instruction Manual The command syntax follows the command type separated by a space character Strings in brackets are optional designators The following key assignments also apply Table A 8 Terminal Key Assignments Revision A 3A TERMI NAL KEY ASSI GNMENTS ESC Abort line CR ENTER Execute command Ctrl C Switch to computer mode COMPUTER MODE KEY ASSI GNMENTS LF line feed Execute command Ctrl T Switch to terminal mode A 30 05492 Rev C TML87 Instruction Manual APPENDIX 7 Setting up Communications APPENDIX A 7 Setting up Communications Setting up the communications for integration with a Tele
369. t recorder and or data logger optional 05496 Rev A6 141 Calibration Procedures TML87 Instruction Manual 7 1 2 Zero Air Zero air is similar in chemical composition to the Earth s atmosphere but scrubbed of all components that might affect the analyzer s readings For H2S measuring devices zero air should be similar in composition to the sample gas but devoid of H5S hydrocarbons and Sulfur dioxide SO Devices such as the API Model 701 zero air generator that condition ambient air by drying and removal of pollutants are available We recommend this type of device for generating zero air 7 1 3 Gas Standards Span gas is specifically mixed to match the chemical composition of the gas being measured at about 90 of the desired full measurement range For example if the measurement range is 500 ppb the span gas should have an H2S concentration of about 450 ppb We strongly recommend that span calibration is carried out with bottled calibrated H2S or SO span gas although itis possible to use a permeation tube such as that included in the IZS valve option Span gases should be certified to a specific accuracy to ensure accurate calibration of the analyzer Typical gas accuracy for calibrated span gases is 1 or 2 H2S and SO standard gases should be mixed in nitrogen 7 1 4 Permeation Tubes Teledyne Instruments offers an IZS option operating with permeation devices The accuracy of these devices is about 596 Whereas this
370. ten the screws using a high temperature anti seize agent such as copper paste Make sure to use proper alignment of the heater with respect to the converter tubes e Replace the converter assembly route the cables through the holes in the housing and reconnect them properly Reconnect the grounding clamp around the heater leads for safe operation Re attach the tube fittings to the converter and replace the insulation and cover Replace the instrument cover and power up the analyzer 9 3 6 Cleaning the Sample chamber The sample chamber should be cleaned whenever troubleshooting suggests A dirty sample chamber will cause excessive noise drifting zero or span values or low response For cleaning procedures refer to Section 11 6 3 05496 Rev A6 181 Instrument Maintenance TML87 Instruction Manual 9 3 7 Cleaning or Changing Critical Flow Orifices A critical flow orifice located on the exhaust manifold maintains the proper flow rate of gas through the TML87 analyzer Refer to section 10 3 3 for a detailed description of its functionality and location Despite the fact that this device is protected by sintered stainless steel filters it can on occasion clog particularly if the instrument is operated without a sample filter or in an environment with very fine sub micron particle size dust 1 2 3 4 o 10 11 12 Turn off power to the instrument and vacuum pump Locate the critical flow orifice on t
371. terface for iDAS changes The green SAMPLE LED on the instrument front panel which indicates the analyzer status also indicates certain aspects of the iDAS status Table 6 19 Front Panel LED Status Indicators for iDAS LED STATE IDAS STATUS Off System is in calibration mode Data logging can be enabled or disabled for this mode Calibration data are typically stored at the end of calibration periods concentration data are typically not sampled diagnostic data should be collected Blinking Instrument is in hold off mode a short period after the system exits calibrations iDAS channels can be enabled or disabled for this period Concentration data are typically disabled whereas diagnostic should be collected Sampling normally The iDAS can be disabled only by disabling or deleting its individual data channels 6 11 1 iDAS Structure The iDAS is designed around the feature of a record A record is a single data point of one parameter stored in one or more data channels and generated by one of several triggering events The entire iDAS configuration is stored in a script which can be edited from the front panel or downloaded edited and uploaded to the instrument in form of a string of plain text lines through the communication ports iDAS data are defined by the PARAMETER type and are stored through different triggering EVENTS in data CHANNELS which relate triggering events to data parameters and define certain opera
372. th possible hazardous consequences 05496 Rev A6 i Table of Contents TML87 Instruction Manual TABLE OF CONTENTS SAFETY MESSAGES E M P 1 TABLE OF G B iler VIII LIST OE TABLES nente etudtaceceutastensuatattensupedecesatestuatceesstcseteaduuetuaducceessdivarcuces ctuabouetsvtucesedutzecusescatesss X LHIST OF APPENDICES ii Sa cu aede or te XII 1 0 TME87 DOCUMENTAT ION 2e ctr rre anie nnn iE rage uuu Eau i na cen i Ree enaa Kiana aan ekia Dan agga ca ad 1 UR Using ATA Manua eC 1 2 0 SPECIFICATIONS AND APPROVALS 1 1 421 nnne inii inris setis inii tn isse nitri niens irse tein seen nr nnne 5 VAS ee m MEE 5 2 2 EPA Equivalency innere entren nennen nennen 6 2 3 GE Mark Compliance oce ete tiit iii pe Qo ue eo doe dee Eee e e doce ede veneered 6 PAM ionrier iure 6 2 3 2 Salety COMPIAN CE ssa aiee 7 2 4 Warranty Procedure 1 isnt 7 3 0 GETTING STARTED
373. that number of records This check for memory space may also make an upload of an iDAS configuration with sensor e com or a Terminal program fail if the combined number of records would be exceeded In this case it is suggested to either try to determine from the front panel 05496 Rev A6 117 Operating Instructions TML87 Instruction Manual what the maximum number of records can be or use trial and error in designing the iDAS script or calculate the number of records using the DAS or sensor e com manuals To set the number of records for one channel from the front panel press SETUP DAS EDIT ENTR and the following key sequence YES will delete all data in this channel Toggle keys to set number of records 1 99999 From the DATA ACQUISITION menu see Section 6 12 2 2 Edit Data Channel Menu SETUP X X 0 ATIMER 2 900 INS DEL EDIT PRNT EXIT SETUP X X NAME CONC SET SET EDIT PRINT Press SET key until Y NUMBER OF RECORDS 000 SETUP X X SET SET EDIT PRINT SETUP X X EDIT RECOPRDS DELET DATA YES SETUP X X REPORT PERIODD DAYS 0 0 0 0 0 0 ENTR EXIT Exits to the main Data Acquisition menu NO returns to the previous menu ENTR accepts the new setting and returns to the previous menu EXIT ignores the new setting and returns to the previous menu 118 05496 Rev A6
374. the calibration password has been enabled using the PASS menu item found under the Setup Menu see below the system will prompt the user for a password anytime CAL CALZ or CALS is activated 52 05496 Rev A6 87 Instruction Manual Operating Instructions The default status of the calibration password is OFF To enable the calibration password press SAMPLE RANGE 500 0 PPB 25 TST 5 gt CAL SETUP ENTER SETUP PASS 818 ENTR accepts displayed password value EXIT EXIT returns to SAMPLE display SETUP X X PRIMARY SETUP MENU SAMPLE CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE CAL PASSWORD SETUP X X PASSWORD ENABLE OFF default state is Toggles OFF ENTR EXIT password status On Off PASSWORD ENABLE ON ENTR EXIT ENTR accepts the change SETUP X X PASSWORD ENABLE ON EXIT ignores the change ON ENTR EXIT If the calibration password 101 is enabled the following keypad sequence will be required to enter one of the calibration modes SAMPLE RANGE 500 0 PPB 25 lt TST 5 gt CAL CALZ CALS SETUP SAMPLE ENTER SETUP PASS 0 Prompts password number T 0 0 0 ENTR EXIT Lo ENTER SETUP PASS 0 Press Individual 1 0 1 ENTR EXIT keys tose q gt 101 LCC M P CAL RANGE 500 0 H2S X XXX lt TST TST gt ZERO CONC EXIT Continue calibration process 05496 Rev A6 53 Opera
375. the analyzer unplug the power cord and remove the cover 2 Locate the IZS oven in the rear left of the analyzer 05496 Rev A6 175 Instrument Maintenance TML87 Instruction Manual 3 Remove the top layer of insulation if necessary 4 Unscrew the black aluminum cover of the IZS oven 3 screws using a medium Phillips head screw driver Leave the fittings and tubing connected to the cover 5 Remove the old permeation tube if necessary and replace it with the new tube Make sure that the tube is placed into the larger of two holes and that the open permeation end of the tube plastic is facing up 6 the cover with three screws and make sure that the sealing O ring is properly in place and that the three screws are tightened evenly 7 Replace the analyzer cover plug the power cord back in and turn on the analyzer 8 Carry out an IZS span check to see if the new permeation device works properly The permeation rate may need several days to stabilize WARNING Do not leave instrument turned off for more than 8 hours without removing the permeation tube Do not ship the instrument without removing the permeation tube The tube continues to emit gas even at room temperature and will contaminate the entire instrument 9 3 3 Maintaining the SO Scrubber The SO scrubber of your TML87 utilizes a consumable compound to absorb SO from the sample gas that must be replaced periodically in order for t
376. the board may be faulty A leak in the sample system to vacuum may also cause this voltage to be between about 0 6 and 4 5 Make sure that the front panel reading of the sample pressure is at about 1 in Hg A less than ambient pressure 11 5 16 IZS Option The zero span valves and IZS options need to be enabled in the software contact the factory on how to do this See Figure 5 2 and Figure 5 3 for a flow diagram with zero span valve or IZS option e Check for the physical presence of the valves or the IZS option e Check that a working perm tube is installed in the IZS oven assembly e Check front panel for correct software configuration When the instrument is in SAMPLE mode the front panel display should show CALS and CALZ buttons in the second line of the display The presence of the buttons indicates that the option has been enabled in software In addition the IZS option is enabled if the TEST functions show a parameter named IZS TEMP 05496 Rev A6 241 TROUBLESHOOTING amp REPAIR TML87 Instruction Manual The semi permeable PTFE membrane of the permeation tube is affected by humidity If the instrument is installed in an air conditioned shelter the air is usually dry enough to produce good results If the instrument is installed in an environment with variable or high humidity variations in the permeation tube output will be significant In this case a dryer for the supply air is recommended dew point should be 20 C or less
377. the port will respond or pass on commands port is inactive for one hour it will automatically logoff which can also be achieved with the LOGOFF command e Three unsuccessful attempts to log on with an incorrect password will cause subsequent logins to be disabled for 1 hour even if the correct password is used e f not logged on the only active command is the request for the help screen e following messages will be returned at logon LOGON SUCCESSFUL Correct password given o LOGON FAILED Password not given or incorrect o LOGOFF SUCCESSFUL Connection terminated successfully 05496 Rev 6 131 Operating Instructions TML87 Instruction Manual To log on to the model TML87 analyzer with SECURITY MODE feature enabled type LOGON 940331 940331 is the default password To change the default password use the variable RS232 PASS issued as follows V RS232 55 Where N is any numeral between 0 and 9 6 12 2 8 sensor e com Remote Control Program sensor e com is an easy to use yet powerful interface program that allows accessing and controlling any of Teledyne Instruments main line of ambient and stack gas instruments from a remote connection through direct cable modem or Ethernet Running sensor e com a user can Establish a link from a remote location to the TML87 through direct cable connection via RS 232 modem or Ethernet View the instrument s front panel and remotely a
378. thin the electrostatic field or removed from the region of the electrostatic field and grounded somewhere else a second discharge will occur as the charge is transferred from the device to ground 12 3 Common Myths About ESD Damage e didn t feel a shock so there was no electro static discharge The human nervous system isn t able to feel a static discharge of less than 3500 volts Most devices are damaged by discharge levels much lower than that didn t touch it so there was no electro static discharge Electro Static charges are fields whose lines of force can extend several inches or sometimes even feet away from the surface bearing the charge e It still works so there was no damage Sometimes the damaged caused by electro static discharge can completely sever a circuit trace causing the device to fail immediately More likely the trace will be only partially occluded by the damage causing degraded performance of the device or worse weakening the trace This weakened circuit may seem to function fine for a short time but even the very low voltage and current levels of the device s normal operating levels will eat away at the defect over time causing the device to fail well before its designed lifetime is reached These latent failures are often the most costly since the failure of the equipment in which the damaged device is installed causes down time lost data lost productivity as well as possible failure and damage to other pie
379. three possible problems e One or more of the keys is bad e The interrupt signal between the keyboard circuit and the motherboard is broken due to a cabling problem or e The keyboard circuit is bad You can verify this failure by logging on to the instrument using sensor e com or a terminal program If the analyzer responds to remote commands and the display changes accordingly the display wiring or the 2 bus may be faulty 11 5 7 Relay Board The relay board circuit can be checked by observing the condition of its status LEDs as described in Section 11 1 4 and the associated output when toggled on and off through the SIGNAL I O function in the DIAG menu see Section 6 9 2 If the front panel display responds to key presses and D1 on the relay board is not flashing then either the connection between the motherboard and the relay board is bad or the relay board itself is bad If D1 on the relay board is flashing but toggling an output in the Signal function menu does not toggle the output s status LED there is a circuit problem or possibly a blown driver chip on the relay board If D1 on the Relay board is flashing and the status indicator for the output in question heater valve etc toggles properly using the Signal I O function but the output device does not turn on off the associated device valve or heater or its control device valve driver heater relay is malfunctioning 236 05496 Rev A6 TML87 Instru
380. ting Instructions TML87 Instruction Manual 6 4 Setup Mode The SETUP mode contains a variety of choices that are used to configure the analyzer s hardware and software features perform diagnostic procedures gather information on the instrument s performance and configure or access data from the internal data acquisition system iDAS For a visual representation of the software menu trees refer to Appendix A 1 The areas accessed under the Setup mode are Table 6 4 Primary Setup Mode Features and Functions KEYPAD MANUAL MODE OR FEATURE LABEL DESCRIPTION SECTION Analyzer Configuration CFG Lists key hardware and software configuration information 6 5 Used to set up and operate the AutoCal feature AutoCal Feature ACAL Only appears if the analyzer has one of the internal valve 7 9 options installed Internal Data Acquisition iDAS Analog Output Reporting DAS Used to set up the iDAS system and view recorded data 6 11 Used to configure the output signals generated by the Range Configuration RICE instrument s Analog outputs On Calibration Password Security PASS Turns the calibration password feature ON OFF 6 3 1 Internal Clock Configuration CLK Used to Set or adjust the instrument s internal clock 6 6 Advanced SETUP features MORE This button accesses the instrument s secondary setup menu 2 Table 6 5 Secondary Setup Mode Features and Functions KEYPAD MANUAL MODE OR FEATURE
381. tinuously Valve broken or stuck valve driver chip broken ON or OFF green Valve 1 sample cal valve Continuously Valve broken or stuck valve driver chip broken status ON or OFF D9 green Valve 2 SO2 H2S valve status Continuously Valve broken or stuck valve driver chip broken ON or OFF D10 green Valve 3 Spare N A N A D11 green Valve 4 Spare N A N A D12 green Valve 5 Spare N A N A D13 green Valve 6 Spare N A N A D14 green Valve 7 Spare N A N A D15 green Mosfet1 Unused N A N A D16 Green Mosfet2 Unused N A N A 1 Special configurations only Only active for instruments with 2 5 valve 125 options installed 11 2 Gas Flow Problems The standard TML87 has one main flow path With the IZS option installed there is a second flow path flow path through the IZS oven that runs whenever the IZS is on standby to purge H5S from the oven chamber The IZS flow is not measured and is not available from the front panel The full flow diagrams of the standard configuration Figure 3 10 and with options installed Figure 5 2 and Figure 5 3 help in trouble shooting flow problems In general flow problems can be divided into three categories Flow is too high Flow is greater than zero but is too low and or unstable Flow is zero no flow When troubleshooting flow problems it is essential to confirm the actual flow rate without relying on the analyzer s flow display The use of an independent external flow meter to
382. tion protocol DHCP software package the Ethernet option will automatically configure its interface with your LAN However it is a good idea to check these settings to make sure that the DHCP has successfully downloaded the appropriate network settings from your network server See Section 6 10 6 2 If your network is not running DHCP you will have to configure the analyzer s interface manually See Section 6 10 6 3 Figure 3 11 shows the internal pneumatic flow of the TML87 in its Standard configuration For information on instruments in which one of the various zero span valve options refer to Figure 5 2 and Figure 5 3 05496 Rev A6 25 Getting Started TML87 Instruction Manual Refer to these diagrams whenever trouble shooting or a thorough understanding of the analyzer performance is required SAMPLE GAS INLET Ll I EXHAUST GAS OUTLET SPAN GAS INLET INSTRUMENT CHASSIS EXHAUST THROUGH OUTER E LAYER OF KICKER aI KICKER EXHAUST TO PUMP MOLYBDENUM CONVERTER SO H2S Gas Flow when multigas version of BEB BBB BRP RRBs M101E analyzer is measuring 5022 SAMPLE CHAMBER SO Scrubber 3i H S SO MODE VALVE ZERO AIR INLET 9 D f E T N z HYDROCARBON 5 SAMPLE
383. tional functions related to the recording and reporting of the data 6 11 1 1 iDAS Channels The key to the flexibility of the iDAS is its ability to store a large number of combinations of triggering events and data parameters in the form of data channels Users may create up to 20 data channels and each channel can contain one or more parameters For each channel one triggering event is selected and up to 50 data parameters which can be the same or different between channels Each data channel has several properties that define the structure of the channel and allow the user to make operational decisions regarding the channel Table 6 20 106 05496 Rev A6 87 Instruction Manual Operating Instructions Table 6 20 iDAS Data Channel Properties PROPERTY DESCRIPTION DEFAULT SETTING RANGE The name of the data channel Up to 6 letters and digits more with sensor e com but only the first six are displayed on the front panel TRIGGERING The event that triggers the data channel to ATIMER Any allowed event EVENT measure and store its data parameters See APPENDIX A 5 for a list of available triggering events NUMBER AND A User configurable list of data types to be 1 PMTDET Any available concentration LIST OF recorded in any given channel See APPENDIX A temperature pneumatic or PARAMETERS 5 for a list of available parameters diagnostic parameter REPORT PERIOD The amount of time between each channel data 000 01 00 000
384. to any changes in sample zero or span gas check for the following Dirty or plugged sample filter or sample lines Sample inlet line is too long Dirty or plugged critical flow orifices Check flows Section 11 5 2 pressures Section 11 5 1 and if necessary change the critical flow orifice Section 9 3 7 e Wrong materials in contact with sample use Teflon materials only Sample vent line is located too far from the instrument sample inlet and causes long mixing and purge times Locate sample inlet overflow vent as close as possible to the analyzer s sample inlet port e Dirty sample chamber Clean the sample chamber Insufficient time allowed for purging of lines upstream of the analyzer Insufficient time allowed for H5S calibration gas source to become stable 11 4 3 The Analyzer Doesn t Appear on the LAN or Internet Most problems related to internet communications via the Ethernet card option will be due to problems external to the analyzer e g bad network wiring or connections failed routers malfunctioning servers etc However there are several symptoms that indicate the problem may be with the Ethernet card itself 232 05496 Rev A6 TML87 Instruction Manual TROUBLESHOOTING amp REPAIR If none of the Ethernet s cards four status LED s located on the analyzer s rear panel is lit it is possible that the card is not receiving power or is suffering from a massive failure e Under the
385. to customer service TELEDYNE ML CUSTOMER SERVICE EMAIL tml support teledyne com PHONE 303 792 3300 TOLL FREE 800 846 6062 FAX 303 799 4853 05494 Rev C 1 Warranty Repair TELEDYNE TML87 Instruction Manual Questionnaire p MONITOR LABS TMLS87 A Teledyne Technologies Company Notes and further information 2 05494 Rev C TML87 Instruction Manual APPENDIX D ELECTRONIC SCHEMATICS APPENDIX D ELECTRONIC SCHEMATICS Table D 1 List of Included Electronic Schematics Document Document Title 03956 PCA 03955 Relay Driver 04354 PCA 04008 Pressure Flow Sensor Board 05703 PCA 05702 Motherboard Gen4 04181 PCA 04180 PMT Preamp 04259 PCA 04258 Keyboard Display Interface 04420 PCA 04120 UV Detector Preamp 04693 PCA 04692 UV Lamp Driver 04932 PCA Thermo Electric Cooler Board 04468 PCA 04467 Analog Output Res 05495 Rev D 1 THIS PAGE IS INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK 1 2 3 4 5 6 General Trace Width Requirements 45V DC VCC should be 15 mil 2 Digitial grounds should be at least 20 mils 3 12V and 12 return should be 30 mils 1 AC Line 4 AC lines AC Line AC Neutral RELAYO 4 signals on JP2 should be 30 mils wide with 120 mil isolation creepage dista
386. trations for both levels should be between 70 and 90 of the measurement range Zero and span data are to be used to 1 Provide data to allow analyzer adjustment for zero and span drift 2 Provide a decision point on when to calibrate the analyzer 3 Provide a decision point on invalidation of monitoring data Items 1 and 2 are described in detail in Subsection 9 1 3 of Section 2 0 9 Q A Handbook Item 3 is described in Subsection 9 1 4 of the same section Refer to the Troubleshooting Chapter 11 of this manual if the instrument is not within the allowed variations 05496 Rev 6 165 EPA Protocol Calibration TML87 Instruction Manual 8 3 1 Zero Span Check Procedures The Zero and Span calibration can be checked a variety of different ways They include Manual Zero Span Check Zero and Span can be checked from the front panel keyboard Follow the procedures described in Section 7 3 and 7 6 of this manual using calibrated SO span gas see Table 7 1 only Automatic Zero Span Checks After the appropriate setup Z S checks can be performed automatically every night Follow the procedure described in Section 7 9 of this manual using calibrated SO span gas see Table 7 1 Zero Span checks via remote contact closure Zero Span checks can be initiated via remote contact closures on the rear panel Follow the procedures described Section 7 7 1 of this manual using calibrated SO span gas see Table 7 1 Zero Span via RS 232
387. tting up this option see Section 6 10 6 5 7 Additional Manuals 5 7 1 Printed Manuals Option 70 Additional printed copies of this manual are available from Teledyne Instruments 5 7 2 Manual on CD This instruction manual is also available on CD The electronic document is stored in Adobe Systems Inc Portable Document Format PDF and is viewable with Adobe Acrobat Reader software downloadable for free at http www adobe com The CD version of the manual has many advantages Fully searchable text Hypertext links for figures tables table of contents and embedded references for quick access of individual manual portions A list of thumbnails chapters and sections displayed at the left of the text Internet links embedded in the manual will take you to the corresponding web site requires an internet connection 05496 Rev A6 43 Optional Hardware and Software TML87 Instruction Manual 5 8 Extended Warranty Options 92 amp 93 Two options are available for extending Teledyne Instruments standard warranty see Section 2 4 Both options have to be specified upon ordering the analyzer OPTION NUMBER DESCRIPTION OPT 92 Extends warranty to cover a two 2 year period from the date of purchase OPT 93 Extends warranty to cover a five 5 year period from the date of purchase 5 9 Special Software Features 5 9 1 Maintenance Mode Switch Teledyne Instruments analyzers are equipped with a sw
388. tube Concentration Standard stable for Decreasing e Drift of instrument response UV Lamp configuration at constant over time output is excessively low clean RCEL span concentration window e Flow path is clogging up Slowly Check critical flow orifice amp sintered SAMP FL SMPFLW Standard Stable Decreasing filter Operation Replace particulate filter Fluctuating e Leak in gas flow path a or e UV detector wearing out UV source Filter developing pin holes CAME RATIO COMER 57 D near e UV detector wearing out Slowly Opaque oxides building up on UV source decreasing Filter e UV lamp aging Slowly H2S OFFS OFSET1 During Zero Cal Stable increasing Falled HVPS decreasing eLeak in sample gas flow e Contamination in zero gas source e UV lamp aging Slowly e UV detector wearing out 25 SLOPE SLOPE1 Stable increasing or Leak in Sample gas or calibration gas flow decreasing path e Deterioration contamination of calibration gas source s versions appear Shown as they appear when analyzer is in H2S mode In SO mode appear 502 OFFS amp 502 SLOPE In multigas mode both 9 3 Maintenance Procedures The following procedures need to be performed regularly as part of the standard maintenance of the TML87 9 3 1 Changing the Sample Particulate Filter The particulate filter should be inspected often for signs of plugging or excess dirt It should be replaced a
389. two devices synchronized It can also in response to commands from the CPU turn off and or reset the display Additionally for analyzers with the optional maintenance switch installed See Chapter 5 the display controller turns on an LED located on the back of the keyboard interface PCA whenever the instrument is placed in maintenance mode Display Power Watchdog The TML87 s display can begin to show garbled information or lock up if the DC voltage supplied to it falls too low even momentarily To alleviate this a brown out watchdog circuit monitors the level of the power supply and in the event that the voltage level falls below a certain level resets the display by turning it off then back on C Link To The Relay PCA While the communication with the relay board is also routed through the keyboard display interface information passed to and from the relay board via this channel is not recognized by acted upon or affected by the circuitry of the keyboard display interface 10 7 Software Operation The TML87 H5S analyzer is at its heart a high performance 386 based microcomputer running MS DOS Inside the DOS shell special software developed by Teledyne Instruments interprets user commands via the various interfaces performs procedures and tasks stores data in the CPU s various memory devices and calculates the concentration of the sample gas 05496 Rev A6 217 Theory Of Operation TML87 Instruction Manual
390. ual Instrument Maintenance 9 2 Predictive Diagnostics The analyzer s test functions can be used to predict failures by looking at trends in their values The current value ofthese functions can be viewed via the front panel recorded via the iDAS system see Section 6 11 or even downloaded via the internet from a remote location using Teledyne Instruments sensor e com control software see Section 6 12 2 8 05496 Rev A6 173 Instrument Maintenance TML87 Instruction Manual Table 9 2 Predictive Uses for Test Functions iDAS CONDITION BEHAVIOR TEST FUNCTION FUNCTION EXPECTED ACTUAL INTERPRETATION lt 4 ppb with e Pneumatic Leaks instrument amp sample H2S STB N A Zero Gas Increasing system e Detector deteriorating Fluctuating e Developing leak in pneumatic system e Flow path is clogging up Constant within Slowly Check critical flow orifice amp sintered PRES SMPPRS sample gas atmospheric increasing filter changes Replace particulate filter Slowly e Developing leak in pneumatic system to decreasing vacuum developing valve failure PMT output Constant within m DRK PMT DRKPMT when UV ree 20 of check Significantly e PMT cooler failure shutter closed out value e Shutter Failure At span with Constant Decreasing e Change in instrument response IZS option response from over time SO CONC1 installed day to day e Degradation of IZS permeation
391. uch as sensor e com Such feedback is still available but a command must be issued to receive them COMPUTER 2 Computer mode inhibits echoing of typed characters and is used when the port is communicating with a computer program such as sensor e com SECURITY 4 When enabled the serial port requires a password before it will respond The only command that is active is the help screen CR HESSEN 16 The Hessen communications protocol is used in some European countries Teledyne PROTOCOL Instruments part number 02252 contains more information on this protocol E 7 1 When turned on this mode switches the COMM port settings from 2048 No parity 8 data bits 1 stop bit to Even parity 7 data bits 1 stop bit RS 485 1024 Configures the COM2 Port for RS 485 communication RS 485 mode has precedence over Multidrop mode if both are enabled MULTIDROP 32 Multidrop protocol allows a multi instrument configuration on a single communications PROTOCOL channel Multidrop requires the use of instrument IDs ENABLE 64 Enables to send a modem initialization string at power up Asserts certain lines in the MODEM RS 232 port to enable the modem to communicate ERROR 128 Fixes certain types of parity errors at certain Hessen protocol installations CHECKING XON XOFF 256 Disables XON XOFF data flow control also known as software handshaking HANDSHAKE HARDWARE Enables CTS RTS style hardwired transmission handshaking This style of data HANDSHAKE 8 transmission hand
392. uction Manual Frequently Asked Questions amp Glossary 4 0 FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS amp GLOSSARY 4 1 FAQ s The following list contains some of the most commonly asked questions relating to the TML87 H2S Analyzer Q Why is the ZERO or SPAN key not displayed during calibration A The TML87 disables certain keys whenever the chosen value is out of range for that particular parameter In this case the expected span or zero value is too different from the actually measured value for the calibration process to be valid Q Why does the ENTR key sometimes disappear on the front panel display A Sometimes the ENTR key will disappear if you select a setting that is invalid or out of the allowable range for that parameter such as trying to set the 24 hour clock to 25 00 00 or a range to more than 20 000 ppb Once you adjust the setting to an allowable value the ENTR key will re appear Can automate the calibration of my analyzer A Any analyzer with zero span valve or IZS option can be automatically calibrated using the instrument s AutoCal feature However the accuracy of the IZS option s permeation tube is 5 While this may be acceptable for basic calibration checks the IZS option is not permitted as a calibration source in applications following US EPA protocols To achieve highest accuracy it is recommended to use cylinders of calibrated span gases in combination with a zero air source Teledyne Instruments offers a
393. uously measures the pressure of the sample gas This data is used to compensate the final H2S concentration calculation for changes in atmospheric pressure when the instrument s TPC feature see Section 10 7 3 is turned on and is stored in the CPU s memory as the test function PRES also viewable via the front panel To cause the analyzer to measure and record a value for PRES press RANGE 500 0 SAMPLE SIGNAL I O lt TST TST gt CAL 5 ENTR SAMPLE ENTER SETUP PASS 818 Repeat Pressing NEXT 8 1 8 ENTR Exit at any time to return to main the PRESSURE CALIBRATION SETUP menu ENTR EXIT SETUP X X PRIMARY SETUP MENU CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MQRE DIAG PCAL ACTUAL PRES 27 20 IN HG A ENTR EXIT SETUP X X SECONDARY SETUP MENU COMM VARS DIAG ENTR accepts the new value EXIT ignores the new value Adjust these values until the displayed pressure equals the pressure measured by the independent pressure meter 05496 Rev A6 85 Operating Instructions TML87 Instruction Manual 6 9 9 Flow Calibration The flow calibration allows the user to adjust the values of the sample flow rates as they are displayed on the front panel and reported through COM ports to match the actual flow rate measured at the sample inlet This does not change the hardware measurement of the flow sensors only the software calcul
394. ure set point for pressure compensation and warning limits Sample pressure slope correction factor adjusted pressure measured pressure x slope CONV SET a Warnings 310 320 BOX_SET 30 Warnings 8 50 PMT_ SET 7 Warnings 2 12 i BAUD RATE 19200 300 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 38400 57600 115200 Converter temperature set point and warning limits Box temperature warning limits Set point is not used PMT temperature set point and warning limits RS 232 COMI mode flags Add values to combine flags quiet mode computer mode enable security 16 enable Hessen protocol 32 enable multi drop 64 enable modem 128 ignore RS 232 line errors 256 disable XON XOFF support 512 disable hardware FIFOs 1024 enable RS 485 mode 2048 even parity 7 data bits 1 stop bit 4096 enable command prompt RS 232 COMI baud rate Enclose value in double quotes 4 when setting from the RS 232 interface A 14 05492 Rev C TML87 Instruction Manual APPENDI X A 2 Setup Variables For Serial O Revision MODEM INIT Any character RS 232 COMI modem initialization the allowed string Sent verbatim plus carriage character set return to modem on power up or Up to 100 manually Enclose value in double characters long quotes when setting from the RS 232 interface BitFlag 0 65535 RS 232 COM2 mode flags Same settings as RS232 MODE BAUD R
395. urned on the instrument will also store how many sample readings were used for the AVG MIN or MAX calculation but not the readings themselves REPORT PERIODS IN PROGRESS WHEN INSTRUMENT IS POWERED OFF If the instrument is powered off in the middle of a REPORT PERIOD the samples accumulated so far during that period are lost Once the instrument is turned back on the iDAS restarts taking samples and temporarily them in volatile memory as part of the REPORT PERIOD currently active at the time of restart At the end of this REPORT PERIOD only the sample readings taken since the instrument was turned back on will be included in any AVG MIN or MAX calculation Also the STORE NUM SAMPLES feature will report the number of sample readings taken since the instrument was restarted 116 05496 Rev A6 TML87 Instruction Manual Operating Instructions To define the REPORT PERIOD follow the instruction shown in section 6 11 2 2 then press Use the PREV and NEXT keys to scroll to the data channel to be edited From the DATA ACQUISITION menu Edit Data Channel Menu SETUP X X 0 CONC ATIMER 2 4032 R PREV NEXT INS DEL EDIT PRNT EXIT SETUP X X SET SET EDIT PRINT EXIT Exits to the main Data Acquisition menu C Press SET key until you reach REPORT PERIOD Set the number of days between reports 0 366 Press keys to set hours bet
396. uter mode is used when the analyzer is connected to a computer with a dedicated interface program such as sensor e com More information regarding sensor e com can be found in later in this section or on the Teledyne Instruments website at http www teledyne ML com e Interactive mode is used with a terminal emulation programs such as HyperTerminal or a dumb computer terminal The commands that are used to operate the analyzer in this mode are listed in Table 6 24 6 12 2 2 Help Commands in Terminal Mode Table 6 24 Terminal Mode Software Commands Control T Switches the analyzer to terminal mode echo edit If mode flags 1 amp 2 are OFF the interface can be used in interactive mode with a terminal emulation program Control C Switches the analyzer to computer mode no echo no edit A carriage return is required after each command line is typed into the terminal computer The UR return command will not be sent to the analyzer to be executed until this is done On personal computers this is achieved by pressing the ENTER key BS Erases one character to the left of the cursor location m Erases the entire command line 5 ID CR This command prints a complete list of available commands along with the definitions of their functionality to the display device of the terminal or computer being used The ID number of the analyzer is only necessary if multiple analyzers are on the same communications line such as the multi drop setu
397. utoCal feature Section 7 9 e Remotely by using the external digital control inputs Section 6 12 1 2 and Section 7 7 1 or Remotely through the RS 232 485 serial I O ports see Appendix 6 for the appropriate commands Sources of zero and span gas flow must be capable of supplying at least 700 cm min Both supply lines should be vented outside of the analyzer s enclosure In order to prevent back diffusion and pressure effects these vent lines should be between 2 and 10 meters in length 5 4 2 Internal Zero Span Gas Generator Option 51 The TML87 can be equipped with an internal zero air and span gas generator IZS This option includes a heated enclosure for a permeation tube containing the calibration gas under high pressure an external scrubber for producing zero air and a set of valves for switching between the sample gas inlet and the output of the zero span subsystem functionally very similar to the valves included in the zero span valve option Figure 5 3 shows the internal pneumatic connections for a TML87 with the IZS option installed The following table contains the operational state of the valves associated with the IZS option during the analyzer s various operational modes Because the TML87 be configured to measure H2S SO or both this option is available with permeation tubes filled with either 5 or SO see Section 5 4 3 The instrument can only be fitted with one type of permeation tube at a time Theref
398. vated the analyzer performs an electric test which generates a current intended to simulate the PMT output to verify the signal handling and conditioning of the PMT preamp board 05496 6 69 Operating Instructions TML87 Instruction Manual 6 9 1 Accessing the Diagnostic Features To access the DIAG functions press the following keys SAMPLE RANGE 500 0 PPB H2S XXX X DIAG ANALOG I O CONFIGURATION lt TST TST gt CAL SETUP PREV NEXT ENTR EXIT SAMPLE ENTER SETUP PASS 818 DIAG OPTIC TEST EXIT returns to the main SAMPLE 8 1 8 ENTR EXIT PREV NEXT ENTR EXIT display EXIT returns SETUP PRIMARY SETUP MENU DIAG ELECTRICAL TEST to the PRIMARY SETUP MENU CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE EXIT PREV NEXT ENTR EXIT From this point SETUP SECONDARY SETUP MENU DIAG LAMP CALIBRATION forward EXIT returns to the SECONDARY COMM VARS DIAG EXIT PREV NEXT ENTR EXIT SETUP MENU DIAG SIGNAL I O DIAG PRESSURE CALIBRATION NEXT ENTR EXIT PREV NEXT ENTR EXIT DIAG ANALOG OUTPUT DIAG FLOW CALIBRATION PREV NEXT ENTR EXIT ENTR DIAG TEST CHAN OUTPUT PREV ENTR EXIT 6 9 2 Signal I O The signal I O diagnostic mode allows the reviewing and changing of the digital and analog input output functions of the analyzer See Appendix A 4 for a complete list of the parameters available for review under this menu 70 05496 Rev 6
399. ween reports in the format HH MM max 23 59 This is a 24 hour clock PM hours are 13 thru 23 midnight is 00 00 Example 2 15 PM 14 15 SETUP X X REPORT PERIOD 000 00 05 SET SET EDIT PRINT EXIT SETUP X X REPORT PERIODD DAYS 0 4 0 0 0 ENTR EXIT SETUP X X REPORT PERIODD TIME 01 01 0 0 0 5 ENTR EXIT If at any time an illegal entry is selected e g days gt 366 the ENTR key will disappear from the display 6 11 2 6 Number of Records ENTR accepts the new string and returns to the previous menu EXIT ignores the new string and returns to the previous menu The number of data records in the TML87 is limited to about a cumulative one million data points in all channels one megabyte of space on the disk on chip However the actual number of records is also limited by the total number of parameters and channels and other settings in the iDAS configuration Every additional data channel parameter number of samples setting etc will reduce the maximum amount of data points somewhat In general however the maximum data capacity is divided amongst all channels max 20 and parameters max 50 per channel The iDAS will check the amount of available data space and prevent the user from specifying too many records at any given point If for example the iDAS memory space can accommodate 375 more data records the ENTR key will disappear when trying to specify more than
400. where the H2S in the sample gas is converted into SO which is then exposed to ultraviolet light causing the SO to become excited SO2 As these SO molecules decay back into SO they fluoresce The instrument measures the amount of fluorescence to determine the amount of SO present in the sample chamber and by inference therefore the amount of H2S present in the sample gas Calibration of the instrument is performed in software and usually does not require physical adjustments to the instrument During calibration the microprocessor measures the sensor output signal when gases with known amounts of H2S at various concentrations are supplied and stores these measurements in memory The microprocessor uses these calibration values along with other performance parameters such as the PMT dark offset UV lamp ratio and the amount of stray light present and measurements of the temperature and pressure of the sample gas to compute the final H2S concentration This concentration value and the original information from which it was calculated are stored in the unit s internal data acquisition system iDAS Section 6 11 and reported to the user through a vacuum fluorescent display or as electronic data via several communication ports 10 1 Measurement Principle 10 1 1 H2S Conversion The TML87 H5S analyzer is basically a SO analyzer with a H2S gt SO conversion stage inserted into the gas stream before the sample gas enters the sample chamber Th
401. y default both ports operate on the RS 232 protocol The COM1 port can also be configured to operate in single or RS 232 Multidrop mode option 62 See Section 5 6 2 and 6 10 7 The COM2 port can be configured for standard RS 232 operation half duplex RS 485 communication or for access via an LAN by installing the Teledyne Instruments Ethernet interface card option 63 see Section 5 6 3 and 6 10 6 A code activated switch CAS can also be used on either port to connect typically between 2 and 16 send receive instruments host computer s printers data loggers analyzers monitors calibrators etc into one communications hub Contact Teledyne Instruments sales for more information on CAS systems 6 10 1 Analyzer ID Each type of Teledyne Instruments analyzer is configured with a default ID code The default ID code for all TML87 analyzers is 101 The ID number is only important if more than one analyzer is connected to the same communications channel such as when several analyzers are on the same Ethernet LAN see Section 6 10 6 in RS 232 Multidrop chain see Section 6 10 7 or operating over a RS 485 network see Section 6 10 4 If two analyzers of the same model type are used on one channel the ID codes of one or both of the instruments need to be changed so that they are unique to the instruments To edit the instrument s ID code press SAMPLE RANGE 500 0 PPB XXX X lt TST TST gt CAL SETUP SAMPLE ENTER SETUP PASS
402. zer It is recommended that if dynamic calibration is enabled the analyzer s test functions slope and offset values be checked frequently to assure high quality and accurate data from the instrument 158 05496 Rev A6 TML87 Instruction Manual Calibration Procedures 7 9 1 AutoCal of Instruments in INDEPENDENT or AUTO Reporting Range Modes If the analyzer is being operated in IND or AUTO Range mode then the High and Low ranges must be specified as part of the AutoCal set up This parameter appears at the end of the programming sequences after the CALIBRATE ON OFF parameter is set For example Follow standard AutoCal programming process to this point then SETUP X X CALIBRATE ON SET SET EDIT EXIT SETUP X X RANGE TO CAL LOW SET EDIT EXIT E SETUP X X RANGE TO CAL LOW LOW HIGH ENTR EXIT SETUP RANGE CAL HIGH LOW HIGH ENTR EXIT SETUP X X RANGE TO CAL HIGH lt SET EDIT EXIT SETUP SEQ 2 ZERO SPAN 2 00 30 EXIT retums to the SETUP PREV NEXT MODE SET a EXIT Menu Sequence Delta Time MODE Delta Days 7 9 2 AutoCal of instruments in Multigas Measurement Mode If the analyzer is being operated in multigas measurement mode AutoCal can only be programmed to calibrate the instrument with one of the available gases 05496 Rev 6 159 Calibration Procedures TML87 Instruction Manual If the instrument is in multigas measurement mod
403. zer is set for a Single Range amp 500 ppb a concentration of 100 ppb would be appropriate 2 Anincrease of more than 2 in the H5S reading is an indication that the efficiency of the scrubber is decreasing to the point that the absorbing material should be replaced 9 3 3 3 Changing the SO Scrubber Material l Input zero air for 5 minutes 2 Turn off analyzer 3 Locate the SO scrubber cartridge in the front of the analyzer looks like a big white cylinder See Figure 3 9 4 Disconnect the tubing from the top of the scrubber 5 Remove the two screws holding the scrubber to the instrument chassis and remove the scrubber 6 Remove the two Teflon fittings from the scrubber 7 Empty the SO scrubbing material into a hazmat bin 8 Fill each side of the scrubber with new SO scrubber material until it is inch from the bottom of the thread lines about 1 inch from the top of the scrubber do not fill it too high or the fitting will compact the material causing a restriction in the gas flow 9 Replace the Teflon tape on the fittings 10 Install both fittings back onto the scrubber 11 Put the scrubber back into the analyzer and replace the two screws on the bottom 12 Reconnect the tubing to the top of the scrubber they can be hooked up either way 13 Return analyzer to normal operation 9 3 4 Changing the External Zero Air Scrubber The chemicals in the external scrubber need to be replaced periodically according to Table
404. zer measuring measuring SO H2S D10 GREEN Unused N A N A D11 GREEN UV Lamp Shutter Shutter open Shutter closed D12 16 GREEN Unused N A N A As a Safety measure special circuitry on the Relay Board watches the status of LED D1 Should this LED ever stay ON or OFF for 30 seconds indicating that the CPU or bus has stopped functioning the Watchdog Circuit 05496 Rev A6 209 Theory Of Operation TML87 Instruction Manual will automatically shut of all valves as well as turn off the UV Source s and all heaters The Sample Pump will still be running 10 4 10 Motherboard This printed circuit assembly provides a multitude of functions including A D conversion digital input output PC 104 to translation temperature sensor signal processing and is a pass through for the RS 232 and RS 485 signals 10 4 10 1 A to D Conversion Analog signals such as the voltages received from the analyzer s various sensors are converted into digital signals that the CPU can understand and manipulate by the analog to digital converter A D Under the control of the CPU this functional block selects a particular signal input and then coverts the selected voltage into a digital word The A D consists of a voltage to frequency V F converter a programmable logic device PLD three multiplexers several amplifiers and some other associated devices The V F converter produces a frequency proportional to its input voltage The PLD cou

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

  Samsung HT-X720 Bruksanvisning  Descarcă acest fişier  Ubiquiti Networks RD-5G31-AC satellite antenna  Prince Castle Egg Forms 120-1 User's Manual  Bouillon de SABOURAUD  INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS  Máscara de soldar  

Copyright © All rights reserved. Failed to retrieve file